JP2020048845A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine making it difficult to discriminate the content of a lottery result of a special lottery by special symbols and thereby capable of causing a player to enjoy a suggestion of the lottery result till the last moment to suppress reduction in amusement.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine is provided comprising: a plurality of LEDs 1401 mounted on a function display substrate 1402 in a function display unit 1400A which is for displaying special symbols suggesting a lottery result of a special lottery, the lottery result being from a lottery performed upon a trigger of an establishment of a start condition caused by reception of a game ball to a first start port or a second start port; and a reflector front 1405 making a display of the special symbols by the plurality of LEDs 1401 visible from a player and as photographing inhibition means making it difficult to photograph the special symbols being displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 177

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port such as a first starting port or a second starting port is provided in a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, and the game medium is received in the starting port. When the start condition is satisfied, a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous when the starting condition is satisfied. A lottery result (special lottery result) drawn by this special lottery is displayed on a state display (a function display unit, a special symbol display, etc.) having a plurality of LEDs as shown in Patent Document 1. The special lottery result is displayed as a symbol by illuminating in a predetermined combination suggested after the fluctuation display by the blinking of the LED. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of a plurality of LEDs, it is difficult to understand the content of the special lottery result selected just by looking at it.

  By the way, in recent years, small digital cameras (digital cameras), mobile phones with a photographing function, and the like have become widespread, and an advantageous gaming state occurs in a conventional gaming machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1 using a digital camera or the like. By taking a special symbol (combination of a plurality of lit LEDs) and comparing the photograph (image) with the special symbol displayed on the function display unit, the contents of the special lottery result selected It becomes possible to know quickly. And if the special lottery result can be easily determined, if the special lottery result is "losing", the player will be disappointed and enjoy the effect to suggest the special lottery result There is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced by disappearing.

JP 2010-68839 A

  In view of the above circumstances, the present invention makes it difficult to determine the contents of the lottery result of the special lottery based on the special symbol, so that the suggestion of the lottery result can be enjoyed to the end and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. The challenge is to provide machines.

Means 1: In a gaming machine,
`` Plural light emitting means for displaying a special symbol indicating a lottery result of a special lottery selected by the establishment of the start condition,
A plurality of the light-emitting means so that the display of the special symbol is visually recognizable to a player, and a photographing inhibiting means that makes it difficult to photograph the displayed special symbol ". And

  Here, the establishment of the “start condition” is defined as “a specific entrance (for example, a normal winning opening) among a plurality of entrances provided in a game area in which a game medium is distributed by a driving operation of a player. , Accepting a game medium in a start-up opening, a variable start-up opening, a V winning opening, etc.), and a "game medium driven into a game area by a player's driving operation, For example, passing through a gate, a chucker, etc.).

  In addition, the lottery results (special lottery results) drawn by the special lottery include “big hits”, “medium hits”, “small hits”, “per hits”, “per probability change (per probability change)”, “time” "Short cut (time saving)", "special time (ST)", "losing", and the like.

  Examples of the "light emitting means" include "LED", "organic EL", "incandescent lamp", "fluorescent lamp", "neon lamp", "cold cathode tube", and the like. In addition, the plurality of light emitting means may be capable of displaying, in addition to the special symbol, an ordinary symbol indicating the lottery result of the ordinary lottery, the number of held lottery results waiting to be displayed, the number of rounds in the big hit, and the like.

  Further, as "imaging inhibition means", "a means for making the light from all the light emitting means invisible only when viewed by both eyes of the player at the same time", and "imaging invisible light which cannot be seen by the player" To make all the light-emitting means emit light, to hide the light from the light-emitting means by halation, and to accurately shoot by the relationship between the blinking speed of multiple light-emitting means and the shutter speed That are not to be performed ".

  Specific examples of the "imaging inhibition means" include "a plurality of cylindrical light-emitting cylinders capable of independently emitting light from each light-emitting means in different forward directions", "light-emitting means". The light from the means is formed in a cylindrical shape capable of independently emitting light forward, and a part of the light from the light emitting means is made visible only to one eye of the player, and at least a part of the rest is provided. A plurality of light emitting cylinders, which allow the light from the light emitting means to be visible only with the other eye of the player, '' and `` a light provided from a plurality of light emitting means in front of the light emitting means. A light guide plate capable of emitting light forward, and invisible light emitting means for irradiating invisible light capable of being photographed on the side surface of the light guide plate, '' and `` provided close to the light emitting means, rather than the light emitting means. High-brightness light emitting means that can irradiate high-brightness light forward What is composed "," A plurality of light emitting means are composed of a left light emitting means and a right light emitting means which are separated from each other, and light from the left light emitting means can be visually recognized only by the left eye of the player A cylindrical left radiation tube, and a cylindrical right radiation tube that allows the light from the right light emitting means to be visible only to the right eye of the player. A light emission control unit that blinks a plurality of light emission means at a speed at which the player can recognize that the light is turned on. "

  According to the configuration of the means 1, a plurality of light emitting means for displaying a special symbol indicating a lottery result of a special lottery selected in response to establishment of the starting condition on the gaming machine, and a special symbol by the plurality of light emitting means are displayed. And a photographing inhibition unit that makes it difficult to photograph the displayed special symbol while making the display visually recognizable by the player (in [Embodiment of the invention], [10. Another Embodiment of Function Display Unit], FIGS. 174 to 179, etc.).

  Thereby, when the lottery result of the special lottery is selected by the establishment of the start condition, the special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed by a plurality of light emitting means after the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed by lighting / flashing a plurality of light emitting means. It is displayed by a combination of turning on / off the means. At this time, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting means in a favorable state, so that the effect of displaying the special symbol can be reliably exhibited. If a plurality of light emitting means are photographed by a digital camera or a mobile phone camera, etc., the light emission of the light emitting means is blocked by the photographing inhibiting means, and the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means cannot be accurately captured. It is possible to make it difficult to easily determine whether or not a special symbol in which an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player has an advantage is displayed, and to enjoy the suggestion of the lottery result of the special lottery to the end. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the photographing inhibiting means is provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means, and is formed in a cylindrical shape capable of independently emitting light from the light emitting means to the front, and a part thereof is seated forward. The light from the light emitting means can be visually recognized only by one eye of the player who has the light, and the light from the light emitting means can be visually recognized only by the other eye of the player who has at least a part of the rest sitting forward. It is desirable to comprise a plurality of light emitting cylinders. Thereby, in the plurality of light emitting cylinders that independently emit light from the plurality of light emitting means to the front, part of the light is emitted only to one eye of the player, and at least one of the remaining lights is emitted. Because the part is radiated only to the other eye of the player for viewing, by simultaneously viewing with both eyes of the player, it is possible to see the light from all the light emitting means, The special symbol can be clearly recognized, and the display function by the plurality of light emitting means can be exhibited without inferiority. And, when a plurality of light emitting means are photographed by a camera of a digital camera or a mobile phone, as described above, the light from all the light emitting means is visible when viewed with both eyes of the player, so that with a single-lens camera Only one of the eyes can be photographed, and it is difficult to accurately photograph the light emitting state of all the light emitting means, and it is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine having the above-described effects. be able to.

  In addition, as described above, when the shooting inhibition unit is configured by a plurality of light emitting cylinders, a part of the plurality of light emitting cylinders is inclined in the front-rear direction toward the position of one eye of the player, The rest may be inclined in the front-rear direction toward the position of the other eye of the player, or the rest may be inclined in the front-rear direction toward the position of the other eye of the player. You may make it turn straight in the front-back direction. Accordingly, in addition to the same operation and effect as described above, the light from all the light emitting means can be seen in a good state from a player other than the player sitting in front of the gaming machine due to the inclination of the light emitting tube. Because it is possible to make it difficult for other players, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, it is possible to reduce the possibility of peeping from other players, You can entertain the game without hesitation.

  Further, as described above, in the case where the photographing inhibition means is constituted by a plurality of light emitting cylinders, the plurality of light emitting means are divided into a plurality of left light emitting means and a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) rightward from the plurality of left light emitting means. A plurality of light emitting means for right may be provided, and a plurality of light emitting cylinders may be provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means for left and the plurality of light emitting means for right. Thereby, by directing each light emitting cylinder straight in the front-rear direction, in addition to being able to achieve the same operation and effect as described above, when molding a plurality of light emitting cylinders, it becomes easy to remove the mold, It is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the gaming machine.

  Further, a photographing inhibiting unit is provided in front of the plurality of light emitting units, and a light guide plate capable of radiating light incident from the side to the front, and an invisible light for irradiating the photographable invisible light to the side surface of the light guide plate. And light emitting means. Thus, the light from the plurality of light emitting means can be seen from the player side through the light guide plate, so that the special symbol by the plurality of light emitting means can be shown to the player in a favorable state. At this time, when the invisible light is irradiated from the invisible light emitting means to the side surface of the light guide plate, the invisible light incident from the side surface is radiated from the light guide plate toward the player in front, but is radiated from the light guide plate. Since the invisible light cannot be seen by the player, the special symbol by the plurality of light emitting means can be clearly recognized through the light guide plate, and the display function by the plurality of light emitting means can be exhibited as much as possible. Then, if the digital camera or the like shoots from the front while the invisible light emitting means is emitting light, the invisible light radiated forward from the light guide plate will be captured depending on the model of the digital camera or the like. The light from the plurality of light emitting means provided behind becomes difficult to be reflected by being shined, making it difficult to determine the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. Can be embodied.

  Further, the photographing inhibiting means may be constituted by a high-luminance light-emitting means which is provided close to the light-emitting means and which can irradiate light of higher luminance than the light-emitting means to the front. Thus, when the high-luminance light emitting means provided close to the plurality of light-emitting means emits light, the high-intensity light from the high-intensity light emitting means makes the user feel dazzling, but feels the brightness of the player (human) dynamic. Because the range is wide, it is possible to see the light from multiple light emitting means while being dazzling, so it is possible to recognize special symbols by multiple light emitting means and display the display function by multiple light emitting means as much as possible Can be. When a plurality of light-emitting devices are photographed with a digital camera or the like while the high-luminance light-emitting device is emitting light, halation is caused by light from the high-luminance light-emitting device because the dynamic range for brightness is narrower in digital cameras and the like than in humans. Occurrence and overexposure in the vicinity of the high-luminance light-emitting means can prevent some of the plurality of light-emitting means from being imaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting units unclear, and it is possible to realize a gaming machine having the same operation and effect as described above.

  In addition, the photographing inhibition unit may be configured to include a light emission control unit that blinks the plurality of light emission units at a speed at which the player can recognize that the special symbol is lit. With this, even if the light-emitting means is blinking at a predetermined speed by the light-emitting control unit, it seems to be lit from the player, so that the display of the special symbol by the plurality of light-emitting means can be clearly shown, The display function of the light emitting means can be sufficiently exhibited. Then, if the light emitting means blinking at a predetermined speed by the light emitting control unit is photographed by a digital camera or the like, the light emitting means may be turned on but turned off depending on the shutter speed. Even when photographing a plurality of light-emitting units that appear in (state), the light-emitting units may be turned on or off depending on the timing at which the shutter is released, making it difficult to determine the light-emission status of the plurality of light-emitting units. It is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine having the above-described effects.

Means 2: In the structure of the means 1,
"The imaging inhibiting means is:
It is provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means, and is formed in a tubular shape capable of independently emitting light from the light emitting means to the front, and a part of a player sitting forward. A plurality of light sources that allow the light from the light emitting unit to be visible only with one eye, and that allow the light from the light emitting unit to be visible only to the other eye of the player who has at least a part of the rest sitting forward. Composed of a light-emitting cylinder. "

  Here, examples of the “light emitting cylinder” include “cylindrical”, “polygonal cylindrical”, and “irregular cylindrical such as a star and a heart”. In addition, the light emitting tube may be hollow or a transparent light guide member may be inserted.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the photographing inhibiting means is provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means, and is formed in a cylindrical shape capable of independently emitting light from the light emitting means to the front, and is partially formed. The light from the light emitting means can be viewed only with one eye of the player sitting forward, and at least a part of the remaining light from the light emitting means only with the other eye of the player sitting forward. (See [Description of 1405 before reflector, 1414 before reflector, etc.] in [Embodiment of the invention]).

  Thereby, in the plurality of light emitting cylinders that independently emit light from the plurality of light emitting means to the front, part of the light is emitted only to one eye of the player, and at least one of the remaining lights is emitted. Because the part is radiated only to the other eye of the player for viewing, by simultaneously viewing with both eyes of the player, it is possible to see the light from all the light emitting means, The special symbol can be clearly recognized, and the display function by the plurality of light emitting means can be exhibited without inferiority.

  And, when a plurality of light emitting means are photographed by a camera of a digital camera or a mobile phone, as described above, the light from all the light emitting means is visible when viewed with both eyes of the player, so that with a single-lens camera Only one of the eyes can be photographed, and it is difficult to accurately photograph the light emitting state of all the light emitting means, and it is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine having the above-described effects. be able to.

  In addition, a part of the plurality of light emitting cylinders constituting the photographing inhibition means is inclined in the front-rear direction toward the position of one eye of the player, and the rest is moved to the position of the other eye of the player. May be inclined to the front and rear direction, and the rest may be inclined to the front and rear direction toward the position of the other eye of the player, and may be inclined straight to the front and rear direction. You may do it. Accordingly, in addition to the same operation and effect as described above, the light from all the light emitting means can be seen in a good state from a player other than the player sitting in front of the gaming machine due to the inclination of the light emitting tube. Because it is possible to make it difficult for other players, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, it is possible to reduce the possibility of peeping from other players, You can entertain the game without hesitation.

  In addition, the plurality of light emitting units include a plurality of left light emitting units, and a plurality of right light emitting units separated from the plurality of left light emitting units by a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) to the right. A plurality of light emitting tubes may be provided in front of the light emitting means and the plurality of right light emitting means. Thereby, by directing each light emitting cylinder straight in the front-rear direction, in addition to being able to achieve the same operation and effect as described above, when molding a plurality of light emitting cylinders, it becomes easy to remove the mold, It is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the gaming machine.

Means 3: In the structure of the means 1 or 2,
"The imaging inhibiting means is:
A light guide plate that is provided in front of the plurality of light emitting units and can radiate light incident from the side to the front,
And invisible light emitting means for irradiating invisible light capable of being photographed on the side surface of the light guide plate. "

  Here, the “invisible light (invisible light)” includes infrared rays, ultraviolet rays, and the like. Further, the invisible light emitting means may emit light at all times, or may emit light only when a special symbol is displayed.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the photographing inhibiting means is provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means, and a light guide plate capable of emitting light incident from the side to the front, and an invisible light photographable on the side surface of the light guide plate. (In [Embodiment], refer to the description relating to the function display unit 1400C).

  Thus, the light from the plurality of light emitting means can be seen from the player side through the light guide plate, so that the special symbol by the plurality of light emitting means can be shown to the player in a favorable state. At this time, when the invisible light is irradiated from the invisible light emitting means to the side surface of the light guide plate, the invisible light incident from the side surface is radiated from the light guide plate toward the player in front, but is radiated from the light guide plate. Since the invisible light cannot be seen by the player, the special symbol by the plurality of light emitting means can be clearly recognized through the light guide plate, and the display function by the plurality of light emitting means can be exhibited as much as possible.

  Then, if the digital camera or the like shoots from the front while the invisible light emitting means is emitting light, the invisible light radiated forward from the light guide plate will be captured depending on the model of the digital camera or the like. The light from the plurality of light emitting means provided behind becomes difficult to be reflected by being shined, making it difficult to determine the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. Can be embodied.

Means 4: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 3,
"The imaging inhibiting means is:
A high-brightness light-emitting means that is provided close to the light-emitting means and can irradiate light of higher brightness than the light-emitting means to the front. "

  Here, the "high-brightness light-emitting means" may be provided on the same substrate as a plurality of light-emitting means for displaying a special symbol or the like, or different from the plurality of light-emitting means for displaying a special symbol or the like. It may be provided on a substrate. The high-luminance light-emitting means may be used only as a photographing inhibition means, or may be used for light-emitting effects such as a light-emitting decorative body. The high-luminance light-emitting means may emit light only when a special symbol is displayed in a plurality of light-emitting means.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the photographing inhibiting means is constituted by a high-luminance light-emitting means provided close to the light-emitting means and capable of irradiating light of higher luminance than the light-emitting means to the front ( [Description of Embodiments] is described in paragraph [1652] and the like.

  Thus, when the high-luminance light emitting means provided close to the plurality of light-emitting means emits light, the high-intensity light from the high-intensity light emitting means makes the user feel dazzling, but feels the brightness of the player (human) dynamic. Because the range is wide, it is possible to see the light from multiple light emitting means while being dazzling, so it is possible to recognize special symbols by multiple light emitting means and display the display function by multiple light emitting means as much as possible Can be.

  If a plurality of light emitting means are photographed with a digital camera or the like while the high luminance light emitting means is emitting light, the dynamic range for brightness is narrower than that of a human in a digital camera or the like, so halation is caused by light from the high luminance light emitting means. Occurrence and overexposure in the vicinity of the high-luminance light-emitting means can prevent some of the plurality of light-emitting means from being imaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting units unclear, and it is possible to realize a gaming machine having the same operation and effect as described above.

Means 5: In any one of the structures from the means 1 to the means 4,
"The imaging inhibiting means is:
And a light emission control unit that blinks the plurality of light emission means at a speed at which the player can recognize that the special symbol is lit. "

  Here, the blinking speed of the light emitting means is preferably in the range of 30 Hz to 100 Hz. If the blinking speed is slower than this, the light emitting means will not appear to be lit and it will blink and appear as the special symbol is fluctuating, and if the blinking speed is faster than this, when shooting This is because the image is taken in a lit state.

  The “light emission control unit” may be provided on a main control board (main control unit) that performs a special lottery, or may be provided between the main control board that performs a special lottery and the light emitting unit. good. Also, the timing and the blinking speed of the plurality of light emitting units may be made different from each other by the light emission control unit.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the photographing inhibiting means is constituted by a light emission control unit for blinking the plurality of light emitting means at a speed at which the player can recognize that the special symbol is lit ( [Description of Embodiments] is described in paragraph [1652] and the like.

  With this, even if the light-emitting means is blinking at a predetermined speed by the light-emitting control unit, it seems to be lit from the player, so that the display of the special symbol by the plurality of light-emitting means can be clearly shown, The display function of the light emitting means can be sufficiently exhibited. Then, if the light emitting means blinking at a predetermined speed by the light emitting control unit is photographed by a digital camera or the like, the light emitting means may be turned on but turned off depending on the shutter speed. Even when photographing a plurality of light-emitting units that appear in (state), the light-emitting units may be turned on or off depending on the timing at which the shutter is released, making it difficult to determine the light-emission status of the plurality of light-emitting units. It is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine having the above-described effects.

Means 6: In the gaming machine,
`` Plural light emitting means for displaying a special symbol indicating a lottery result of a special lottery selected by the establishment of the start condition,
It is provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means, and is formed in a tubular shape capable of independently emitting light from the light emitting means to the front, and one of the players sitting partially forward. A plurality of lights that allow the light from the light emitting means to be visible only with the eyes, and also allow the light from the light emitting means to be visible only to the other eye of the player sitting at least part of the rest forward. Radiating cylinder, comprising: a photographing inhibition means for making it difficult to photograph the special symbol displayed while making the display of the special symbol by the plurality of light emitting means visible to the player. Be ".

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the gaming machine has a plurality of light emitting means for displaying a special symbol indicating a lottery result of the special lottery selected when the starting condition is satisfied, and a plurality of light emitting means provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means. And is formed into a cylindrical shape capable of independently emitting light from the light emitting means to the front, and the light from the light emitting means is visually recognized only by one eye of a player who is partially seated forward. And a plurality of light-emitting cylinders that allow the light from the light-emitting means to be visible only with the other eye of the player who has at least a part of the rest seated forward. And a photographing inhibiting means for making it difficult to photograph the displayed special symbol while making the display of the special symbol by the means visible to the player.

  Thereby, when the lottery result of the special lottery is selected by the establishment of the start condition, the special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed by a plurality of light emitting means after the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed by lighting / flashing a plurality of light emitting means. It is displayed by a combination of turning on / off the means. At this time, the light from the plurality of light emitting means is partially radiated only to one eye of the player by the plurality of light radiating cylinders which independently radiate forward, and the remaining at least Since part of the light is radiated only to the other eye of the player, the light from all the light emitting means can be seen by simultaneously viewing with both eyes of the player. It is possible to visually recognize the lighting or extinguishing of the light emitting element in a favorable state, and it is possible to clearly recognize the special symbol by the plurality of light emitting means, so that the display function by the plurality of light emitting means can be fully exhibited. And, when a plurality of light emitting means are photographed by a camera of a digital camera or a mobile phone, as described above, the light from all the light emitting means is visible when viewed with both eyes of the player, so that with a single-lens camera Only one of the eyes can be photographed, and it is difficult to accurately photograph the light emission status of all the light emitting means. Therefore, since it is not possible to accurately capture the light emission status of the plurality of light emitting means, it is easy to determine whether or not a special symbol in which an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player is advantageous is displayed. It is possible to make it impossible to discriminate, and it is possible to entertain the suggestion of the lottery result of the special lottery to the end, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, a part of the plurality of light emitting cylinders constituting the photographing inhibition means is inclined in the front-rear direction toward the position of one eye of the player, and the rest is moved to the position of the other eye of the player. May be inclined to the front and rear direction, and the rest may be inclined to the front and rear direction toward the position of the other eye of the player, and may be inclined straight to the front and rear direction. You may do it. Accordingly, in addition to the same operation and effect as described above, the light from all the light emitting means can be seen in a good state from a player other than the player sitting in front of the gaming machine due to the inclination of the light emitting tube. Because it is possible to make it difficult for other players, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, it is possible to reduce the possibility of peeping from other players, You can entertain the game without hesitation.

  In addition, the plurality of light emitting units include a plurality of left light emitting units, and a plurality of right light emitting units separated from the plurality of left light emitting units by a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) to the right. A plurality of light emitting tubes may be provided in front of the light emitting means and the plurality of right light emitting means. Thereby, by directing each light emitting cylinder straight in the front-rear direction, in addition to being able to achieve the same operation and effect as described above, when molding a plurality of light emitting cylinders, it becomes easy to remove the mold, It is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the gaming machine.

Means 7: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 6,
The gaming machine is
In the game area in which the game medium is distributed by the player, a plurality of game media are arranged so as to be able to receive the game medium, and a reception port including a specific reception port in which the starting condition is satisfied by the reception of the game medium;
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of game media into the reception port.

  Here, the "accepting entrance" includes "a general winning opening which is always open in the gaming area", and "an open gaming state which is always open in the gaming area, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by receiving the game medium. Winning prize port (starting port (specific reception port)) in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a game medium, and when a game medium is received at a specific reception port (chucker) in the game area, , A variable winning prize port (variable starting port, role winning prize port, etc.) that allows the reception of a game medium, and a "special area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area through which the game medium passes. A variable winning port (variable starting port, bonus winning port, etc.) that allows the reception of game media according to the result of a normal lottery to be drawn, a specific area in the gaming area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) ) According to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game media, it is possible to receive the game media, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game media will generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage. "Variable starting winning opening (variable starting opening (specified receiving entrance))" and "the gaming medium received in the bonus winning opening is distributed by the distribution means and received, and the advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage. "V winning prize holes to be generated", and "a large winning prize opening or a winning prize winning opening for opening and closing a predetermined pattern to receive a game medium" as an advantageous gaming state in which a player is advantageous.

  In addition, as the “pachinko machine”, “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous by receiving a game medium into the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means A special lottery result display means for displaying a special lottery result by displaying a special lottery by a combination of the special symbols displayed stopped, and displaying a special lottery result by displaying the special symbol fluctuated according to the special lottery result. (A so-called digi-pachi machine) comprising a special game state generating means for generating a special game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when the special lottery result to be generated is displayed. A distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth, and, when the game medium distributed by the distribution means is received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. (A so-called “floating machine”) having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous, and “a game medium having a large winning opening and a role winning opening, and a starting medium. Opening and closing the special winning opening or the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game, and the gaming media accepted by the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening Or, an apparatus provided with an advantageous game state generating means for opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous (a so-called multifunction device).

  According to the configuration of the means 7, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in the game area where the game media are distributed by the player so that the game media can be received. The present invention is a pachinko machine that includes a receiving port including a receiving medium, and a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to receiving the game medium into the receiving port. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the operation and effect of any of the above means can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine that can make the suggestion of the lottery result enjoyable to the end by making it difficult to determine the content of the lottery result of the special lottery based on the special symbol, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position from the front right. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame left assembly of the outer frame, and the outer frame right assembly, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the front and rear, and (c) is a cylinder in the conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. 34A is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34A disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing a movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown by being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the handle cover unit from the disassembly. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when disassembled and viewed from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the handle unit from disassembly from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit when disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II-II in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the air line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at a portion of the lower counter ball supply port, and (b) is a main part of the conventional door frame by cutting the same part as (a). FIG. It is a top view which expands and shows the site | part of the ball lending operation unit in the plate unit of a door frame. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from the front upper part. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in a state where the rendering operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting / lowering spring holding member is at the position of the moving end, and (b) is a rendering operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in the state which moved to the raising position. It is a sectional view of a production operation unit in a state where the production operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downward moving end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect operation part outer peripheral decoration board, the decoration board outside a button, and the decoration board in a button in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of a production operation part unit which shows the example which provided a plurality of contact detection bodies in the production operation part unit of the production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which connected several contact detection bodies to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is (a) of the contact detection sensor main body and several contact detection bodies in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is a production operation unit which makes a dish left decoration unit, a dish right decoration unit, a production operation unit, etc. of a plate unit movable forward and backward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body in the front side and the back side of etc. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the contact detection body which has decorativeness, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows another embodiment of the effect operation unit typically. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line wu in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in FIG. (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in a state where the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame, and (b) is an outer layer transparent in (a) while keeping the inner layer as it is. FIG. 5 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the state shown in FIG. It is a front view which shows each decorative board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the part of the effect operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction center. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from behind. (A) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 100B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in an upper part of a main part frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the hinge side back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the site | part of a tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of another embodiment is seen from back. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is ( It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the tank rail etc. cut | disconnected by the car line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross-section, a flow of a game ball in the tank rail in FIG. 107. (A) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view seen. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) viewed from the lower right rear. 111 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) when disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 111A is a cross-sectional view taken along a cut line in FIG. 111A, FIG. 111B is a cross-sectional view taken along a cool line in FIG. 111A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the cake line. FIG. 111 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine including the board unit of FIG. 111 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which made the out sensor detachable, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the out sensor in (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board unit of 3rd Embodiment which omits the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from right front, (b) is the board unit of (a) which is seen from left front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right back. 119A is a plan view of the board unit of FIG. 119, FIG. 119B is a cross-sectional view cut along a cocoon line in FIG. 119A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing. FIG. 122 is a cross-sectional view cut along a section line in FIG. 121 (a). FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 when exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 when disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool into the board unit of FIG. 119; FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 119. It is a front view of the game board in which the center role etc. were made opaque in the pachinko machine. 129 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front right. FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from a function display unit on a main control board. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the center role etc. were made transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked from behind. It is a front view of the game board which cuts a front unit in parallel with the surface of a game panel, and shows the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the upper right corner of the front component and the game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along a soot line in (a), and (c) is (a) FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main component, which is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center role, as viewed from the front, and (b) is a portion of a separation hole in a front member on the front side of the lower right guide route in the center role. FIG. 4 is a side cross-sectional view taken from right and cut right and left. (A) is a perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member disassembled and viewed from the front, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member and viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. (A) is a front view of a gate member, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the Sec-line in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the right game ball in a front unit. FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of a first attacker unit and a second attacker unit in FIG. 144. It is a front view of a game board which shows arrangement of a magnetic sensor. (A) is an explanatory view showing a direction of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting a magnetic line of force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory view showing a direction of a magnetic sensor that is unable to detect a magnetic line of force from a magnet, and (c) is It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the detection range by a magnetic sensor by a perspective view, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the magnetic sensor and magnetic body which cannot detect the line of magnetic force from a magnet, (e) FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a magnetic sensor capable of detecting a line of magnetic force from a magnet and a magnetic body. (A) is a perspective view showing a state where the magnetic sensor is held by the holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a state where the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is a holding state. It is an exploded view which shows a member in cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the back. It is a front view of the back front production unit in a back unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back front production unit cut in the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part in (a), and (c) is (a) () Is an enlarged sectional view of the right portion. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back front decoration unit of the back front effecting unit and looked at from the front with the light guide plate. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decorative unit disassembled to see only the back front left first decorative body, the back front left second decorative body, the back front left third decorative body, and the back front left decorative body base from behind. is there. (A) is a front view of the back front left first decorative body shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a transparent front view. It is a front view of the back front left third decorative body shown in a state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide plate in a back front production unit, the light guide plate, and the decoration board | substrate for making the back front left decoration unit emit light, and (b) is a guide figure in the back front production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light board and the decoration board | substrate for making the decorative body of a lower back front effect unit emit light decoration from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which made the back front left decorative unit luminous decoration. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which a first pattern of the light guide plate emits light, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which a second pattern of the light guide plate emits light. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission structure of the 2nd pattern of a light guide plate. It is a front view of the back front production unit shown in the state where the 2nd picture of the light guide plate emitted light. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the lower back upper first decorative part of the back upper upper movable decorative body in the back rear upper effecting unit of the back unit to the descending position in a state facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the back upper upper second decoration part in the state where the back upper upper movable decoration in the back rear upper effect unit of the back unit was moved to the lowered position is directed forward. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the rear left movable decorative body and the rear right movable decorative body in the rear behind lower production unit of the rear unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower front lower middle decoration body in the lower front lower stage effect unit of the lower front effect unit of the rear unit is raised. A state in which the back left front decoration unit, the back front left upper logo decoration unit, the back front left sub-decoration unit, and the back front left band decoration unit of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front production unit of the back unit are luminously decorated. It is a front view of the game board shown. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 1st design of the light guide plate in the back front production unit of the back unit in the state where it was made to luminously decorate. A game in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back-front production unit of the back unit is illuminated and decorated, and the back-left movable decorative body and the back-back right movable decorative body in the back-back lower production unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of a board. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 2nd pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effecting unit of the back unit in the state which made the light emission decoration. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) shows an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same portion as (a). It is a front view. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) shows a state in which the back front left decorative unit of the back front effecting unit in (a) is illuminated and decorated. FIG. FIG. 171 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which a panel plate of a game panel is decorated with light emission. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the panel board and the cell in the game board of 3rd Embodiment, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a sectional view taken along the line in (a), (c) is a front view of the function display unit of (a). FIG. 2D is a perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174 as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174 when viewed from the rear after being disassembled. FIG. 174 is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 174 and the player. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the function display unit of 3rd Embodiment, and a player. It is sectional drawing of the function display unit of 4th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing which shows 2nd embodiment of attachment of a magnetic sensor, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows attachment of the magnetic sensor of (a) by a perspective view, (c) is (b). It is an exploded perspective view which shows the attachment of a magnetic sensor in an exploded manner, and (d) is an exploded perspective view of attachment of a magnetic sensor shown by a holding member different from (c). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which uses the isolation | separation hole of the 1st member for removing a decoration body as a positioning hole with respect to a 2nd member in a cross section, (b) is the 2nd for removing a decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows in cross section the example in which the closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole of one member, (c) is a cross-sectional view in which the decorative bodies having different thicknesses are attached in (b). (D) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as the mounting hole of the decorative body. (A) is explanatory drawing shown from the front in the state which attached the decorative body to the 1st member, (b) is sectional drawing of (a), (c) is mounting the decorative body different from (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st member which was set from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, (b) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member, and (c) is It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the decorative body provided symmetrically and a 1st member, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the decorative body provided symmetrically and the first member in a different shape from (c). is there. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a decorative body and a movable 1st member from the front, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the data line in (a), (c) is (a) FIGS. 7A and 7B are explanatory views showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member in FIGS. 5C and 5C, and FIG. 6D is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative body having a different form from that of FIG. It is explanatory drawing, (e) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the teaching line in (d).

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is at the ascending position, and FIG. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 with the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 extending vertically and separated from each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the upper outer frame assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower frame lower hinge member 60 allow the outer frame 2 to be connected to the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  Also, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 195. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game using the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. A main frame upper hinge member 510 and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a power supply board 630 having a power switch 630a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and a payout control board 63 , A back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the space between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. And a locking unit 650 for locking.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to a rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311; a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310; The peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) arranged and a predetermined effect image arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. A performance display device 1600 capable of displaying includes a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N which are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. (For example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B), a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is implanted in the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  The game ball B can be driven by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Thereby, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the gaming area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the front effect unit 3100, the back rear. It is possible to entertain the player by causing the luminous effect and the movable effect to be performed by the upper effect unit 3200, the back lower effect unit 3300, and the like.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down, respectively, and are arranged left and right apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to an upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward in a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 11a in the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of the upper portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c of the rear side to be inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to the right. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, so that the outer side is fixed. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and causes the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, an outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper right connecting member attached to an upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and an outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a which is flatly depressed to the left at a rear portion of the right-side surface where the front-rear direction is divided into three equal parts, and a left portion which is leftward from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging in the upward direction, and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixed portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixed portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixed portion 23b behind the horizontal fixed portion 23a, and a rear side of the upper horizontal fixed portion 23b And a flat contact portion 23d extending short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to hook an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates back and forth through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper and lower fixing portions 12b and the upper and lower fixing portions 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively, while the upper and lower fixing portions 12b and 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are depressed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41, A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open frontward, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with cutouts 41a that are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are respectively inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes to the front end side from a rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portion 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the open rear side cooperates with the rear panel 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends right and left on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front side of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tube part 43a extending left and right and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about ３ of the entire length of the rear plate 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the whole rear member 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder 43 a. The enclosure 624a is in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by staying the game ball B at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as going backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the inner space 40a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d that rises from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized entry of a tool. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upright wall portion 44d, the unauthorized tool abuts on the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion occurs. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B that has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason becomes the standing wall portion. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game balls B are staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B are sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole 60d. Through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel 42 and the rear panel 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and have two cylinders extending in the front and rear directions. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frames 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is in the form of a strip extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state such that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (the curtain plate internal space 40a) to communicate with the outside through the gap between the blade portions 46b so as to be able to ventilate.

  The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted rearward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This prevents sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

  According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the main frame speaker 622 to the outside from the inner space 40a of the curtain plate is transmitted to the handle cover unit 290 obliquely upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. Through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295, the handle cover 180 can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated. Thereby, when the player pushes his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) to rotate the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame is formed. By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending wind into the front tube portion 291a, the player can be surprised, and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

  Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Accordingly, the port member 47 is also released to a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players traveling in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The effect sound can be heard, the attention of the player can be attracted by the effect sound, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 provided in the main frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect sound with a deeper bass sound, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 for mounting the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a lower portion extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extension portion 51b to a portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock body 52a, and a lock member 52 extending leftward from a rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c at a position on the front side of the lock body 52a so as to accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the body frame of the hinge member 510 on the body frame.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock main body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to penetrate vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and allow only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by stamping and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 60 d coincide with the first discharge ports 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and the air can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extending vertically when viewed from the front. The inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover a lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 , A handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a plate unit 200 mounted on the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the plate unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 with the The door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit, and the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose front view is extended vertically and having a door window 101a penetrating forward and backward, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. , A speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view, a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in rear view at a lower rear portion of the door frame base 101, and a back surface of the door frame main relay board 104. Door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side as viewed from the side, handle rear relay board 106 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear, a handle relay board cover 108 that covers the handle relay board 106 from the rear, and a cable that covers the wiring cable. It includes a cover 109, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reaching the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player. The handle unit 180 operates the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery to cause the game ball B in the upper plate 201 to be released by the ball launching device. 540 is for playing a game to be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side of the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable with respect to the front, and the front surface of the main frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable, and the game board 5 mounted on the main frame 4. Of the game area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear of the door frame base 101 in rear view. .

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay board at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the rear of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. , Which is attached to the rear side of the door frame and covers the relay board 106 after the handle from the rear side, and a cable which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear junction board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  In the door frame base unit 100, a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 are provided at a lower front corner, a plate unit 200 is provided at a lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 is provided at a left outer front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outside front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the top outside front surface of the door window 101a.

  Further, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42 and the like) inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side. A cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and a front left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. And a ball feed opening 101e for allowing the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140 to face forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for the upper plate which penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to a lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view, and which faces the through ball passage 150a of the fal cover unit 150 forward; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed at the lower left corner in front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to favorably guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on a rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame auxiliary relay board, relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner in rear view at the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and has a connection cable 503 (FIG. 82) extending from the main body frame 4. And FIG. 83) are connected.

  The outer shape of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of the upper part of the rectangle extending vertically and a part extending vertically. The door frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame left side lower decorative board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. This is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 form a door extending vertically above and below the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape having an outer shape extending left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 below the ball feeding opening 101e and on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The relay board 106 after the handle is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered by the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover after the handle 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to form a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and at the left in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that are vertically separated and are disposed at right and left sides and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcement frame 112 and a plurality of cylinders are vertically mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 so as to be vertically separated from each other. And a hooking member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down with a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart left and right and has a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. A pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extensions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates forward and backward. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by punching a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is The door frame base 101 is assembled below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. As a result, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge-rotatable manner in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending part penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121 b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end is an upper end. A portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame has its upper end rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121 around a portion extending vertically of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 moves the entire upper hinge pin 122. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 allows the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to be inserted into or pulled out of the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below. it can. By inserting the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view can be hinged with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinged in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge rotatable manner in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The hinge member 125 below the door frame is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 22) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the protruding piece 125b extending vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 inserts the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 so that the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34A is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 1 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2D is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. FIG. FIG. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state where the movable mechanism is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, (c) is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

  The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to connect the outer frame 2 to the main body. It is used to open and close the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole provided in the rear of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into a pair of cutouts to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end side of the cylinder main body 131 and rotating together with rotation of a regular key inserted into the key hole 132; , A second cam member 135 rotatably mounted around the axis in the front-rear direction at a position below the cylinder body 131, and an upper end rotated at a position to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 has a strip shape and is rotatably mounted on the lower end side of the second cam member 135 so as to be rotatable at a position on the right side of the rotation center of the second cam member 135. It is rotatably mounted at a position below the center and the lower end is rotatable at a position below the rotation center of the second cam member 135. A second arm 137 strip-shaped mounted, and a.

  In addition, the cylinder lock 130 covers the cylinder main body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (the rotation transmitting member 133). Rivets for rotatably mounting the rear cover 138 attached to the upper and lower ends 115 of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139.

  The first cam member 134 has an upper end of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and an upper end of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rotation transmitting member 133 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the cylinder mounting frame 115 across the front surface. The second cam member 135 has the lower end of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end of the second arm 137 attached to the front side of the first arm 136.

  In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion where the first arm 136 is attached and a portion where the second arm 137 is attached are separated at an angle of 90 degrees about the respective rotation axes. doing. In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion where the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than a portion where the second arm 137 is attached. .

  The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a that protrudes outward from the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces in a columnar shape and is locked in an L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. Thus, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  In the cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmitting member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are formed of metal. .

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430.

  Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from behind and the rear end is attached to the front piece. I have. In the cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmitting member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder main body 131.

  Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34C and 34D, the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmission member 133 provided on the axis of a cylinder main body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is different from the conventional cylinder lock 130. As shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder main body 131.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 36A, the cylinder lock 130 has the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 at the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. Both the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower part of each rotation center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated from a normal state by 90 degrees in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction by a regular key.

  In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second arm 135 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. The force to rotate in the clockwise direction hardly acts.

  In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, a force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. , And the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the rotation of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is caused by the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the rotation center of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 decreases, whereas the force acting upward in the second arm 137 acts. The force to do it increases.

  Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting on the second arm 137 upward from the first arm 136 increases. The second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise from a normal state to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36B).

  In addition, when returning from a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from a normal state to a normal state by clockwise rotation with a key, the opposite operation to the above is performed. It will work.

  On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder main body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the upper end becomes rightward of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the first arm 136 moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached at the upper end below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 tries to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. The second arm 137 has its upper end mounted below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 while the second arm 137 rotates the second cam member 135 clockwise. Is hardly applied.

  In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, a force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves clockwise. The rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is a portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. And the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 decreases, whereas In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 increases.

  Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. , The second cam member 135 rotates clockwise mainly through the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36 (c)).

  When the key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to the normal state, the key is rotated 90 degrees from the normal state to return to the normal state. Will be done.

  As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are attached to each other at a phase of 90 degrees are attached. The first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are connected regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the key hole 132). By transmitting the rotation, the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated, and the locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be improved.

  Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. Since the cylinder body 131 (key hole 132) can be provided in a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

  Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 does not need to be changed, so that the locking unit 650 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 Cost increase can be suppressed.

  By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmitting member 133 is provided behind the cylinder main body 131, a wrongdoer who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front into the rear of the cylinder main body 131. If the rotation transmission member 133 is illegally rotated by the tool, the door frame 3 may be opened to perform an illegal act. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmitting member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder main body 131, a tool is inserted into the rear of the cylinder main body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmitting member 133, the rotation transmitting member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmitting member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and an unauthorized act of opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, or the like. Can be prevented from being performed.

  Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, since the second arm 137 is connected to the first arm 136 and the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portions separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees are connected to each other. A portion attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 to each other. State. Accordingly, when one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is located at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transmitted to the second cam member 135. Even if the rotation cannot be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, There is no large resistance to rotation, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated, unlocking and locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted into the keyhole is forcibly rotated. The key can be prevented from being broken, and the key can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, since the rotation of the key inserted into the key hole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. Accordingly, even if one arm is broken, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

  In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, in the case where the rotation is transmitted by the gear, the tip of the tool may be hooked on the teeth of the gear to rotate the gear and rotate the rotation transmitting member 133. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a smooth bar shape, the tip of the tool can be hardly caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 can be moved. As a result, the rotation transmission member 133 can be prevented from being rotated, and the locking unit 650 is illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4. It can be reliably prevented from being provided.

  In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the one using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, and a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt , Etc.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 and play the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball which has entered a front cover 141 which is a box-shaped front end which is closed and has a front end opened and which penetrates in a front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. At the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 are provided one by one in the rear cover 14. To the ball supply port 142a, and rotates the ball supply member 144 and the ball supply member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a when viewed from the front, and a ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described later extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing upper bowl balls 240. Further, a portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball guide path 241c is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod 143b rotatably supported on the rotating rod 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper tray removing button 222 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holder 144b includes an arc-shaped recess 144b extending from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holder 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 such that the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation is moved in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partitioning portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a. It is designed to pivot between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking unit 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition unit 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partitioning portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition 143a is held in the ball holding unit 144b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip that swings vertically in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the up-down direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Have been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and is engaged with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38 (b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operating rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is located upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 169) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 contacts the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removing portion 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper bowl removing button 222 of the bowl unit 200 downward, the upper bowl removing slider 242 slides down together with the operation transmitting section 242b, and the operation transmitting section 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed from the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 formed with the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 abuts is urged upward by a spring, the game ball B is placed on the partitioning portion 143a. Even if supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by a spring via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball punching member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being separated by the partition 143a. Bouncing can be prevented.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated vertically at a substantially vertical center at a predetermined distance from the right side to the left, and A lower piece 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-fraud member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 148 so that the right end in front view projects rearward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the anti-fraud member 148, the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140, and is attached to the illegal game ball B. When an illegal action is performed such that the illegally operated game ball B is moved into and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like by operating the provided string, the illegal game ball B fired (hit by the ball) by the ball launching device 540 is performed. The V-shaped formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b after inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B by the momentum between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been fired by the ball firing device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610 a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211 a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full tank receiver which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and which can communicate with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side in front view of full-ball receptacle 150b, and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 540 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (a foul ball), and a game ball B opened forward near the lower right corner in front view and received in a full tank receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c. And a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible area is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152; And a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. Then, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the game balls B are full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and a prompt can be made to cancel the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150 a, and a discharge passage opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 610 in a discharge unit 560 described later of the main body frame 4. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined such that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to the door frame base 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending in a flat plate shape outward from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking pieces 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 96).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163 is at the rotation position located below the base 163a, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the regulation of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not come off the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is provided with a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 to be described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the rear projecting piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The hitting of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rearward projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Thereby, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the panel 5 through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 will hinder the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41A is an enlarged front view showing a portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41B is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit exploded from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II-II in FIG. FIG. 47 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

  The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is operated by the player. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

  First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to a handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, and to a front end of the handle base 181. Handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disk-shaped handle attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover base 183, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184 a mounted on the front surface, and a handle mounted on the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. Front lens 185 , And a.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 at the rear side of the handle 195, and a handle 195 mounted on the front end and rotatably mounted on the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to an initial rotation position (a counterclockwise rotation end in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 urged in the direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end side projecting outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a depression from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is formed slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, and the ridges 291d are respectively inserted into the three grooves 181c. Is inserted, the handle base 181 is in a state of being unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

  The handle 195 includes a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in a circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b to each other, and two annular outer ring portions 195c extending in an arc shape around the rotation shaft (the shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. It has a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general handle outer peripheral surface of a conventional pachinko machine.

  The three spokes 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and centered around one spoke 195b extending leftward horizontally from the central hub 195a when the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from the portions each having an angle of 120 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. The three spokes 195b extend so long that a gap is formed between the central hub 195a and the outer peripheral ring 195c into which a player's finger can be inserted.

  The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped round side facing forward.

  The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Thus, even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the touch of the handle 195. Therefore, even when the outer ring portion 195c is turned, the game ball B can be driven.

  The handle guide 196 includes a U-shaped guide portion 196a opened toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b extending from the front end of the guide 196a to the center. I have. The three stay guides 196 have an attachment stay 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 such that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction when a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291 described later is inserted into the guide portion 196a.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 pieces, one piece at the center, three pieces at regular intervals on the middle circumference, and six pieces at regular intervals along the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric manner. These LEDs 184a are divided into five sets: one at the center, three at the center, two at the upper left of the outer circumference, two at the upper right of the outer circumference, and two at the lower side of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). On the handle decoration board 184, a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted. The LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems at maximum, and controls 10 systems of LED 184a divided into 5 groups each with 3 systems for a total of 15 systems so that each of them can emit full color light. Like that.

  Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. And the like, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to a wiring cable composed of four electric wires. . When the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via a control signal line, it is divided into five sets according to the command. The ten LEDs 184a can emit light of an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  As described above, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which is larger than the number of the wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected, is individually (here, set). Control), the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

  The front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has a light-transmitting property. The lens 185 in front of the handle is provided with a lens member formed three-dimensionally of a transparent member inside. The front lens 185 of the handle is illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the angle.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player comes into contact with the handle 195, the static electricity applied from the player is detected, and the contact of the player with the handle 195 is detected. To detect. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

  Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 by some method without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. For this reason, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  The single button operation sensor 194 detects a pressing operation of the single button 193 by the player. When the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, the driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped by the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633. Accordingly, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 during the rotation operation of the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button 193 can be stopped. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

  Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the rear end of the handle cover unit 291 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner cover 292 having a cover and a rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200; an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface; An annular substrate cover 294 covering the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 covering the outer periphery of the inner 292 and having a rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 are provided.

  The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending substantially forward and backward with an inner diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and an inner diameter that decreases from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a toward the front. A middle rear wall portion 291c extending through the middle wall portion 291b, a cylindrical rear cylinder portion 291c extending back and forth with an inner diameter capable of inserting the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 and an inner periphery of the rear cylinder portion 291c And a plurality of (three in this case) protrusions 291d provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

  Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion behind the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. And a guide piece 291g projecting outward from the front cylinder portion 291a at a position between the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e. And an opening 291h penetrating below the portion 291a.

  The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape whose cross section bulges outward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylindrical portion 291c is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base 181a of the handle base 181 and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and the handle base 181 cannot be relatively rotated by being inserted into the grooves 181c. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In this handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

  The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front cylinder 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front cylinder 291a and the inner periphery of the outer cylinder 291f to a position closer to the front cylinder 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 of the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g and rotating the handle 195 through the space between the guide pieces 291g, a U-shaped guide portion is formed. By positioning the guide piece 291g in the 196a, the movement of the guide portion 196a (the handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

  The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e, and a circumferential direction having a size of an angle of about 90 degrees and penetrating the front cylindrical portion 291a. .

  The inner 292 has an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg 292b and a plurality (four in this case) of cutouts 292c cut out from the rear end of the leg 292b to the vicinity of the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is located behind the flange portion 291e with the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and a rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided at upper and lower portions and left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

  The handle cover decorative board 293 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and is formed in an annular shape having the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decoration board 293 has 12 LEDs 293a mounted thereon and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. Twelve LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are provided in a line at intervals in the circumferential direction. These twelve LEDs 293a are divided into six pairs of two at the lower left from the center, two at the left, two at the upper left, two at the upper right, two at the right, and two at the lower right. (See FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems at maximum, and each of the 10 sets of LEDs 293a divided into 6 sets can be controlled to emit full color light, so that each set is controlled by a total of 18 sets of 3 sets. I have to.

  Although not shown, the handle cover decorative board 293 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands from the peripheral control board 1510 and commands. One control signal line for receiving a signal such as an address and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to a wiring cable composed of four electric wires. I have. When the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via a control signal line, it is divided into six sets according to the command. The twelve LEDs 293a can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  The board cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and a front plate portion 294a. And a cylindrical side plate portion 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward shortly. The board cover 294 has a front plate portion 294a located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and a side plate portion 294b extending to a base portion 292a of the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and a spindle mount (kamakura type or bowl type) which bulges rearward. , Etc.), and a plurality (four in this case) of notched openings 295b cut out from the rear end toward the front are provided in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and is formed such that the plurality of cutout openings 295b coincide with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 is formed of two colors of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is formed by two colors of two kinds of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , A circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is provided inside the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. The rear part is inserted, and the handle 195, the front lens 185, and the like are located forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291. It is attached to 101b.

  In the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, a central central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by a handle base 181. Further, the handle 195 has an outer peripheral ring portion 195c outside the central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by a handle cover unit 290 by a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. In the handle guide 196, the rear end side of the guide portion 196a is inserted (locked) between the front tubular portion 291a and the outer tubular portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) is restricted.

  The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have a light-transmitting property, and light the LEDs 293 a of the handle cover decorative board 293. Thus, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front tube portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be illuminated.

  Since the handle cover unit 290 has the cutout opening 295b and the cutout 292c that are coincident with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side. It can be seen that a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a is opened. This alleviates the player from mental anxiety that his or her hands (fingers) are pushed into the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Can be.

  The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decorative unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

  In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is formed through the opening 291h so that the lower portion of each of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 can be formed. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, Through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch 295b.

  Also, when a liquid or a game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the liquid or the game ball B passes through the gap between the front cylinder 291a and the leg 292b of the inner 292, and the lower side. It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed as a lower set of the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. It is provided on the extension of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional body 40 in the inclination direction. Thereby, the wind (wind pressure) discharged obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 passes through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b. It can enter into the part 291a. Therefore, when the player is pushing his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotating the handle 195 (playing device for the game ball B), the main body frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

  Further, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, it is possible to hook and pull the right cutout opening 295b to pull the door frame 3 or the like. Can be used as a handle when opening.

  Further, in the handle 195, since the plating portion is provided up to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if the player touches only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the game ball B Can be typed.

  In addition, since the handle cover 295 has the notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by hooking the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 with fingers. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a certain strength even if the hand is not continuously twisted. As described above, since the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting a hitting operation suitable for a player.

  The handle unit 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward from the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached via is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the handle area is provided to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195 a, a plurality of spoke portions 195 b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195 a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195 b A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided, so that a handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. You can see the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 in a form that has never been seen before. As a result, a strong impact can be given to the player, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the player's willingness to play with the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. Further, it is possible to make it easy for a player who is traveling in the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed to select the present pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

  In addition, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can play the game. When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a different feeling to the operation of the handle 195 from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, and to entertain the player by performing the operation of hitting the game ball B with a new feeling. Can be suppressed.

  When the player operates the handle 195 to produce an effect sound from the main frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 A of the main frame 4, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to sound. The air in the enclosure 624 is vibrated by the box 623, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is caused by the sound pressure through the curtain plate internal space 40 a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624. (Sound wind) is emitted forward. At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 is reduced by the plurality of blades 46 b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47, and the notch opening 295 b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. A stimulus by sound pressure can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Accordingly, by supplying the sound pressure from the port member 47 to the finger of the player inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. Can surprise the player, foresee the arrival of a chance, change the operation amount of the steering wheel operation, can entertain the player, and can make the player hard to get tired of In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover is provided. The inside of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, so that the stress applied to the player can be reduced and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. it can.

  As described above, the handle 195 and the finger of the player operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided. The sound pressure (sound wind) released forward from the port member 47 provided on the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is transmitted to the grill member 46. Since the stimulus is applied by being guided by the plurality of blades 46b, various types of sensors (a handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with a case where a vibration device is provided on the handle 195. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanism. It is possible to make it difficult to break the 180, it can be avoided that uncomfortable feeling to the player by the breakage of the handle unit 180, a drop in interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance like a steering wheel of an automobile. Even if the appearance is greatly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen the present pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the present pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and as a pachinko machine that plays the game without hesitating the player. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

  In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 through which a player's finger can be inserted through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Is provided, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part than the handle cover unit 290 passes through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. This makes it possible to give a sense of opening to the tubular handle cover unit 290, so that the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290 can be reduced, and the player The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

  In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h that penetrate therethrough are provided in a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and a port of the outer frame 2 (the outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the handle cover unit 290, the member 47 is discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid and the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

  Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and a plurality of handle covers 295 of a handle cover unit 290 having a front end having the same diameter as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the center hub 195a can be operated by grasping with a hand in the same manner as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke 195b can be operated only by a finger, or the outer peripheral ring can be operated. An operation like a steering wheel of an automobile is performed by the portion 195c, an operation of putting a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening portion 295b, and a handle cover unit is provided so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. You can perform operations such as picking the inside and outside of the 290 with your fingers. Can be various hammering operation of the gaming balls B (steering) provides pachinko machine 1 as possible. Therefore, the player can hit the game ball B into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, and the like. In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 may be grasped by putting a finger on the outer periphery ring portion 195c, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be grasped with fingers by straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operation position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, a handle operation that cannot be performed by the conventional pachinko machine can be performed, so that a variety of handle operations can be provided to the player. In this way, the steering wheel operation can be enjoyed and the player can be hardly bored.

  In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and can improve the appearance and attract the player's interest.

  In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming unnecessarily large. By suppressing the upward pressure on the game area 5a (the door window 101a), the game area 5a can be prevented from being narrowed, and the game area 5a can be relatively enlarged. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be a highly appealing pachinko machine that strongly attracts the player's interest.

  Further, the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 is appropriately made to emit light, so that the handle cover unit 290 (the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be light-emitting decorated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not obstructed by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are made to stand out. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

  Further, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided at a portion of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when the door frame 3 is opened and closed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a handle that makes the appearance worse on the door frame 3, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

  In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and also controls the flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction. Since the guide piece 291g is provided, even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be regulated by the guide piece 291g or the like. 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, so that the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, after detecting that the player is touching the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is hit, so that only the spoke portion 195b and the outer ring portion 195c are provided. Even if the handle 195 is operated while touching, the game ball B can be hit, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing various hitting operations (handle operations) as described above can be provided. The hitting of the game ball B without touching the handle 195 can be prevented, and the operation of the handle using the tool can be prevented, so that the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by a player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left and right directions, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the upper plate 201, and a right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base (not shown) protruding forward, a plate unit relay board (not shown) mounted to the right of the mounting base, and a ball mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. A lending operation unit 220, a unit for removing the upper tray ball (not shown) attached below the mounting base, a unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball attached behind the unit for removing the upper tray ball, It has.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252 and separated from each other left and right, and And a dish right decoration unit 275.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral substrate cover 325 covering the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation unit base 315. Unit relay board unit 330.

  Further, the effect operation unit 300 is capable of protruding upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and is attached to the effect operation unit 350 provided with the effect operation unit 301 and the operation unit base 315 to effect operation operation. Effect unit raising / lowering mechanism 360 that supports the unit unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down, and a projection output adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward output of the effect operation unit unit 350 by the effect operation unit lifting / lowering mechanism 360. I have.

  The plate unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. A ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212. The upper plate 201 is formed in a container shape which bulges forward to a large extent on the left side from the left and right center in front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion which is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and has a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 73). ). The entire surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side thereof is lower.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 at the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game balls B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to make the game ball B The static electricity that has been charged can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at a portion of the lower counter ball supply port, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows a principal part. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating up and down in the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower plate hole 202 a of the lower plate 202 is closed by a lower plate cover 265 so as to be openable and closable.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially square shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. When the lower dish 202 is assembled with the dish unit 200, the lower dish ball hole 202a is located to the left of the front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate hole 202a is closed, and open the lower ball hole 202a. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 211 of the tray base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. On the other hand, a lower bowl 202b is provided in front of the center axis of the lower bowl 202. The lower counter ball supply port 211j is formed in a tubular shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight toward the lower counter ball ejection hole 202b. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

  By the way, when the game ball B is directed straight toward the lower ball hole 202b by the lower ball hole supply port 211j, if the lower ball hole 202b is closed by the lower ball hole cover 265, the lower Since the bowling hole 202b and the bowling hole supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the bowl 202, the pool of the game balls B may be concentrated in a region on the right side of the center in the bowl 202. There is. When the game balls B concentrated on the right region in the lower plate 202 block the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are moved from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. The lower plate 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room in the left area in the lower plate 202 due to the fact that the lower plate 202 is not fully discharged. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50A, the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend diagonally left forward. More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the dish unit base 211 at a position immediately behind the lower dish ball hole 202a allows at least one game ball B to be distributed. It is inclined diagonally left forward so as to be at a distance.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower countersunk ball hole 202a is positioned to the left of the center axis (line indicated by a dashed line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower countersink supply port 211c. Has been moved to.

  As a result, by moving the lower dish hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower dish 202 (the part of the lower dish hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower dish hole is removed. With the 202a closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of the game balls B concentrated on the right side in the lower plate 202. In the lower plate 202, a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower plate hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (the front surface of the plate unit base 211). Since the left side wall of the opening 211c extends obliquely to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow with the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game balls B released from the unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c) to the lower dish ball supply port 211c side are guided to the left inside the lower dish 202 along the obliquely extending left side wall and emitted. Thus, the game balls B can be properly stored in the entire inside of the lower plate 202.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the full-battery detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the user of the full-battery, even though there is a sufficient area in the lower plate 202 where the game balls B can be stored.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. The apparatus includes a main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 mounted near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball rental operation unit 220. The unit includes a pre-pulling-out unit (not shown), and a post-pulling-out unit 240 attached to the back of the plate unit base 211 behind the pre-pulling-out unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the right and left direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow open rear portion). (Box shape).

  The plate unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view, and extends rearward and downward under the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the right and left center in front view, and extending rearward in a tubular manner; A cutout portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and front and back at the upper right side in front view of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) which extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 in a state where the upper plate ball supply port 211a is assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end thereof passes the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  When the lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and the cylindrical rear end connects the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed at a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. Thereby, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the operation of the upper plate ball release button 222, and the upper plate ball supply port, the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the upper plate The ball is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the ball is removed, and the notch 211d.

  The upper bowl feeding port is located in front of a ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 in a state assembled with the bowl base unit 210. Is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receptacle of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper part and the rear part are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end receding rearward as it goes rightward in a front view from a portion that bulges forward most, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than an outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 has its upper part near the right end closed.

  The upper plate main body 212 is mounted such that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. It is for. The plate unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball rental operation unit in the plate unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and sends cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After a predetermined number of game balls B are inserted into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 after the player or the prepaid card is inserted, the remaining amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine is displayed, or the ball rental machine is used. This is for returning the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the game ball B for the borrowed game balls B, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the light amount.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is disposed to the right of the upper plate ball extraction button 222 and has translucency; a ball lending button 224 that is disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223; A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display unit 226 disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending button 224 outside the base unit 221. It has a volume control button 227 arranged at the front and a light quantity control button 228 arranged to the left of the volume control button 227.

  The upper bowl removing button 222 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has a letter “ball” on the upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be visually recognized by the player through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B that has been lent is deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The ball lending display section 226 displays the amount of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

  The volume control button 227 controls the volume of sound for staging such as music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in the shape of a double circular gourd like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a “+” character at the center of one (upper) circle and a “−” character at the center of the other (lower) circle. Is provided with a pattern that sounds from the speaker. The volume adjustment button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The volume of the volume control button 227 increases when the “+” side is pressed, and decreases when the “−” side is pressed.

  The light amount adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light amount of the LEDs on the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd-like shape obtained by combining two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a “+” character at the center of one (upper) circle and a “−” character at the center of the other (lower) circle. Is painted with a light bulb pattern. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes brighter when the “+” side is pressed, and becomes darker when the “−” side is pressed.

  The volume control button 227 and the light level control button 228 have different colors (for example, the volume level control button 227 is white and the light level control button 228 is black), so that the player is less likely to make a mistake.

  By the way, when the volume and the light amount are adjusted using the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. At times, the effect display unit 1600 displays a setting menu for adjusting the volume, light amount, and the like by appropriately operating the effect operation unit 301, selects an item to be adjusted, and then operates the contact operation unit 302. Since the volume of the sound and the brightness of the light amount are changed, it takes time (time) to adjust the sound volume and the light amount. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the volume and light amount can be directly (directly) adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, and the time and effort required for adjusting the volume and light amount are reduced. Can be provided and the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit for removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 for removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The game ball stored in the upper plate 201 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper ball pull-out button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, when the upper ball pull-out unit 240 is pressed. This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

  The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to the rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port from the rear, and to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. And a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper bowl removing slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward to allow a game ball B to pass therethrough (not shown); A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the receiving port downward at the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a ball feeding guide path 241b at the rear surface of the rear base 241 that is lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b. And a ball guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides the game ball B rightward in rear view.

  The ball receiving port is opened forward at the downstream end (right end in a front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 through the upper plate feeding port of the plate unit base 211 in a state assembled in the plate base unit 210. Formed at the location. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion in a state where the ball feeding guiding path 241b is assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game balls B supplied to the upper plate 201 enter the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes rightward in rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. And is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed by a rear cover 244 on the rear side. In a state where the ball guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper portion of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged from the lower ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper bowl removing slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner, and a rearward side from a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion. And a projecting operation transmitting portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state in which the slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion protrudes forward through the dish unit base 211 from the rear side, and the upper receiving portion is formed on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state in which the upper ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242 to urge the upper counterslider 242 upward. Accordingly, the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring.

  In the unit 240 for removing the high-ball counter, the slider 242 for the high-ball counter is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper-ball counter is removed via the operation receiving portion of the slider 242 for the high-ball counter. The ejection button 222 is located at the upper moving end. In addition, since the upper ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between them.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper ball removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper ball removing slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 in contact with the ball can be moved downward, and the weight of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143 causes the ball removing member 143 to rotate, so that the partitioning portion 143a and the ball entrance 141a are removed. Retreat from between the mouth 141b. Thereby, the game ball B which has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and is then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper counter ball removing button 222 is released, the upper counter ball removing button 222 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring, and the upper counter ball removing button 222 is raised, and is brought into contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b. The ball removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to return to the original state.

  In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feed unit 140 or discharged to the lower plate 202 side by the upper plate ball removing unit 240. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202, is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and has the effect operation unit 300 attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the 211, a lower dish emptying unit 260 attached to the lower face of the lower dish main body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front of the dish unit main body 252 with a space left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a dish right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower bowl removing lid 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. When the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball outlet hole 202a is connected to the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends to the center in the left and right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a have a dish left decorative unit 270 and a dish right decorative unit 275 attached to their front surfaces, respectively.

  The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed such that the top and bottom become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, although not shown, the plate unit main body 252 is provided between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a at the center in the left-right direction and has a rendering operation unit mounting portion to which the rendering operation unit 300 is mounted. . The effect operation unit attachment portion is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower dish removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower dish ball extracting hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower dish 202 or the game balls B are discharged from the lower dish 202. It is to make it.

  The lower bowl removing unit 260 includes a lower bowl removing button 263 and a lower bowl removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower bowl removing button 263.

  In the state in which the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate removing button 263 matches the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate removing cover is provided. Reference numeral 265 closes the lower dish hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower bowl 202 is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, and the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B.

  In a normal state, when the lower bowl removing button 263 is pressed backward, the lower bowl removing lid 265 moves, and the lower bowl removing hole 202a is opened, and the lower bowl removing hole 202a passes through the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The game balls B can be discharged below the dish unit 200.

  In addition, when the lower bowl removing button 265 is moved by pressing the lower bowl removing button 263, the lower bowl removing lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open. Thus, the game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, the lower bowl removing button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, is pressed rearward and then released, and the lower bowl removing lid 265 is released. Is returned to the position of the normal state, and the lower saucer hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish left decoration unit and Dish right decoration unit]
The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has a light-transmitting dish left decoration 271, and a light-transmitting dish left decoration penetrating the dish left decoration 271. It includes a lens 272 and a dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction so as to coincide with the front face of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish left decorative board 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish left decorative body 271 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the dish left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction in the dish left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish left decorative board 273 emit light, the entire front of the dish left decorative body 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has a light transmissive dish right decoration 276, and a light transmissive dish right decoration penetrating the dish right decoration 276. A lens 277 and a dish right decorative board 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface are provided.

  The dish right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction so as to coincide with the front face of the dish right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The dish right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish right decoration 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish right decoration board 278 emit light, the entire front of the dish right decoration 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 are partially protruded upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250 when assembled in the door frame 3. Thus, a step can be formed in which the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 side are higher than the upper side bulging portion 252a. This allows the player to hook the finger by utilizing the steps between the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 are leveled. It can be used as a fingerhold when performing, or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. Also, due to a step between the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the lower front. is there. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in a state where the rendering operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lifting / lowering spring holding member is at the position of the moving end, and (b) is a rendering operation from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit of the state in which the unit moved to the raising position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the production operation unit in a state where the production operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member is at the position of the moving end downward.

  The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a contact operation unit 302 that allows a player to perform a contact operation, and a pressing operation unit 303 that allows a player to perform a pressing operation. The rendering operation unit 301 accepts a player's operation and moves the rendering operation unit 301. (Vibration) so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the effect during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, a contact operation unit 302 is provided above a pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about ／ of the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

  The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and has a spherical shape. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside. An operation unit base 315 to be attached and a rendering operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a for emitting and decorating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the rendering operation unit cover unit 310. Outer peripheral decoration board 320, outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to operation section base 315 so as to cover effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and operation section relay board unit attached to the rear surface of operation section base 315 330.

  In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the projection output of the production operation unit unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that moves the production operation unit unit 350 up and down, and the production operation unit unit 350. And a projection output adjustment mechanism 380 that performs the adjustment. The effect operation unit 350 is provided so as to be able to move up and down from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit 350) at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a ring shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward, and an insertion opening 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. And a unit upper cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state such that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is located forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about の of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  At least the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a light-transmitting property, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 can be decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 described later.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected such that the dish left decorative body 271 and the dish right decorative body 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rear of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The operation unit base 315 has its front and lower parts covered by a unit lower cover 311, and its upper part is covered by a unit upper cover 312 and a staging operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape whose upper part is opened.

  The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body 315a that is open at the top, and a flange 315b that extends outward from the upper end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body 315a houses the effect operation unit 350 therein. The lower end of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit unit 350 described below is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

  On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer decorative substrate 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

  When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 315 b is located substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to a rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315, the rear surface of the body unit 315 a, the operation unit relay board 332 mounted on the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from behind. And a substrate cover 333 attached to the substrate base 331 as described above.

  The operation unit relay board 332 includes a production operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), a decoration board 355 outside a button, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a decoration board 364 in a button, and an operation button. The connection between the elevation drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, the projection output detection sensor 375, and the projection output adjustment drive motor 381 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The effect operation unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rendering operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. It is.

  The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end is closed, a disc-shaped contact detector 352 mounted on the upper part of the button body 351, and a button-shaped body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down, and arranged above the button base 354 And a ring-shaped external decoration board 355 on the upper surface of which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted.

  The effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 disposed between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 for attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. And a contact detection sensor main body 358 connected to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

  The button body 351 is formed entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disc-shaped upper surface portion 351a curved so as to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b extending downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a cylindrical portion 351b. And a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface 351a is formed in a shape that forms a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to have a diameter of about 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (the cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately ／ of the diameter of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about ／ of the diameter of the upper surface 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

  The contact detection body 352 is formed in a dish shape in which the outer periphery is circular and the inside of a certain width from the outer periphery bulges upward. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 and swells obliquely upward and has a flat inside. Thus, the contact detector 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has a flat downward extending piece 352a extending downward from both left and right ends and a rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. The contact detector 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal to suppress the capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, light from the LED 364a of the in-button decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the center portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is excellent. Luminous decoration can be performed in an appropriate state.

  The contact detection body 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of a connection connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, and detects contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. Can be. That is, the button main body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

  The button sleeve 353 has a vertically extending cylindrical sleeve body 353a, and an annular flange 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve main body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button main body 351, and the length is substantially the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button main body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the out-of-button decorative board 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

  The button base 354 has a disk shape having substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at a symmetrical portion with respect to the center, a central hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and protrudes from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. And a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shaft 362 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is slidably inserted into each of the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b has an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked on the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved up and down by the pair of guide pins 354 c being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371. On the lower surface of the button base 354, the upper ends of a pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are in contact, and are urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

  The LED decorative board 355 has a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in rows on a double concentric circle. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided in a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve main body 353a and in a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LED 355a of the button-side decorative substrate 355, a portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated.

  The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged such that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the effect operation unit 301 advances and retreats. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a position on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 for guiding the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be transmitted to the effect operation unit 301 in a favorable manner. Further, the influence of the vibration by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

  The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although not shown in detail, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and power to the sensor IC and the output circuit. A constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of a sensor electrode provided inside. Further, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with a sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance. However, a signal in a plurality of stages may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

  The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor main body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the hand of the player) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body is in a state where the effect operation unit 350 is projected upward. It is possible to detect contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) to the side surface 351. For this reason, in the effect operation unit 350, the button main body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

  The production operation unit 350 is supported by a production operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the lowermost position (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 matches the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like a single sphere. Then, in a state in which the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 projects upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downwardly against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation section 303.

  More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), even if it is pressed, it does not move further downward, so that the pressing operation cannot be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operating unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. . Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing. It is detected by the sensor 373. Thereby, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

  Further, the effect operation unit unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, and thus, when operating the contact operation unit 302, touches the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351. As a result, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punched metal having the unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, fine irregularities and a plurality of streaks are formed on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351, so that an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the contact operation unit 302. Can be provided, the degree of design freedom for the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be provided.

  In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button body 351 may be opaque or translucent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. When the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable that the button body 351 be translucent. Thus, the button body 351 can be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a of the decoration board 355 outside the button provided below and the LED 364a of the decoration board 364 inside the button, and the player can be illuminated by the light emission effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Direction operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can move the effect operation unit unit 350 up and down. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted below the effect operation unit unit 350 in the main body 315 a of the operation unit base 315, and has a substantially circular outer periphery as an elevating mechanism base 361 and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of columnar cylinders symmetrically arranged, the lower ends of which are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and the upper ends of which extend upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362 connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other, and has a disk-shaped upper base 363 whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and is mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 363 to transmit light upward. A decorative board 364 on the button on which a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of irradiation are mounted.

  The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted to urge the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. A central shaft 366 penetrating vertically and having a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315 a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

  Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted on the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft projects upward, and to the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating drive motor 367. A spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368, and rotatably mounted above the elevating mechanism base 361, and rotated by the driven gear 369. And an elevating cam drive gear member 370 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably mounted.

  The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes an elevating cam drive gear member 370 having a lower end connected thereto, and a rotatable mounting through which a central shaft 366 is inserted. The elevating cam that elevates and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. A member 371 and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

  The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the elevating cam driving gear member 370 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevating sensor 374 for detecting the elevation of the staging operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevating cam member 371), and an elevating and lowering spring holding member of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 which is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. And a projection output detection sensor 375 for detecting the projection output of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385.

  The elevating mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disc shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and an elevating spring with a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a. And a pair of through-holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 315a of the operation section base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a projection output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. An operation button elevating / lowering drive motor 367, an elevating / lowering detection sensor 374, and a projection output adjustment driving motor 381 are attached to a lower surface of the base body 361a. In the elevating mechanism base 361, the lower ends of the legs 361 b are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315 a in the operation unit base 315. Accordingly, a space is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 forward and backward from the center at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c provided at a position half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and backward from the center in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 have their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315 a of the operation unit base 315, and their upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower projection that projects downward. The upper base 363 can form a space between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated by bringing the lower protruding portion into contact with the upper protruding portion of the gear cover 372. it can.

  A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the in-button decoration substrate 364 are full-color LEDs. The button decoration board 364 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 364a.

  The pair of elevating springs 365 is a coil spring, and the guide shaft 362 is inserted through each of them. The lower ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 are in contact with the elevating and lowering spring holding members 385 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper ends are in contact with the button base 354.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And a vertically detecting piece 370 c which is cylindrically protruded downwardly from and is notched at two locations facing each other and detected by a vertically detecting sensor 374. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 at the center. The elevating cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 354c of the button base 354.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  Further, the elevating cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (the effect operation unit unit 350) urged upward by the elevating spring 365. Can be raised and lowered.

  The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 has an upper protruding portion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 has a space in which the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper protruding part into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding part of the upper base 363. be able to.

  The pressure detection sensor 373 detects a pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 always detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). When the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the pressing detection sensor 373 detects the button base 354. Can be detected, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

  The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, and via the connected portion 371f connected to the connection portion 370b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, detects the elevation cam member 371. The rotational position of is detected.

  The projection output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member 385 in the projection output adjustment mechanism 380.

  The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and rear, and can also move the button base 354 by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation unit 350 can be urged upward through the effect. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the effect operation unit unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be done. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the in-button decoration board 364.

  In the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with an engaging portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55 (a)). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is located at the lower moving end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 match, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 And the button body 351 form one sphere.

  In a normal state (the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, it meshes with the elevating drive gear 368. The lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 55A moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion. While rolling from 371c to the left part of the locking portion 371c of the first cam 371b, the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

  When the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the button base 354 is raised, and the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

  It should be noted that the elevation lowering spring holding member 385 of the projection output adjustment mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevation spring 365 abuts can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the projection output adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. it can. Since the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 can be changed in accordance with the vertical position of the elevating and lowering spring holding member 385, the staging operation unit 350 is raised with a projection output corresponding to the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. Position.

  When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55B, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is connected to the second cam 371d of the one cam 371a and the third cam 371a of the remaining cam 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. Further, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 is positioned above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also project upward.

  When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the ascending position, the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved up and down. And the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

  When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 in this manner, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( Pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

  To return the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, as shown in FIG. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so that the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

  When returning the effect operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the lifting force lowering holding member 385 is moved downward by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 to reduce the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. State (see FIG. 56). Accordingly, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit unit 350 upwards becomes weaker, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also reduced. Thus, the load on the operation button elevating drive motor 367 for rotating the elevating cam member 371 can be reduced, and damage (failure) of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, an inexpensive motor with a low torque can be used as the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367.

  Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops, and the guide pin 354c is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lifting / lowering cam member 371 by the button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the effect operation unit unit 350 returns to the original lowered position.

  In the above description, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 so that the first cam 371b ( The example in which the button base 354 (button main body 351) is moved from the lower position to the upper position by moving from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d at once is described, but the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is connected to the vertical cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (production operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position by being locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371, the elevation cam member 371 is clocked in plan view by the operation button elevation drive motor 367. You may make it rotate in a surrounding direction. Incidentally, the vertical movement distance of the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) by the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

  When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to move the third cam 371e. Will move upwards along the line. Then, when the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the lowered position and the raised position. Can be stopped. By projecting the button body 351 to a position above the lowering position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed by the pressing operation unit 303. Can function as

  When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the holding member 385 of the lifting / lowering spring of the projection output adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to reduce the urging force of the lifting / lowering spring 365. Is desirable. Thus, the load applied to the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 (operation button elevating drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operational feeling of the pressing operation of the button body 351 can be reduced.

  As described above, the protrusion amount of the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be changed in accordance with the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371. Therefore, according to the game state (for example, the first starting port 2002, By varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 according to the special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004), the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

  Note that at least one shallow concave portion that can lock the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thus, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be stably protruded to the position of the same protruding amount, and variation in the protruding amount can be prevented. When a concave portion is provided at least at one point in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the concave portion, so that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops rotation of the elevating cam member 371. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The salient output adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The projection output adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) projects upward ( (Sudden output) can be changed. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315 a of the operation section base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

  The protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384 having a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on an outer periphery thereof, and having a central shaft 366 inserted therein and rotatably supported; 384, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate therethrough. The lower end of the spring 365 is provided with an elevating unsprung holding member 385 abutting the.

  The protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a such that a gap is formed between the motor 381 and the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The rotation shaft of the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 projects into a gap between the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 and the base body 361a.

  The adjustment screw 384 is formed to have a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315 a of the operation section base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

  The elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 includes a main body 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b vertically penetrating at the center of the main body 385a, and screwing with the screw 384b. It has a spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and recessed to receive the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat detecting piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. . The lifting shaft lower holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 passing therethrough at the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the projection output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

  When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 to move the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

  The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 moves the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held by the spring holding concave portion 385c upward when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 moves upward, and the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 increases. Become. On the other hand, when the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting / lowering spring 365 held by the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the compression amount of the lifting / lowering spring 365 decreases (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, when the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit unit 350 by the lifting / lowering spring 365 can be increased, and the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is moved downward. Thus, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. Thus, the upward output of the effect operation unit 350 can be adjusted by the outward output adjustment mechanism 380.

  The detection piece 385d of the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is most raised. That is, when the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 becomes maximum, the detection piece 385 d is detected by the projection output detection sensor 375. Thus, when the projection output detection sensor 375 detects the detecting piece 385d while the projection output adjustment drive motor 381 is moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 upward, the projection output adjustment driving motor 381 uses the lifting unsprung holding member. By stopping the upward movement of the 385, further compression of the elevating spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, since the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection output of the rendering operation unit 350, the button body is operated by the contact detector 352 when the rendering operation unit 350 is in the lowered position. By detecting contact or approach of the detection target (for example, a finger of the player) to the detection target 351, the effect operation unit unit 350 is caused to protrude by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to contact the object to be detected. At this time, the vertical position of the lifting / lowering unsprung holding member 385 may be appropriately selected so that the protrusion output of the button body 351 is made different. Thus, when the button body 351 projects upward, the strength of the player's finger or the like can be made different, so that if the button body 351 comes in strong contact, there is something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that the game is not in progress, and to increase the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button is pressed according to the game state (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004). By increasing or decreasing the protruding output of the main body 351, it is possible to make the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

  By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to make the effect operation unit unit 350 protrude. If the biasing force is changed by adding a twist to the compression coil spring, it is impossible to use the compression coil spring differently from the original use. Stress may act on the compression coil spring, and the internal tissue may be degraded early and damaged. On the other hand, in the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is changed by moving the holding member 385 in the vertical direction in the vertical direction, so that the projection output of the effect operation unit 350 ( The biasing force) is adjusted, so that no unreasonable stress acts on the lifting / lowering spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the early deterioration of the lifting / lowering spring 365. It is possible to stably protrude over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship among the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate, the button outer decorative substrate, and the button inner decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of a player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303 (the button body 351).

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the projecting direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (producing operation unit unit 350) that can protrude upward is inclined so that the upper side is located forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the rendering operation unit 301 is located forward of the vertex of the spherical rendering operation unit 300. This makes it easier for a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the effect operation unit 301.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 is in effect. It matches the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. In a normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (the effect operation unit unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament and is operable.

  In the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 57, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). The ring-shaped decorative board 355 outside the button is arranged inside the vicinity of the outer edge of the pressing operation part 303, and the decoration board 364 in the button is further arranged inside the ring-shaped decorative board 355. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outwardly around the in-button decoration substrate 364 in the order of the out-of-button decoration substrate 355 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320. The LED 355a inside the button decoration board 364 and the button outside decoration board 355 is disposed below the contact detection body 352. However, since the contact detection body 352 is formed of a punching metal, light transmission is achieved. As a result, light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (on the player side).

  The effect operation unit 300 can make the annular unit upper cover 312 emit light by the LED 320 a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320. In addition, the LED 355a of the decorative board 355 outside the button allows the vicinity of the periphery of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface to be illuminated. Furthermore, the LED 364a of the button decoration board 364 allows the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 to be illuminated.

  Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decoration board 355 outside the button, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decoration board 364 inside the button are arranged in a circle on the circumference, respectively, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, the player can see a light emission effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LED355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, a light emission effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. A luminous effect that converges can be shown to the player.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 58A, effect operation unit 300 is in the lowered position where pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) has its upper surface aligned with the surface of unit upper cover 312. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 cannot be performed. On the other hand, in the contact operation unit 302, a contact operation can be enabled according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

  As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) is not protruded, for example, an effect image that prompts the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. The information is displayed on the device 1600, and a sound or a sound effect is output. When the contact (or approach) to the button body 351 is detected by the contact detector 352, the process proceeds to the next effect stage. When the contact is detected, the button body 351 is illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the out-of-button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the in-button decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation has been accepted by the player. And an operation feeling for the contact operation unit 302 may be given. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which a player such as a “big hit” game is advantageous) is given to the player based on the emission color, emission luminance, emission pattern, and the like of the button body 351. You may make it suggest.

  Alternatively, when contact (or approaching) to the button body 351 is detected by the contact detection body 352, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. Thereby, it is possible to give an operational feeling to the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been received. At this time, by giving a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm by using the vibration motor 356, the player may be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. good.

  In addition, as an effect in a normal state (a player-participation-type effect), an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound or sound effect is output. After that, if the contact of the player (hand or finger) with the upper surface of the button main body 351 is detected by the contact detection body 352, the button main body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is moved up and down by the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360. It is made to protrude upward (pop up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, in a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), the effect operation unit unit 350 (the button body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 is vigorously protruded upward by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to the state of the ascending position (FIG. 55 (b)). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the button main body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button main body 351 protrudes upward. When the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, so that the player can be greatly surprised, It can be very interesting.

  After that, the process shifts to an effect in which the button body 351 (the pressing operation section 303) is pressed, and the player can enjoy the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303. More specifically, when the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button main body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button main body 351 (production operation unit unit 350) is activated. The button body 351 moves downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373. Thus, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (the pressing operation section 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed by the pressing operation to entertain the player with the player participation type effect.

  At the time of the above-mentioned effect, the surge output adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the surge output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to project, so that the player's expectation for the game is determined by the strength of the surge output. May be suggested. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed.

  In the effect in which the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the finger or the like of the player has approached the moving range (in the protruding range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is pressed. The main body 351 (producing operation unit 350) may be protruded upward. Thereby, since the button body 351 comes into contact with a finger or the like of the player and is given an impact, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case as well, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may increase or decrease the protrusion output from which the button body 351 protrudes, so that the player can indicate the degree of expectation for the game based on the strength of the protrusion output.

  Further, in the effect in which the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, the finger or the like of the player is out of the projecting range of the button body 351 projecting upward and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351 by the contact detection body 352. The button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when it is detected that the user has approached the. Thereby, since the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the finger or the like of the player, the player can be surprised, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Also in this case, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the protrusion output from which the button body 351 protrudes, and suggests the degree of expectation to the game by the strength of the wind pressure applied to the finger or the like of the player. You may do it.

  Further, as the effect of making the effect operation unit 350 protrude, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruded upward regardless of the detection of the finger of the player by the contact detection body 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is protruded with a strong protruding output by the protruding output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously and a sound (protruding sound) is generated. Can be. In addition, when the button body 351 is protruded with a weak protruding output by the protruding output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the protruding of the button body 351. By suddenly protruding the button body 351, the player can be surprised.

  As the effect after the effect operation unit 350 (the button body 351) is protruded, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is weakened by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (the pressing operation unit 303) is generally pressed. An effect such as performing a pressing operation similar to a simple pressing button may be executed. Alternatively, an effect may be performed in which the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is increased by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 so that the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

  In addition, as the effect after the effect operation unit 350 (the button body 351) is protruded, an effect of performing a contact operation on the protruding button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has the downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be operated to contact. At this time, it is desirable that the urging force of the elevating spring 365 be increased by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be hardly moved, and the button body 351 (contact operation) can be performed. The contact operation of the section 302) can be easily performed.

  Note that, in the above description, the effect operation unit unit 350 is protruded by rotating the elevation cam member 371 in the effect operation unit elevation mechanism 360 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, thereby forming the button base 354. In this example, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at a stretch. It is not limited to this.

  For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion 371c of the lifting / lowering cam member 371 and the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is moved up and down. The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view by the drive motor 367, and the elevating cam member 371 is moved in the middle of the third cam 371e. May be stopped to stop the button body 351 from projecting upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is reduced by moving the elevating and lowering spring holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 downward.

  As described above, even when the button main body 351 is protruded partway by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button main body 351 can be pressed, and the button main body 351 functions as the pressing operation part 303. Therefore, the player can enjoy the player-participating type effect. In this case, the amount of protrusion above the button body 351 can be made different according to the rotational position of the lifting / lowering cam member 371. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a game can be indicated according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , Can entertain the player.

  Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the projected operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the lifting / lowering spring 365. To a minimum state. Thus, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, it is possible to press the staging operation unit 350 with a light (weak) force, and to increase the operability of the pressing operation to perform the pressing operation. You can entertain. In addition, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 (the button body 351), the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is set by setting the elevating and lowering spring holding member 385 to an appropriate position in the vertical direction in accordance with the special lottery result. May be any one of the strongest to weakest. This allows the player to strongly or weakly press the staging operation unit 350, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the staging operation unit 350, and a more versatile An effect can be presented, and the player can be hardly bored.

  In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detector is provided so that a contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected in a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). A plurality of threshold values corresponding to the capacitance 352 may be provided, and the effect may be changed according to each stage. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the finger or the like of the player approaches the button body 351 (the contact detection body 352), and a plurality of thresholds are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. May be used to detect in multiple stages and utilize it for production. Specifically, for example, a stage in which the finger or the like of the player is separated from the button main body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage in which the finger or the like of the player is not in contact with the button main body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button main body 351, The stage is divided into stages where the finger of the user is in contact with the button body 351 and the effect is changed according to each stage, so that even one contact detection sensor body 358 presents various effects to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the effect operation unit 300 (button body 351) is set to the lower position, and the lowering spring lower holding member is set as the normal state of the effect operation unit 300. 385 has been moved upward. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the lowered position, and the lifting / lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved. It may be moved downward. Accordingly, in a normal state, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the elevating spring 365. Further, the urging force of the vertically compressed lifting spring 365 can prevent the button base 354 and the lifting and lowering spring holding member 385 from being quickly deteriorated (fatigue).

  As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, various effects can be used for the player participation type effects, so that various effects can be enjoyed by the player, and the player can be bored. It is difficult to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, an annular (combined two arcs) effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is provided above the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation unit outer periphery is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in a rendering operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, a button decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit 350. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode ) Approaches the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 and the in-button decoration substrate 364, and the proximity of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 and the in-button decoration substrate 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may erroneously detect.

  Therefore, a conductive shield connected to ground (GND) is provided between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 and between the button decoration substrate 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, a punching metal, a metal plate, an expanded metal, a wire mesh, a metal wire, a metal foil, and the like) may be provided. By moving the effect operation unit unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the in-button decoration board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 also changes. And a shield connected to a ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 and the button decoration substrate 364, The influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can be reduced, and erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be prevented.

[3-5f. Another Embodiment of Dish Unit]
Subsequently, a plate unit 200 according to an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection objects are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60B is a diagram illustrating the contact detection sensor main body and a plurality of contact detection objects in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example in which the switching part was provided between (c), the plate left decoration unit of the plate unit, the plate right decoration unit, the production operation unit, etc., making it possible to advance and retreat in the front-back direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body in the front side and the back side of the operation unit etc. FIG. 61 (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative contact detector, and FIG. 61 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into a left and right contact detection body 390 </ b> L and a right contact detection body 390 </ b> R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the rendering operation unit 350. A contact detection sensor main body left 391L and a contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his / her finger or the like from left to right, first, when the player's finger or the like is located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the contact detection body left 390L changes to detect the contact detection sensor main body left 391L, and the capacitance of the contact detection body right 390R does not change and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R remains undetected. Becomes When the finger or the like of the player moves to the center of the button main body 351, the capacitance of both the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R changes, so that the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body Both of the right 391R are detected. Further, when a finger or the like of the player moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detection body left 390L returns to the original state, the contact detection sensor body left 391L is not detected, and the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body right 390R is not detected. The capacitance has changed, and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R remains detecting.

  In this manner, the combination of detection and non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, and the pattern of the change, the movement of the player's finger or the like. Can be detected. Thereby, it is possible to detect a contact operation of more various movements, and to present a player participation type effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations, as well as to the player. In this way, it is possible to more enjoy the player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302. In addition, if a contact detection body is added, a more complicated operation can be detected.

  The embodiment illustrated in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like with any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state where the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations from each other. can do.

  For example, by disposing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (the lower side) of the button body 351, even if a finger or the like of a player contacts any part of the surface of the button body 351, The contact can be detected by the contact detector 393, and the detection accuracy for the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be increased.

  In addition, the plurality of contact detectors 393 may be placed in a portion of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a portion where the player may be injured, or a player may be inconvenienced to other players). (A certain part, a part where cheating is likely to be performed, etc.), and when any of the contact detection bodies 393 detects a human body, a warning or a warning may be notified.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60B, a switch for connecting any one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392 between one contact detection sensor body 392 and the plurality of contact detection bodies 393. This is an example in which a unit 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (the contact detection body 352). . As the switching unit 394, “switching by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor”, “switching by another electronic circuit”, or “movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60C) Unit 270, dish right decoration unit 275, and effect switching unit 300).

  For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection objects 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type effect in which a part detected by each of the contact detection objects 393 is sequentially touched is executed. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of touching by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not a finger or the like of the player has touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present to the player a player-participation-type effect having a high game property by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60C, when the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the rendering operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first rendering operation unit 300 is placed on the front side. When the contact detection body 393a is provided, the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the back side of the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300, and when the production operation unit 300 and the like are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, and the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394 when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted. May be switched.

  Thereby, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped from moving forward. To Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid giving the player an uncomfortable feeling. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and the effect is performed in a state where the finger or the like of the player is inserted into the gap. When the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, there is a possibility that a finger or the like of the player may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like that has been moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the finger or the like of the player is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, and the finger or the like is released from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. Is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, the effect operation unit 300 or the like is moved backward to return to the initial state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the rear gap of the staging operation unit 300 and the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61 (a), the outer shape of the contact detector 395 for detecting the contact of the player's finger or the like is formed as a star and has a decorative property (design). Note that the shape of the contact detection body 395 having decorativeness is not limited to a star shape, but may be a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a predetermined item. The shape may be a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame shape, or the like. Thereby, since the contact detection body 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the contact detector 352 is formed by punching metal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The contact detector may be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil pressing, or the like, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. The contact detector is preferably provided on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the finger or the like of the player does not touch directly, and it is possible to avoid abrasion of the contact detector and to provide a tactile sensation by the surface member. It can be smooth.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the one in which the in-button decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. The contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and the decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. Thereby, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

  In the embodiment of FIG. 61 (b), the contact detector 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the decorative body 398 provided below is invisible due to the metallic luster of the contact detector 397. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397. good.

  Further, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so as not to be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the non-recognizable contact detecting body include “formed with a transparent member”, “formed with a decoration of a surface member such as a button body or the like” and the like. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, and thus does not detect the contact of the finger or the like or perform the contact operation with respect to the player. For example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and a finger or the like of the player comes into contact with or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By protruding to the player, the player becomes aware of the presence of the contact detection body 352 (the contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest. Can be.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62A is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 62B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front and exploded. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line wu in FIG. The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to an upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. A door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a provided vertically at predetermined intervals are mounted on the front surface and a door frame left side base 421 mounted on a lower portion of the front surface. The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a provided vertically at predetermined intervals are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 are covered. The upper left reflector 424 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame and the left side base 42 of the door frame to cover the front side of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. And the left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front sides of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425. Have.

  Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 forward, and an upper and lower portion of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. The left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction forward, and the first LED 423a below the center in the up-down direction of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. And a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

  The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening forward. The door frame left side base 421 is formed by two colors of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is formed of two colors of two types of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. By appearing on the outer surface through the layer 3b, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71A). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 422a. The LED 422b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for emitting the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

  On the door frame upper left side decorative substrate 422, a total of 12 full-color LEDs of four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b are mounted. In addition, the first LED 422a in which the second LEDs 422b are provided on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. At least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle, top-view LED that can emit light within a range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets, namely, upper two, three from third to fifth from above, and three from sixth to eighth from above. Divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to a maximum of 24 systems, and can emit full-color each of the four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets. As described above, one system is controlled by a total of 15 systems of 3 systems.

  Although not shown, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. Is connected. When the LED driver 422c of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via a control signal line, two sets of the command are sent in accordance with the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side is formed uneven. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 423a. The LED 423b is mounted. Also, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for emitting the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b is mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame.

  On this door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, a total of 18 full-color LEDs of 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b are mounted. In addition, the first LED 423a in which the second LEDs 423b are provided on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle, top-view LED that can emit light within a range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. And three from the 10th to the twelfth from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color each of the six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets. As described above, one system is controlled by a total of 21 systems of three systems.

  Although not shown, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. Is connected. When the LED driver 423c of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via a control signal line, three sets of the command are received in accordance with the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The upper left reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding tube 424b extending in the front and rear direction is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a is in contact with the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the front side of the through hole 424a is directed forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting a columnar light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. It is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided at the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft 427a of the left upper light guide member 427 that penetrates through the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 facing through the through holes 424a on the upper and lower sides. The light from the LED 422b is applied to the light guide shaft 427a with an equal amount of light from both the upper and lower sides, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

  Further, in the upper left side reflector 424, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. Accordingly, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

  The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating front and rear at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending in the front-back direction is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a is in contact with the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side of the through hole 425a is directed forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 is inserted with a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 described later. Thus, the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided at the center between the through holes 425a. Thereby, in the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and protrude forward, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame is applied to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration 426.

  In the lower left reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. Accordingly, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

  The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a half tube shape opened rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating back and forth at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the upper reflector 424 on the left side and the holding cylinder 425b of the lower reflector 425 on the left side. In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide 428, and the light guide shaft 429a of the left lower light guide 429, Are inserted from behind. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further includes a decorative part 426b having a constant shape depressed in an arc shape and extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. doing.

  The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending in a front and rear direction in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 427b connecting lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Formed of a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided at regular intervals vertically so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the upper left reflector 424. The light guide shaft 427a has a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b and extends back and forth. Each light guide shaft 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is the left side of the door frame. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft 427a, and irradiate the light outward from the front end. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can emit light brightly.

  The left-side middle light guide member 428 includes three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front-back direction in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Formed of a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided at regular intervals vertically so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. The light guide shaft 428a has a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b and extends back and forth. Each light guide shaft 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is the left side of the door frame. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side middle light guide member 428 can guide light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 forward by the light guide shaft 428a, and irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can emit light brightly.

  The lower left lower light guide member 429 includes three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in a front and rear direction in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Formed of a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided at regular intervals vertically so as to correspond to the three lower holding cylinders 425b below the left side lower reflector 425. The light guide shaft portion 429a has a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b, and extends forward and backward. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is the left side of the door frame. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side lower light guide member 429 can guide light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a, and irradiate the light outward from the front end. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can emit light brightly.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is formed in the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the handle cover 295. At the same time, the color of the part outside the circular or radial pattern on the door frame left side base 421 is formed in the same color as the color of the part outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction slightly protrudes forward from a lower portion, and the lower end portion is slightly curved to the right. The door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and a lower end located below the door window 101a and the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. Is located above the speaker port 211b. Further, the door frame left side unit 420 has an upper portion located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are located at a position separated from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 by a certain distance. Is provided, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is radiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 in a state of being sufficiently spread. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly illuminated.

  Light from the first LED 422a of the upper door frame left side decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the lower door frame left side decorative board 423 provided at a position away from the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to the rear. Is guided forward (guided) by the light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide 428, and the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide 429. (Light), so that the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can emit light more brightly in a dot shape than the other portions.

  In addition, the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guide shaft 427a of the upper light guide member 427 on the left side, and the middle light guide member 428 on the left side. And the light guide shaft 429a of the lower left light guide member 429 are provided at the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and 423b. Accordingly, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with a uniform light amount. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows become hard to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is evenly projected. Light emission decoration can be performed in a planar shape.

  Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b. Since the shadow is projected on the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a can be made hard to see, and the door frame left The appearance of the side decoration 426 in the light-emitting decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66A is a front view of a door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as exploded from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in FIG. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the upper right side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to a door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to an upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a provided vertically at predetermined intervals are mounted on the front surface, and a door frame right side base base 431 attached to a lower portion of the front surface. A door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a provided vertically at predetermined intervals are mounted on the front surface, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and a door frame right side lower. The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative board 433 and the front side of the right side reflector 434 are covered. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 435 which is attached to the door frame right side base 431, to.

  The door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. And a right side lower light guide member 437 for guiding light from one LED 433a forward.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating right and left in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of light-transmitting right-side left lenses 439 having decorative portions 439a to be fitted, and a plurality of light-transmitting right-side bases 431 that cover the right side surface of the door frame right-side base 431 and penetrate right and left in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431, and the door frame right side right side surface. Decorative body 44 Includes a right side right lens 441, a having a decorative hole 440a translucent having a decorative portion 441a which is fitted to close the.

  The right side base 431 of the door frame extends vertically with a substantially constant left and right width. In addition, the door frame right side base 431 has the rear end side extending vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curves toward the rear side. After extending obliquely backward, it curves vertically in the vicinity of the lower part and extends vertically to the lower end.

  The door frame right side base 431 includes a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (a decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and a right side right lens). At the portion where the decorative portion 441a) is provided, a plurality of reflector portions 431a that are depressed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end are provided. In these reflector portions 431a, the rear end sides inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a are inclined toward the side surfaces, and the bottom surfaces are curved.

  Further, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided at a rear side of a center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decoration portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion inside the decoration portion 439a and the decoration portion 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (concave with left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

  These reflector portions 431a of the door frame right side base 431 control the light radiated backward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 described later. The light is reflected in the direction to decorate the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70 and the like).

  The upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 432a. The LED 432b is mounted. A plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for emitting the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c is mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

  On the right side upper decorative board 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs of four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted. In addition, the first LED 432a in which the second LEDs 432b are provided on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. At least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle, top-view LEDs that can emit light in a range of 130 degrees around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets, namely, upper two, three from third to fifth from above, and three from sixth to eighth from above. Divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

  Since the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c, the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, And the third LED 432c emits full color light, respectively, so that there are a total of 21 systems of three systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 to be described later is used. A total of 24 systems of three systems for one set above the third LED 433c divided into two sets are controlled.

  Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving a signal such as a command and an address from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED One clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 and a wiring cable composed of four electric wires are connected. When the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via a control signal line, two sets of the command are received in accordance with the command. , Four first LEDs 432a divided into three sets, eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and two on the right side lower decorative board 433 on the door frame. The two third LEDs 433c of the upper set of the set can emit light of an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  The lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 at a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 433a. The LED 433b is mounted. In addition, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame at intervals vertically. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame.

  On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs of 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c are mounted. In addition, the first LED 433a in which the second LEDs 433b are provided on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 433b. At least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle, top-view LEDs that can emit light within a range of 130 degrees around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. And three from the 10th to the twelfth from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

  Since the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, And the third LED 433c emits full color light, respectively, so that there are a total of 27 systems of three systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems at maximum, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two sets of the third LED 433c. Of these, the upper one set of three systems is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side) Are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Thereby, an increase in the number of LED drivers can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 supplies two power supplies for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A clock cable and a distribution cable composed of four electric wires are connected. When the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via a control signal line, three sets of the command are received in accordance with the command. Each of the six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two third LEDs 433c in the lower set among the two sets Light can be emitted in an appropriate color and intensity every time.

  The right side reflector 434 has a through-hole 434a that penetrates forward and backward at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. At the same time, a cylindrical holding tube 434b extending forward and backward is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 434a is in contact with the front surface of the upper right side decorative board 432 or the lower side decorative board 433 of the door frame, and the front side of the through hole 434a. The periphery of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 is inserted with a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later. Thus, the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided at the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and protrude forward, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides, and Light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is applied to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. The shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a can be prevented from being reflected on the back side of the 435.

  In the right side reflector 434, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. Thus, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The distal ends of the light guide shaft 436a of the right upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. The door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative part 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant shape depressed in an arc shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. doing.

  The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , Formed of a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided at regular intervals up and down so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. The light guide shaft 436a has a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b and extends back and forth. Each light guide shaft 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The state coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. The right upper light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a, and radiate the light outward from the front end. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can emit light brightly.

  The right side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , Formed of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided at regular intervals up and down so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from below the right side reflector 434. The light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. The state coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. The right side lower light guide member 437 can guide light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a, and irradiate the light outward from the front end, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can emit light brightly.

  The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a vertically extending plate shape, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The front side of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed by two colors of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed by two colors of two kinds of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. Since a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner side (right side) of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes leftward to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a coincides with the outside (left side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state fitted in the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located on the left side of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative. Light emission decoration can be performed by light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433.

  The right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. Accordingly, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern of two colors formed in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 439a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c or the third LED 433c.

  The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a vertically extending plate shape, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a that penetrate in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the overall height of the door frame 3. Further, the front right side decorative body 440 of the door frame right side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed of two colors of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The resin is molded in two colors with the above two types of resin, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along an inner side (right side) above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, protrudes rightward, and protrudes rightward. The decorative portion 441a is fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a coincides with the outer surface (right side) of the right side decorative member 440 on the right side of the door frame when fitted in the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. Light emission decoration can be performed by light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433.

  The right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. Accordingly, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 has a radial pattern of two colors formed in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 441a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c or the third LED 433c.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is different from the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the color of the portion of the circular or radial pattern on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. Are formed in the same color as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern in the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side base 421.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction projects farther forward than a portion at the same height in the opposite door frame left side unit 420. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height as from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper portion of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outside of the door frame top unit 450.

  The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 has a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks embedded.

  The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes greatly from the top to a portion having a height of substantially half from the top, and forms a partition. This makes it difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a) in the island facility of the game hall. Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a screen shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, making the entire game area 5a difficult for other players to see. This makes it difficult for the player to feel as if viewed by another player, so that the player can play the game without hesitation.

  According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a certain distance behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Is provided, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is irradiated on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 in a state where the light is sufficiently spread. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly illuminated.

  The door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and a door frame right side lower decorative board provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to the rear. The light from the first LED 433a of the first light guide member 433 is guided forward (light guide) by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the upper right light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right light guide member 437. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a point-like manner more brightly than other portions.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 causes the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 to emit light, and thereby the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 via 431a. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be illuminated. In addition, since a part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decoration part 439a and the decoration part 441a) of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 can be illuminated and decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be conspicuous and has a high appeal to a player.

  Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are formed. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b allow the front door side right side decorative body 435 to be decorated with light emission, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. The third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative board 433 causes the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 behind the door frame right side decorative body 435 to emit light. The first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, The light from the ED 433a and the second LED 433b irradiates the rear door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 to emit light, or the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c. Light can be prevented from irradiating the front door frame right side decorative body 435 with the light and decorating it. Thereby, since the door frame right side decorative body 435, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side can be completely independently light-emitting decorated, It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a light emitting effect with a higher effect to the player.

  The door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432 a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a first LED 433 a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a light guide shaft 436 a of the right side upper light guide member 436. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right light guide member 437 is provided at the center between two adjacent second LEDs 432b and 433b. Accordingly, the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are irradiated with light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even when the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from behind, the shadows become hard to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a planar manner without unevenness.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has the door frame right side decorative body 435 having a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadow is projected. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a have a decorative portion 435b at the portion where the door frame is located, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made harder to see, and the appearance of the light emission decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covers the left and right sides and the front upper part of the door frame top base 451. , A top frame cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top center decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 mounted on the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. (See FIG. 72).

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top central speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of top central speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and a front surface of the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover above the door frame top base 451 are provided. I have.

  The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 projects forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in milky white having a light transmitting property. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in plan view. In addition, the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top center decorative board 455, a plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can make the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by decorating the plurality of LEDs 455a appropriately.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 456a.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front face are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs 457a.

  The pair of top center speakers are provided to be separated from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers, and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers is a tweeter, and outputs a high range of sound such as voice or music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub-unit of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front into a portion behind the inside of the upper portions of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Have been. In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in a state where the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame, and FIG. 71 (b) is an outer layer in FIG. It is a right view of the door frame right side unit which shows in the state which made transparent. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271, a dish right decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, a unit upper cover 312 and a button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a half tube shape. Since it is formed, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, a dish left decorative body 271, a dish right decorative body 276, a unit upper cover 312, a door frame left side decorative body 426, a door frame right side decorative body 435, and a door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame Since the upper right side decorative substrate 432, the lower right side decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, these decorative substrates are provided. By appropriately emitting the LED, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and decorated, or a light emitting effect is shown to the player as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Door can be.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical effect operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the left-right direction. Thus, in the plate unit 200, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is located at the center, the visual impact can be increased, and the effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation) of the effect operation unit 300 can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be made to stand out.

  Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous, thereby forming one sphere. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to recognize the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) as being operable, and to use the effect operation unit 300 composed of a huge sphere to give the player a seemingly different effect. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized as a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

  Further, in the plate unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is located ahead of the vertex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302). And the upper surface of the pressing operation section 303) faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the giant sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the staging operation unit 301 can easily see the entire contents of the staging operation unit 301, and You can look big. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the giant spherical effect operation unit 301, and to increase the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player can actively operate the effect operation unit 301. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface, as shown in FIGS. FIG. 71 shows the door frame right side unit 430 as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

  More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular or radial patterns provided on the outer surface are formed in two colors by using two kinds of synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The exterior part of the door frame 3 where the pattern is provided is formed by two colors of two kinds of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

  For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when a honeycomb-shaped pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the inside of the circular pattern becomes The honeycomb-shaped pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen at a portion other than the pattern, so that the exterior has a circular or radial pattern emphasized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, a honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and a relatively circular or Radial patterns are hard to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

  In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a serves as a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is transparent.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials (synthesis) used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are used. By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin, the light transmittance, and the like, the appearance can be greatly changed even if the shape is unchanged.

  Therefore, for example, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen at the time of a minor change or the like, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without increasing costs.

  Alternatively, the color and the like of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed on the island facilities, thereby giving a colorful feeling to the player. And the ability to appeal to them.

  In the above embodiment, the two-color molding is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the right side right side decorative body 440 of the two-color molding door frame. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case where a circular or radial pattern is formed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern having various shapes may be formed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side are provided outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape at the same time as the decorative body, the desired decoration is given to the decorative body. There is no need to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like after the formation, and it is possible to save the trouble of the decoration and suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when a polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, light is transmitted through the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle. When formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are the same color, so that the polka dot circle becomes hard to see, and the appearance is such that the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot pattern circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is pink, the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is caused by the difference in color. The polka dot circles are clearly visible, giving the appearance a white polka dot decoration on a pink background. As described above, when the decorative body is formed, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including the color) of the synthetic resin to be used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the change of the external appearance is required. Costs can be reduced.

  In addition, as described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including the color) of the synthetic resin to be used. When the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a line in the island facility, the island facility becomes colorful. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to a player who is traveling in the game hall, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can attract the player can be provided.

  Furthermore, a handle cover 295 having a decoration formed by two colors of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances on a portion outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the like are provided. Can be.

  Further, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is formed of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the border of the decoration (polka dot pattern) constituted by the inner layer 3a becomes relatively clear, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

  Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The inner layer 3a is made to have a low transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen through from the outside, and when the model is changed, a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. This makes it possible to greatly change the appearance of the decoration of the decorative body, and easily change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the decorative body.

  Further, as described above, the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a difficult to see, so that a pattern (a pattern by a shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc.) is formed on the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and the outer layer 3b is transparent when the model is changed. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a suitable synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be largely changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost for a model change.

  Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board capable of irradiating light are provided. 433 and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, so that the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side right side decorative body are provided. When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 emit light, the inner side of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed. The portion of the layer 3a (the portion of the polka dot) can be brightly decorated with light, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light to improve the appearance. Both the player to be able to entertain emission decoration door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be illuminated and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c applied to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The whole of the left side decoration 438 and the right side decoration 440 of the door frame can be illuminated, and the door frame right side left decoration 438 and the right side decoration 440 of the door frame can be clearly displayed. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the interest of the user can be provided.

  Further, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is performed by two-color molding (multicolor) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. (Molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface, the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used, and the like. The decoration that is visible when the LED is not lit and the decoration that is visible when the LED is lit can be different, and the decoration can be changed to strongly attract the interest of the player. More specifically, for example, when two-color molding is described as an example of multicolor molding, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence state, only the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed on the surface is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, the light from the LED is directly radiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion of the inner layer 3a where the holes are formed, so that the inner layer 3a The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed on the surface and the portion of the hole become visible, so that a decoration different from when the LED is not emitted can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the portion of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the outer layer 3b on the surface are decorated with light emission. It is possible to change the part to be decorated, and to change the decoration to be illuminated. As described above, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by causing the LED to emit light in accordance with the game state, a change in the decoration of the decorative body allows the player to receive a chance or change the driving operation (for example, “right-hand”). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suggested, and that can perform various effects.

  Further, since the left and right door frame left side decorative bodies 426 and the right side door frame decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different amounts of protrusion in the front-rear direction, Since the pachinko machine 1 can have different impressions (views) when viewed from the left front and right front, the pachinko machine 1 moves around in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if a player once passes the front of the pachinko machine 1 and approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that at the time of the previous excursion, attracting interest in the pachinko machine 1 The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of attracting a player who is traveling in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to play to the pachinko machine 1 can be provided. .

[3-10. LED Arrangement and System in Door Frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative substrate of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by rotating the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, And has an appearance similar to an automobile steering wheel (steering).

  The handle 195 has a front side of a central hub portion 195a covered by a front handle lens 185, and a handle decorative substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on a front surface between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. Is provided. Further, a handle cover decorative board 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

  The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 pieces, one piece at the center, three pieces at regular intervals on the middle circumference, and six pieces at regular intervals along the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric manner. These LEDs 184a are one at the center, the middle three connected by broken lines in FIG. 72, and the two upper left and outer right two connected respectively by broken lines in FIG. , And two on the lower side of the outer periphery. These five sets of LEDs 184a are controlled in 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, so that each set of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative board 293, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a line at intervals in the circumferential direction. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 72, these twelve LEDs 293a include two at the lower left, two at the left, two at the upper left, two at the upper right, and two at the right from the center. It is divided into six sets, two at the lower right. These six sets of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 systems, so that each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  As described above, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, so that light emission is produced such that light rotates around the handle 195, and the handle 195 moves toward the center of the handle 195. A light emission effect in which light is concentrated or a light emission effect in which light spreads out of the handle 195 can be shown to the player. Further, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be illuminated by the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a vertically-extending substantially rectangular door window 101a which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271, a dish right decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, an effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a half tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible for a player to see a decoration in which substantially the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a dish left decorative board 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish right decorative board 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 behind door frame right side decorative body 435 and door frame right The side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided toward the front.

  More specifically, on the dish left decorative board 273, four LEDs 273a mounted on the front side in a line in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for emitting an LED 273a and an LED 273a of a dish right decorative board 278 described later. (Not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as indicated by the broken lines in FIG. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled in six systems by an LED driver, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit full-color light as appropriate.

  The dish right decorative board 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as indicated by the broken lines in FIG. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the dish left decorative board 273, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit full-color light as appropriate.

  On the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the up and down direction, and two first LEDs 422a are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. It has eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets of the upper two pieces and the remaining two pieces as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 422b include two upper LEDs, three third to fifth LEDs from above, and sixth to eighth LEDs from above. It is divided into three sets of up to three. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and the first LED 422a and the second The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  On the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the up-down direction, and two are vertically mounted between the first LEDs 423a. It includes twelve second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as indicated by the two-dot chain line. As shown in FIG. 72, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. And seven from the top to three from the ninth and three from the tenth to the twelfth from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 432a. It has eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface with an interval in the vertical direction. Also, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 emits a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. LED driver 432d. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 432b include two upper LEDs, three third to fifth LEDs from the top, and sixth to eighth LEDs from the top. It is divided into three sets of up to three. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as indicated by the chain line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third divided into two sets in the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The upper set of third LEDs 433c of the LEDs 433c is controlled by an LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

  On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front with a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a vertically arranged between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at an interval in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c And an LED driver 433d for emitting light. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, one set at a time, two by two from the top. Also, as shown in FIG. 72, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top as shown by the dashed line in FIG. And seven from the top to three from the ninth and three from the tenth to the twelfth from the top. Further, the four rear third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as indicated by the broken lines in FIG. Six first LEDs 433a divided into three sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two lower third LEDs 433c divided into two sets , And the LED driver 433d is controlled by 24 systems, and the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c of each set can emit light of a full color as appropriate.

  In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decorative board provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The board 432 and the decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame are formed in an asymmetric shape with respect to the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 also have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

  Note that the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. The numbers of the one LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b are the same, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. (A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. Thereby, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LED for performing the light emission effect.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at an interval in the left-right direction, the LED 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. And an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. As shown in FIG. 72, the six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets, two from the left. The six LEDs 455a, which are divided into three sets, are controlled by an LED driver in nine systems, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light of a full color as appropriate.

  The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a that are mounted on the front surface in the left and right direction. As shown by broken lines in FIG. 72, the four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a that are mounted on the front surface in the left and right direction. As shown by broken lines in FIG. 72, the four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light of a full color of an appropriate color.

  According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is guided by the light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The light guide shaft 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft 436a of the upper right light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft 437a of the lower right light guide member 437 provide the opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426. 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are guided outward (forward). Thereby, on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect that emits bright light in a dot-like manner, and a dot-like shape not found in the conventional pachinko machine. The luminous effect that emits spot light brilliantly can make the player "hit".

  Also, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame upper side decorative board 422, the door frame lower left side. The second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, the second LED 432b of the door frame upper right side decorative board 432, the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the LED 455a of the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board The LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 emit light as appropriate, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and decorated, or the light moves so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

  That is, in the door frame 3, a light emission effect of performing spot light emission is executed on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the front side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. In FIG. 72, the light emission effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar shape (surface light emission) by the LED system connected by the dashed line in FIG. Can be.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transmitted to the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. As compared with the general surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the spots of the openings 426a and 435a can be brightly and brightly emitted with high luminance. . At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided. Even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is spot-lighted with high brightness, the glare does not make the inside of the game area 5a facing the door window 101a difficult to see, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body and the like in the area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In addition, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 project forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a) and emit light with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front edge of the ridge which is the front end of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 protruding forward (connect the front ends protruding forward in an arc shape in plan view). (On the vertical line), the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (the door window 101a side). Therefore, the light of the spot emission in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected to the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the rear side of the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a does not become difficult to see, and the high-brightness spot emission allows the interest of other players to be directed to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the spot light emitting portions are provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward outside the door window 101 a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot emitting light is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot emitting portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot emitting light. Accordingly, when spot light emission is performed on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, high brightness spot light can be seen from other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, it is possible to appeal the existence of the present pachinko machine 1 to other players, to strongly attract the player's interest, and to select a pachinko machine to play in the game hall. The pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power capable of attracting a player who is migrating to the present pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 or the door frame right side decorative body 435 are sandwiched. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. Thus, both sides of the light guide pins (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, and light guide shaft 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the surface LEDs have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made more difficult to see.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation unit includes an outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for emitting 31 LEDs 320a. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is divided into two parts, a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

  Out of the 31 LEDs 320a, 18 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321, six are provided at intervals on a circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are spaced at an intermediate circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

  The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the effect operation section outer decoration board 320. The thirteen LEDs 320a of the rear decoration substrate 322 are provided two at a time at both ends of the arc on the circumference close to the inner circumference and three at the middle between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining six pieces are provided at intervals on the circumference, and three pieces are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the eighteen LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321 are three sets of six on the inner circumference, two on the inner circumference, and three on the middle circumference. Are divided into three sets, one set each, and nine sets on the outer circumference in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322 are connected to each other by two dashed lines on the inner circumference. The three sets are each divided into three sets, one set each, and the nine sets on the outer circumference are divided into two sets each having three sets near both ends, for a total of seven sets. That is, in the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. These 16 sets of LEDs 320a are controlled in 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  According to the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, the light emission effect such that the light rotates in the effect operation unit 301 and the light emission such that the light is concentrated on the center are provided by appropriately emitting the 31 LEDs and the 48 systems of LEDs 320a. An effect or a light emission effect in which light spreads outward can be shown to the player.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a faces up and down along the door window 101a so that the protrusion amounts in the front and rear directions are different from each other on one side and the other outside in the left and right direction of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a. The door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. A door frame left upper side decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted and a door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted behind 435, respectively. A board 423, a decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 432a and the second LEDs 432b are mounted, the plurality of first LEDs 433a, and the second LEDs 4 3b is provided, and a lower right side decorative substrate 433 on which the door frame 3b is mounted is provided, and light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is supplied to the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, and the lower light guide of the left side guide the frame to the vicinity of the front surface of the right side decorative body 435 and radiate the light forward. Since the light guide shaft portion 429a of the member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate is provided. 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432 By emitting the second LED 433b, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light (surface emission) in a planar manner, and the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a of the left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 emit light, the light is emitted forward. The light is formed by the columnar light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a to form the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface, they are radiated forward from their front ends (front end surfaces), and are guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. A portion corresponding to the tip of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a can be light-emitting decoration (spot light emission) in a dot shape. .

  Accordingly, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are provided. The door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (the door window 101a) by appropriately emitting the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b. 426 and the entirety of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are illuminated and decorated in a planar manner, a part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and a part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are illuminated and decorated in the form of dots, and the door frame left side. The whole of the side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame can be luminously decorated in a planar shape while a part thereof can be luminously decorated. Because, it is possible to show the variety of emission effect to the player, it entertained while hardly get bored the player can be suppressed a decrease in interest in the game.

  At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame are separated from each other. The system in which the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the upper side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are separated from each other is symmetrical with each other. Since the first LEDs 422a, the first LEDs 423a, the first LEDs 432a, and the first LEDs 433a and the second LEDs 422b, the second LEDs 423b, the second LEDs 432b, and the second LEDs 433b have different systems from each other, the door frame left side. The first LED 422a and the second LED 4 on the decorative body 426 side When creating data of lighting patterns of the second LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, for example, the door The data for the frame left side decorative body 426 side is diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or the same for the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. Since it is possible to use the flow data, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data, and it is possible to construct more complicated lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). This makes it easy for the player to show a variety of lighting effects with lighting patterns, and also allows the player to see a variety of lighting effects with high staging effects. , It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect against emission effect at the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 left and right outer sides of Tobiramado 101a.

  In addition, since the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 433a have the same system. , The first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a). , The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are always turned on at the same time, so that the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, Light is emitted from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, so that The shadows of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a due to the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b. The light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 436a, which are thinned so as to be canceled and projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made hard to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be light-emitting decoratively evenly.

  Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which decorate and emit light in a planar shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, A part corresponding to the front end of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the front end of the light guide shaft 437a is decorated with one LED 432a and the first LED 433a. This makes it possible to show the player a light emission effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as light emission in a spot shape while emitting light in a plane shape, and emits bright light in a dot shape The lighting effect can attract the player's interest strongly, and the spot light can be emitted in a spot-like manner that is not available in conventional pachinko machines. The emission effect, the player can be a "hash" can be a pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left and right direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower side on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrate 433 and the decorative substrate 433 are asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 423 on the right side of the door frame, and the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame seem to be right. Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly operation of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to prevent the right side lower decorative substrate 433 from being mistaken, thereby improving the workability of assembly and suppressing an increase in cost.

[3-11. Decorative board identification]
Subsequently, identification of various decorative boards on which the LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like, taking the door frame 3 as an example. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, a dish left decorative board 273, a dish right decorative board 278, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423, a door frame right provided in the door frame 3 around the door window 101a. The side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used for the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and a non-white LED driver and a connector attached to the decorative board are mounted on the rear side of the board. Like that. Thereby, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration board is reflected to the front side so that the front decoration body or the like can be lighted and decorated more brightly, and the front side (player side). Makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

  The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the plate material of the substrate may be white.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative substrates, different identifying portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative substrate so that each decorative substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 includes a character identification unit 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, and model numbers, and a color identification unit 7b using different colors (indicated by shading with different shades in FIG. 74). And

  More specifically, as the character identification unit 7a, the character "lower left" on the dish left decorative board 273, the character "lower right" on the dish right decorative board 278, and the letter "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 are used. , The letter “lower left” on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the letter “upper right” on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the letter “lower right” on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The character is “upper middle” on the door frame top center decorative board 455, “upper left” on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and “upper right” on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each has been given.

  The color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is provided over substantially the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is provided not on the entire rear surface but partially so as not to hinder the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. .

  The identification unit 7 is provided on the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a seal, applying paint, or the like.

  In the above description, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example. An identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a or a color identification unit 7b may be provided on the decorative substrate.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. Alternatively, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the identification section 7 (the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, a decoration board having a similar shape can be easily formed. It is possible to prevent the wrong decorative board from being assembled during the assembling operation, and to improve the assembling workability.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front surface of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. Can be reflected forward on the front surface of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body or the like brighter and lighter, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (from the player side), thereby improving the appearance. Can be better.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification section 7b as the identification section 7 is applied to substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is possible to obtain a desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) Can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative substrates are overlapped during assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, a desired decorative substrate can be easily found, and time and labor required for the assembling work can be easily found. Can be simplified.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification portion 7b is made different for each decorative board, the same color is used when preparing the decorative board necessary for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly. When there is a decorative board provided with the identification unit 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color is not enough in the color identification section 7b of the prepared decorative board, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared, or that the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the assembling work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, and the time required for assembling can be shortened, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification portion 7a as the identification portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrate is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the character of the character identification portion 7a. Thereby, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate is, and to achieve the same operation and effect as described above.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decorative substrate are white and the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface, the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate has high transparency. Also, the decorative substrate can be made less noticeable from the front (from the player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED can be reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative substrate. This makes it possible to make the decorative body light-emitting decorative more brightly, and it is possible to entertain the player with a light-emitting effect having a high effect, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional components such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board so that the functional components are not seen from the front (from the player side). The appearance can be prevented from being degraded by being seen, and the appearance of the decorative body (game machine) can be improved. In addition, since the functional component is not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional component white (or yellow) so as to be inconspicuous. It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by eliminating the trouble of coloring the functional component.

[3-12. Effect of door frame]
According to the present embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detectors 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detector 393 provided at a desired portion where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of the player. When the player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion by switching the switching section 394 so that the contact detection body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. In other words, since the change in the capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, the approach or contact of the player to a desired portion can be detected, Control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, and the like according to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392. It is possible to perform a predetermined control by the step. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching section 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at other portions is provided. Is cut off, so that even if the player approaches or contacts another part, the capacitance of the contact detector 393 provided in the other part changes, Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at a desired portion is reliably detected. Erroneous detection can be prevented.

  As described above, for the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions from each other, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394. Capacitance can be detected by a single contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control unit 1511, an effect display control unit 1512, and the like. In the control means, the number of channels for detecting the approach or contact of the player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for the effect can be relatively increased. Therefore, it is possible to control more effect means (for example, movable decorative body, light-emitting decorative body, effect display device, and the like) by the control means, so that a variety of effects can be provided to the player by increasing the effect means. It can be presented, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, making it possible for the player to enjoy the game sufficiently, and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to be touched, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at desired parts by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. By connecting to the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting approach or contact of the player to a desired portion, control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave predetermined cautions and warnings by the means, one contact detection sensor body 392 monitors a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 and relatively controls the number of channels that can be used for production. It can be increased, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sensor body having electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit in a part that is difficult for a player to see, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing appeal to the player. Can be enhanced.

  Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. , The capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392, so that the labor involved in assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

  In addition, a connection terminal is provided in advance on the contact detection sensor main body 392, and only by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 are provided. Can be connected, the conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the number of components is reduced as compared with the case where the conductive member is connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, so that the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the pachinko machine 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 desired to be detected by the switching unit 394 can be selected. Are arranged in a distributed manner, and when a player participation type effect is performed in which a plurality of distributed contact detectors 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player sequentially touches. By switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the player, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection body 393 in order, and a player-participation-type effect with high game characteristics can be realized. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertained.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the finger or the like of the player approaches or touches the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player comes close to the contact detection body 352 made of a patching metal of a metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (production operation unit 350).

  When the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected by using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 in this manner, the decoration board 355 outside the button, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit ascending and descending A predetermined effect is output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the in-button decoration substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, so that the player can enjoy the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the rendering operation unit 350, a predetermined rendering is output, so the rendering of the rendering operation unit 350 is performed by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. It can function as a contact operation unit. The player can press and operate the non-contact operation unit and the effect operation unit 350 functioning as the contact operation unit when the player projects the non-contact operation, the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the press operation. Since various staging operations such as operation can be performed, it is easy to embody the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of the conventional pachinko machine having operation buttons that can only be pressed, and other pachinko machines can be realized. By distinguishing the pachinko machine from the machine, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player.

  In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in accordance with the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the capacitance is determined by the contact detection body 352 (the button main body 351). It is possible to output a different effect for each of the thresholds by providing a plurality of thresholds for the capacitance since the thresholds differ depending on the distance between the player and the player. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the stage (distance) from the player's approach to the contact to the button body 351 (the stage operation unit 350) until the button is contacted in multiple stages, the stage-dependent production is output. By doing so, more diverse effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection having electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit is performed. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance and appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, as described above, since various operation operations such as a non-contact operation, a contact operation, and a pressing operation can be performed by the operation unit, a player participation-type effect that enables the player to perform the operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain various production operations, make it difficult for the player to get tired of it, and to make the player entertain in a participant-type production, reducing the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is a punching metal formed of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed thereon, the plurality of holes allow the player to attach to the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in the state of approaching or not in contact can be reduced, and occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be avoided. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, and the like of the plurality of holes, the area of the contact detection body 352 can be increased while suppressing an increase in capacitance. The range in which the player approaches or touches the main body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be widened. Thereby, since the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged and the detection range can be widened, as in the above-described embodiment, the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged, and When the contact detection body 352 has the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or touch the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 so that the player's finger or the like approaches or makes contact with the staging operation unit unit 350. The moving distance is shortened, and the operation operation unit 350 can be quickly operated. It is possible to hardly, the player can reliably be joined to participatory effect, a decrease in the interest entertained player by the effect can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. The light emission effect from the LED 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the light emission effect can be surely enjoyed by the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is provided in the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) capable of performing a pressing operation, the contact detection body made of a punching metal which is a metal plate having a certain strength and rigidity. With 352, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced, and even when the player performs a pressing operation, even if the production operation unit 350 (the button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit, the production operation unit is produced. 350 can be made difficult to deform or break. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can be made hard to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, so that the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed by the player without mind, and the effect operation unit 350 is operated. It is possible to make the player's participation-type production more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact detection body 352 is formed of a punching metal and the contact detection body 352 is an expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, a space for providing the contact detection body 352 can be easily secured, and the contact detection body 352 can be easily provided, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased, so that the appeal to the player is higher. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

  Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the thickness of the contact detector 352 is constant as compared with expanded metal, so that the contact detector 352 can be easily formed into a desired three-dimensional shape by pressing. This makes it possible to easily make the shape optimal for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350), and the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Also, in the effect operation unit 350, the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the button, and it is possible to prevent the player from touching the contact detection body 352 having a plurality of holes, thereby giving an unpleasant feeling. The button body 351 can be operated without discomfort in a player-participation-type effect using as an operation unit, and the effect can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food adheres to a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the cleaning work, and reduce the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the easily-cleaned pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the rendering means such as the decoration board 355 outside the button, the vibration motor 356, the rendering operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the decoration board 364 in the button, and the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358. Then, since a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect The effect output through (via) the operation unit 350 can be surely enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the production means such as the decoration board 355 outside the button, the vibration motor 356, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the decoration board 364 in the button, and the projection output adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since the provision means is provided, the contact detection body 352 covers the production means, and the contact detection body 352 (production operation unit 350) and the production means can be compactly integrated. It is possible to easily provide the staging operation unit 350 and the staging means having the above-described effects at desired portions of the pachinko machine 1, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Can be made easier.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the effect is produced by the player approaching or touching the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) provided to be able to move up and down. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the proximity of the player to the staging operation unit 350 by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358. Alternatively, contact can be detected. When the approach or contact of the player with the effect operation unit 350 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward by the urging force of the elevation spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 projects while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 comes into contact with (collides with) the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present to the player an effect by a physical force such as pressing the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect that the conventional pachinko machine does not have, and to strongly attract the interest of the player to the effect operation unit 350, and to the player The projection of the effect operation unit 350 can be reliably noticed.

  When the effect operation unit 350 is to be protruded, if the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end of the lifting / lowering spring 365 (upward), the compression of the lifting / lowering spring 365 is strong. When the spring is moved in a direction (downward) away from the upper end side of the elevating spring 365, the compression of the elevating spring 365 is weakened, and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the staging operation unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this manner, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be protruded with various projection powers, so that it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by physical force, to make it difficult for the player to be bored, and to effect the effect operation. The effect by the projection of the unit unit 350 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the projection output of the staging operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or touches the staging operation unit 350 with a finger or the like, the staging operation unit is applied with a strong force. When the player 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, so that it is possible to strongly think that there is something good (for example, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous). And a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 capable of performing a pressing operation, when a player participation type production is performed, the player is caused to perform a pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 to play the game. The player can participate in the participant-type effect, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed, the player can place a finger or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) so that the effect operation can be performed at any time. Then, when the player participation type effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit unit 350 is protruded by the effect operation unit raising / lowering mechanism 360 to thereby provide a player participation type effect image or sound. Even if the start of the performance is not guided, it is possible to promptly recognize the start of the execution of the player-participation-type effect, and to increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 to perform the player-type effect. It can be even more entertaining.

  Furthermore, since the effect operating unit unit 350 is made to protrude by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit unit 350 is protruded using a drive motor. As a result, the effect operation unit 350 can be easily and vigorously protruded, so that the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

  Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected. Since the capacity varies depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and make the effect operation unit 350 protrude with a different projection power for each threshold. Becomes Accordingly, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the staging operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, so that the stage can be detected in multiple stages. By protruding with the sudden output, a variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the pop-up is performed by performing the player participation type effect, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can advance and retreat is provided to the player. Approaching or touching, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 with which the player of the effect operation unit 350 comes into contact changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the contact due to the approach or contact of the player. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be detected, the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 can be detected, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, by the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the advance / retreat (press) of the effect operation unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, the out-of-button decoration substrate 355, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the in-button decoration substrate A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as the 364, the projection output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, a predetermined effect is performed by the player moving the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaching or touching the effect operation unit 350, so that the effect can entertain the player, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the staging operation unit 350, the staging is performed. Can function as follows. On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is performed, so that the effect operation unit 350 can function as an effect operation unit (press operation unit). Because of this, the player can perform a variety of staging operations, and by performing a player participation-type staging that enables the staging operation of the player, a variety of staging operations can be enjoyed. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to make the player entertain the player-participatory effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided near the portion of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 where the player makes contact (under the upper surface 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 differs according to the distance between the contact detection body 352 (the button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect are provided, and each of the thresholds is provided. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the stage (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the stage operation unit 350 until the stage comes into contact with the stage operation unit in multiple stages, it is possible to present the stage in accordance with each stage. Thus, a variety of effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the production operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 (non-contact operation, An operation feeling can be given to the (contact operation), and the effect operation can be more enjoyed for the player.

  Furthermore, it is provided with a rendering operation unit unit 350 in which a player can advance and retreat (can be pressed), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 capable of detecting approach or contact of the player to the rendering operation unit unit 350. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the player performs an operation (press operation) for moving the production operation unit 350 forward or backward, and an operation (a non-contact operation, a contact operation) for bringing a finger or the like into or out of contact with the production operation unit 350. ) Can be requested, and the various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in the player-participation type production and facilitate the participation in the player participation-type production. Can be. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by various operations using the effect operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player-participating effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 to the engaging portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operation unit 350 is locked so as not to advance and retreat. Until an effect such as moving the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward is performed, the effect operation unit 350 is prevented from moving back and forth by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. It is possible to prevent the 350 from arbitrarily moving or swinging. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of distrust or anxiety by moving or shaking the effect operation unit 350 without permission, and to make the effect by the effect operation unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be made.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, so that the contact detection sensor having electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult to see from the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance.

  Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, an output circuit, and the like for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are formed separately. Since the shape, material, and the like of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected independently of the contact detection sensor main body 358, the shape, form, specifications, and the like of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 are changed. And the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be embodied reliably.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player is attached to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the out-of-button decorative board 355, the in-button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. When the finger approaches or contacts the finger or the like, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 and the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 or the decoration body 398 in the button. Is changed, and in accordance with the change, a predetermined effect of irradiating light to the player side by the decorative board 355 outside the button, the decorative board 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398 is executed. The light emitted to the player can strongly attract the interest of the player to the decorative board 355 outside the button, the decorative board 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398, It is possible to entertain the player by the director, which is line. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 or the decoration body 398 in the button, and the button body 351 or Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player an illusion of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 as a part of the decoration portion, and the game It can be made impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is for detecting a player.

  As described above, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is different from the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 in the button, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (production) is interrupted, the player does not care about the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 inside the button, or the decoration body 398. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give a sense of incongruity to the player. Therefore, it is possible to show the effect of the decorative board 355 outside the button, the decorative board 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398 to the player in a favorable state, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, the outside of the button covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the effect of irradiating light to the player side is performed on the decorative substrate 355, the in-button decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the directing operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). 302), and the player can be given an operational feeling by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is performed, the finger or the like of the player is made to approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the approach or the contact of the finger or the like by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is performed. The effect is executed by the decorative board 355 outside the button, the decorative board 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398 by detecting the contact, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player can participate in the player. You can entertain the type production.

  Further, since the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the finger of the player or the like are detected. It is possible to vary the effect of the out-of-button decorative board 355, the in-button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the distance between the button and the decorative board 355 outside the button according to the movement (position) of the finger or the like of the player. And the effect of the decorative board 364 or the decorative body 398 in the button can be changed, so that a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the various effects can make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

  Further, a change in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button decoration substrate 364, and the decoration 398 changes, the game to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is performed. The approach or contact of a finger or the like of a person can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 exhibiting the above-described operation and effect can be reliably realized.

  Further, since the change in the capacitance is detected by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be a conductive member. When the contact detector 397 is a metal vapor-deposited film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor-deposited film, and it looks like a part of the decoration by thickening the vapor-deposited film to have a metallic luster. Can be. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are punching metal having a design such as a star and a heart, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made to look like a part of a decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detector 352, the contact detector 395, and the contact detector 397 that cannot be recognized by the player can be provided, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the rendering operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance is caused by the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). Depending on the change, a predetermined effect is provided by the effect presentation means such as the decoration board outside button 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the decoration board in button 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. The contact detection object 395 (including the contact detection object 352, the contact detection object left 390L, the contact detection object right 390R, the contact detection object 393, and the contact detection object 397, etc.) for displaying The pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detection body 395 itself, and the appearance is improved, and the appeal to the player is high. It is possible to provide a dick machine 1. In addition, the front side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and the presentation is performed according to a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented by the means via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, a predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. In other words, the button body 351 can function as the effect operation unit 301. And since the contact detection body 395 etc. which can be seen through the button main body 351 have a design, the effect operation part 301 appears to have a design, and the effect which the pachinko machine does not have so far. Since the pachinko machine 1 includes the operation unit 301, the pachinko machine 1 can give a strong impact to the player and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 having a design property can give a strong impact to the player, so that interest in the contact detection body 395 (the button main body 351) can be strongly inspired. It is possible to increase the expectation for the operation of the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect of operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the contact detector 395 for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape having a design, at a glance, some players present effects. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the player is prompted to approach or touch the button body 351, and for the first time, the effect of the button body 351 by the contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to make the player aware of the operation unit 301, and it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and to further enjoy the player participation type effect. Alternatively, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the staging operation unit 301 when the player participation type staging that operates the staging operation unit 301 is executed, the static detection unit 395 or the like is activated. Since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means with a change in the electric capacity, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 and the like, the player's finger and the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 and the like. It is possible to easily detect approach or contact, and it is possible to easily realize the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects. In addition, since the effect is presented in accordance with the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 and the like, contact from the approach of the player's finger and the like to the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 and the like is performed. Since it is possible to detect the distance up to (distance) in multiple stages, by presenting the effects according to each stage, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, Can be made hard to get tired of, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, and wire mesh is used as the contact detection body 395 having conductivity, A design property can be imparted to the contact detector 395 and the like, and the appearance of the contact detector 395 and the like can be prevented from being deteriorated. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

  In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detector 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design having designability without forming the contact detector 395 and the like in a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be formed in a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food does not adhere to the contact detection body 395 and the like, and the trouble of cleaning is easy. It can be. More specifically, since the contact detection body 395 or the like is made of a material having irregularities such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food tends to adhere to the irregularities, and it takes time to clean the dirt. However, since the surface of the contact detector 395 and the like is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detector 395 or the like having irregularities such as punching metal is used, the button body 351 can be used. Thus, the adhesion of dirt can be prevented, and the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as an easy-to-clean one.

  Further, the front side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection body 395 and the like. In the case of using a material that can enhance the design, such as a foil stamping, it is possible to prevent the player from being worn out early by touching, and to enhance the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

  Further, the front side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the player does not directly touch the contact detection body 395 and the like with the transparent button body 351. Since it is possible to use a material having a bad touch or a thing that gives a player an unpleasant feeling as the detector 395 or the like, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detector 395 and the like, The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed from the corresponding material.

  In addition, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like is changed by bringing the finger or the like of the player close to or touching the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 are changed. The predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., so that the player approaches or touches the finger or the like with the button body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the operation of the finger or the like.

  In addition, an effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, and the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 and the like is executed, the button body 351 can function as a contact operation unit, and the presented effect provides an operational feeling. Can be provided, and the operation (player participation type effect) using the button body 351 can be enjoyed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player makes a finger or the like approach or touch the button main body 351 to make contact detection objects 352. When the (touch detection sensor main body 358) detects that a finger or the like enters the detection area, the game is performed through the button main body 351 by the emission of the plurality of LEDs 355a of the out-of-button decoration board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the in-button decoration board 364. Effect in which light is applied to the player, an effect in which the finger or the like of a player in contact with (through) the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356 is vibrated, and the effect is raised above the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Through the button body 351, effects such as giving impact, pushing up, wind pressure, etc. to the player are performed. Can function the button body 351 as the contact operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player. At this time, since effects such as light, vibration, shock, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, the effect can surprise the player and entertain the player. Accordingly, the desire to operate the button body 351 can be increased. When the finger or the like of the player touches the button body 351 and appropriately moves the finger or the like to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. A contact operation by detecting approach or contact of a finger or the like of the player by 352 and a pressing operation of the button body 351 can allow the player to enjoy various staging operations, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a detecting means for detecting approach or contact of a finger or the like of the player is constituted by the contact detecting body 352 and the contact detecting sensor main body 358, and the contact detecting body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 remote from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the button main body 351 can be controlled by the contact detection body 352. Of the player's finger or the like on the upper surface portion 351a can be detected, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting approach or contact of the player's finger or the like is constituted by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is provided. Can be disposed on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 remote from the upper surface portion 351a (the contact detection body 352) of the button main body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be disposed in a less conspicuous portion. 1 can improve the appearance.

  In addition, since the out-of-button decorative board 355 and the in-button decorative board 364 and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button main body 351, light and light are provided to the player through the button main body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure can be easily provided, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 having a rear portion insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left front view of the main body frame base unit 500. A main frame upper hinge member 510 which is rotatably mounted on the upper frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the upper frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3; A lower body frame hinge assembly which is attached to the lower left end of the base unit 500 on the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted. And a solid 520.

  The main body frame 4 is mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in a front view, and is mounted on the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 mounted on a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and covers a rear side of the game board 5; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 has a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the one rail cover 554 to the left as viewed from the front, and the tank rail 553 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is configured to guide the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and to send the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game balls B that pass through the upper full ball path unit 600 by the door frame 3 side. Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is urged and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 to FIG. FIG. 82 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and is connected to the connection cable 503, and is provided to guide the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower part of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends back and forth, and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ／ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board forming a lower side of the game board insertion port 501b and having the game board 5 placed thereon. The game device includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting portion. The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side of the unit 501e when viewed from the front, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a plate shape in a plate shape, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j rotatably attached and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left end in front view of the rear surface of the base body 501a for attaching the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  The main body frame base 501 has a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released from the pressing and the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The body frame base 501 has a body frame opening switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface of the base body 501a below a position where the door frame opening switch is attached. I have. When the main frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch is released from the pressing, and the opening of the main frame 4 can be detected. The detection signal from the body frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 is capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward at both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, and penetrating front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a. And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame auxiliary. Connected to relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hingedly attached to the main body frame base 501 (left side). ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In a state in which the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a, the left and right directions of a plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are changed. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being fastened together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted into the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  When the hinge is rotated so that the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 in this state, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but stops increasing when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees. You can add a habit. Accordingly, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees is changed to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the bending habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the fold of the door frame 3, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axial center) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame. An angle at which a tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. As the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 Is mounted on the door frame hinge assembly 120 so as to be rotatable.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L-shape, and protrudes upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511 in a columnar shape. And an upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported by the outer hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extending portion, and has an upper hinge hole 511 a for a door frame for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the body frame 4 can be hinge-rotated. 3 can be mounted so that it can be hinged.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. Door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the flat plate-shaped plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above into the lower door frame lower portion. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view, and has a constant cross section and extends vertically. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that is opened to the right and extends vertically on the front side formed in a U-shape with the right side opened in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530 a. When the left reinforcing frame 111 is inserted into the groove 530a, the gap between the main frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in a plan view, and an incorrect tool is inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launching device]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is mounted on the main body frame 4. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the firing base 541 on the right side in a front view and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 544. When the handle 195 is turned while the player is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball B or the like, the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are used. From there, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant width in the left and right direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front view is substantially the same as the top plate portion and extends downward. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose front-rear direction width is approximately the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. And a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position nearer to the front side than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right and near the lower end with a substantially constant width. Left back plate portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b. Extends to almost the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward and left in a box shape extending left and right, and a portion extending left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached at an intermediate position in the left-right direction, and at the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball retaining member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, and the length in the front-back direction is shorter than the depth in the front-back direction of the top plate 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view in which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonally left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and is formed to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

  Also, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at an appropriate angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight leftward substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Things.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. Mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a protruding into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in the upper and lower stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in a single stage on the downstream side. Even if the height decreases, the ball is not clogged.

  The ball stopping member 557 is slidably mounted in the left and right direction in the vicinity of the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553 in front view, and is slid to the left to close the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, The game balls B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in a front view on the upper surface of a portion extending right and left of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The entire configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout apparatus 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the payout device 580 with the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the upper full tank path unit is operated from the ball discharge path 580b in which the ball release lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which the game balls B can flow and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. A flat guiding path front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 movable by a game ball B flowing in the guiding path 570 a, and a game ball B in the guiding path 570 a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the ball (see FIG. 91).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a quadrangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends rightward to guide the vehicle. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning over the width in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front, rear, right and left directions and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on a portion projecting into the guide passage 570a, whereby the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Becomes

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  In a state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is connected to the discharging passage of the discharging device 580. 580a communicates with the upstream end. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, it detects the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 89A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the rear of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back portion 551e.

  The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a that is a box-like shape opened backward and through which game balls B can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a. A flat-plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotation axis protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585, and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; A second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. It has a dispensing gear member 588 rotatably mounted, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 is attached to the portion that branches off from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball removal passage 580b can be opened and closed, and can be held at the position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent rightward in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Is formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear surface of the dispensing blade 589 in a rear view.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end of the payout passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and extends vertically to the bottom in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched and on which the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached. A main-body-side guide wall 581a that projects rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b when viewed from the rear. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward in rear view at a height of about 1/3 from above in rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally to the upper left in rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in the rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed by a circular arc having a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate clockwise in rear view. This allows the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b to move to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left side of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably mounted on an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it can protrude into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreat outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side in rear view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. The ball pull lever 593 partially projects through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can contact the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 89).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a bead on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592, becomes a ball removal movable piece 592. And flows down to the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589, so that the game ball B is moved from the payout passage 580a side. Will also flow down quickly.

  As described above, in a state where the movable ball removal piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, and thus the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously on the lower end of the dispensing device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball can be removed by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, so that more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  When the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 moves between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving outward through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball-movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable pulling piece 592 is based on the inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removing piece 592, and the movable ball removing piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and the main body side guide can be used. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full spherical path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view is vertically extended.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 with a rear open side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front side. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a height of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends rightward in a front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left and right sides of the upper ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and near the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 91).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal discharge passage 600c, an upper full discharge passage 600d, and an upper ball discharge passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side when viewed from the front. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thus, the game balls B released (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge path 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 mounted on the upper side of the lower full base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a mounted on the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharging passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c are arranged in order from the front left, on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b have respective front end openings (downstream end). Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operation projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout path 610a, the lower full fill payout path 610b, and the lower ball emptying path 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper full tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B released downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. The downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is open to face the ball guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 that opens to the left.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 that is open upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball being cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay at the upstream side of the payout blades 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored in at least the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout motor 584 causes the payout blade 589 to rotate clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portion 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 normally passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. The game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and pass through the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, it becomes impossible to discharge the game balls B forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B start flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and fills the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game balls B received by the full tank receiving port 150b are discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thus, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  When the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified by voice (e.g., “Please remove the ball!”) To the player that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is set in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Stop temporarily until

  When discharging the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide to the state of the rising end position. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game balls B are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the falling game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the outside outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower portion of the rear surface of the body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame that covers a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placement portion 501c, and a front side near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. The main body frame speaker 622 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to bulge forward from the rear side on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened forward, and a portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the boss becomes small. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 on the right side from the center in front view, and to arrange the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a includes the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, and forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In the enclosure 624, since the space front concave portion 621b bulging forward is formed on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes rightward. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space to the right of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 between the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. And the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, the enclosure 624 of a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to a relatively large depth to the right in front view, and the connection unit 621c and Since the outer frame lower assembly 40 is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is not attenuated particularly in the bass range, and the lower frame assembly 40 is not attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range is resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter, a loud sound with heavy bass can be output.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are obtained. This allows the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between a lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and a speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a which extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates forward and backward is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball guide unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that receives the game ball B discharged upward from the game board 5 and opened upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide unit 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guide unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at an upper portion of a left side in a front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharged ball receiving portion 628. In the state in which the ball-pulling guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream-end opening of the lower ball-pulling passage 610 c of the lower full-ball path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The ejection ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by a ball pull-out guiding unit 627 or a discharged ball receiving unit 628, and Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wider space on the left side than the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (FIG. 96). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. This is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed such that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against illegal acts.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to the rearmost surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost part of the main frame speaker 622, and most protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) in front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto. The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to a vertically extending rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a manner that the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from the front is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, and the door frame depends on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the lock unit 650 urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501 f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by being engaged with the transmission member 133 and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outside members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, a plurality of locking units 650 are transmitted through the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4, when the unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame is slid downward, the plurality of hooks 653 for the outer frame move downward, and the outer frame 2 is moved relative to the main frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed Configuration of Upper Body Frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front of (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body mounted along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the body frame base 501 in front view. A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending upward and downward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail 553 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to an upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a tank rail. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the rear side of the payout base 551 downstream of the tank rail 553, and for paying out game balls B to the player side; , Is provided.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a square shape in a plan view extending in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape having an open upper side. Have been. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above on the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about ／ of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right wall 552e). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and a downstream side extending to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which the width direction orthogonal to the flowing direction of the game balls B is formed so that only one game ball B can flow. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the left in the left-right direction after extending from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis extending leftward and rightward from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . The tank rail 553 has a portion extending in the main guide portion 553a parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be circulated (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the main rail 553 is arranged such that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrowing in width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. I have. By the bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have been spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. The bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side to the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b slightly extends at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that comes into contact. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball dust in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a shape extending constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the inside game ball B is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball dust) is liable to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside circulates. By dispersing the direction in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball damage) can be suppressed.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball ball) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, it is possible to confirm the status of the transmission motors, the gears, the belts, and other transmission mechanisms with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface 501m and the rear end of the overflow tank 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B, 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and an upper surface of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface overflows. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from an upper side of a rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. In this overflow surface portion 501m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflowing surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and extends substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m. The upper end is higher than the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o at the left and right outer sides of the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o, respectively, and extends in the front and rear direction like a strip, and the game ball B is left and right in the left and right directions. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at a smaller interval than the diameter. The left step part 501n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left-stage portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner at the rear end becomes slightly lower in a front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. The right step part 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Is formed at a height that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  The main body frame base 501 is assembled with the main body frame 4 and, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface 501m. The left end of the right side of the bypass passage 552g coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left and right direction.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and has a front end that is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lower. And a weir extending upward from an end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g has a rear end on the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the left end side thereof. From the right to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled with the main body frame 4 such that the rear end thereof extends along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction and extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Extending. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction in which the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. From the game ball B. Further, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game balls B, the tank rails formed by the game balls B from the bypass path 552g. Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

  Since the detour passage 552g extends obliquely in the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the game ball B can be released to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower, due to the rear end that extends diagonally. By discharging the gas to a wide area, the occurrence of ball dust in the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view on the tank rail 553. A game ball B that flows under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from within the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is equal to the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height). Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the bypass passage 552g. The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape that extends rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in a front view from a position about 1/3 of a total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from a left end of the front wall 552b, and a right end side in a left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b at about 1/9 of the total length to a position near about 1/2 of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and extending parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, The rear wall 552c is formed to have a constant width in the front-rear direction and to extend from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about one-third of the length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction in parallel with the rear wall 552c.

  The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. Has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction outward and the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. The spherical tank 552 is configured such that the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the height of the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are equal to the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the body frame base 501). (The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. The obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in plan view and the portion extending straight leftward in the left-right direction are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j, when assembled to the main body frame 4, is stepped downward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). Nearby position) and then extend rearward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can open a grip portion by operating a lever to grip the end of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in a state where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left stage portion 501n, the right stage portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the outline arrows in FIG. The left stage 501n is inclined such that the right end of the rear end is lower, and the right stage 501o is inclined such that the left end of the rear end is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end sides thereof are lower in a front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island facility, first, the game balls B exceed the lowest overflow portion 552f of the outer peripheral upper end edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be caused to flow out of the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, the further increase of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In addition, the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball dust) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented.

  Further, since the detour path 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour path 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the backward pressing force from acting on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 strongly by the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled to the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass path 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 to prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is formed. The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thus, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface 501m and flowing from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g is moved to the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). , The game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. Thus, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a certain direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a certain direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B are different from each other, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing and biting each other, and to prevent the game balls B from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, and are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is provided. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end to the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is reduced. Since the game balls B are changed so as to coincide with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned in the width direction as the plurality of game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side). A plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are passed downstream through a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction and forming one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since it has the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j therebetween). Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be farther from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility jumps or is supplied vigorously at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility is used for the ball 552. Even if the game ball B jumps on the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B are clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facilities bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and rides on the left and right steps 501n and 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game balls B spill out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  When the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the game balls B pass below the guide surface 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j), that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass path 552g can be reliably received.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 in which the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, it is not affected. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment such as a tank rail]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine provided with a tank rail and the like according to another embodiment in an enlarged manner, showing a portion of the tank rail when viewed from behind. FIG. 107 (a) is a plan view showing a state where the tank rails and the like of FIG. 106 are assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rails and the like of (a) viewed from the front, and (c). 3 is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like cut along the car line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of a game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107. In the tank rail 553A and the like according to another embodiment, in addition to the tank rail 553A, the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A are the tank rail 553 of the above embodiment, The one rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different from each other.

  The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment is for rectifying the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivering the rectified game balls B to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward. The tank rail 553A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A in a front view, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. The ball rectifying member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stopper 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction downstream of the bulging portion 553b. By the meandering portion 553c, the distribution speed of the game balls B can be suppressed. The first rail cover 554A is mounted on the upstream side (on the side of the ball tank 552) of the meandering portion 553c.

  The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction on the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A so as to cover from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes an upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protection walls 555b extending upward from both front and rear ends of the cover portion 555a on the upstream side from the left-right center. An opening 555c penetrating the cover 555a between the pair of protection walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b is formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion where the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a ball rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

  The ball rectifying member 556A is attached to the upstream end side so as to extend back and forth and to be rotatable around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protection walls 555b, and penetrates through the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and projects into the tank rail 553A. Rectifying piece 556a having a flat plate shape. The ball rectifying member 556A comes into contact with the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby facilitating the steps of the game balls B to be easily aligned in a line, and Of the game ball B is prevented from moving quickly to the downstream side to prevent the ball from being bitten on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

  According to the tank rail 553A and the like of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protection walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protection wall 555b. ing. Thereby, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, The contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above can be prevented. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A May not be able to rotate upward, and may not be able to sufficiently exert the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of protection walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted, so that the ball bites or balls in the tank rail 553A. The occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

  Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the distribution speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages, when the upper game ball B moves to the downstream side first, the ball bite easily occurs. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the distribution speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, so that the upper game balls B move to the downstream side first. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball bite.

  Further, as described above, the protection wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire from abutting on the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the ball from being clogged. To arrange near a terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) and a control board to which electric wires are connected, and to arrange a terminal board and a control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arrangement of the tank rail 553A (the ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, a substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 111 (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 112 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the cut line in FIG. 111 (a), FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the cut line in FIG. 111 (a), and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed line in FIG. FIG. 116 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in a pachinko machine including the board unit of FIG. 111 (a).

  The board unit 620A of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base unit 500 instead of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is greatly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the above-described substrate unit 620 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame that covers a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The base unit 660 is attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and the power unit 620c is attached to the rear surface of the front base 661. A rear base 662, an out-ball path 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, and a game flowing through the out-ball path 663 An out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one, a ball-pulling guide unit 627 that receives the game balls B released from the lower ball-pulling passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610, and guides the game balls B rightward in front view; The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide section 627 flows, and the ball removal provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662. And exits passage 665, and a passage wall member 666 is attached to the rear base 662 so as to close the rear side of the ball 抜排 out passage 665, a.

  The front base 661 is formed in a left and right long box shape opened forward. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out-ball passage 663 and a ball guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. In addition, a ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape opened rearward on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a.

  In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Accordingly, the ball extraction guide 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection passage 665 are also formed transparently. Therefore, the inside of the ball guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge passage 665 can be visually recognized from the upper side and the lower side of the base unit 660, and it is easy to check for clogged balls. I have.

  The out ball passage 663 is formed at the front side of a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, with the front open, and is open. The front end is closed by a front base 661.

  The out ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is opened upward at a substantially center position in the left and right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left and right, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. An out ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while largely meandering in the left-right direction, a lower guiding portion 663c that guides the game balls B rectified in a row by the out ball rectifying portion 663b downward, and a lower end of the lower guiding portion 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d that opens downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 116).

  The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 has a depth in the front-rear direction approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side becomes lower.

  The out ball rectifying portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle such that the left end side is lower from the position on the right side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. In addition, the depth of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the front-rear direction decreases toward the downstream side (leftward), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. It is depth. In addition, the portion of the out ball rectifying portion 663b on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height toward the downstream side (leftward). The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, in the out ball rectification unit 663b, the game balls B can be aligned in a line.

  The lower guiding portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out ball rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the vertical direction. So that it is curved rearwardly in a small crank shape. As a result, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guide portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the lower guiding portion 663c. Since the lower guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that a portion bent in a crank shape does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the lower guiding portion 663c is bent in a crank shape through the out sensor 664. Even if the game ball B abuts on the part where it is present, the ball does not jump upward to the out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent the out sensor 664 from detecting one game ball B twice.

  The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and a long life because the game ball B frequently passes.

  The ball extraction guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball-pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward at an upper portion of a left side surface when viewed from the front, and a downstream-side bent rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , Is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 115 (a) and the like).

  The ball ejection passage 665 is formed on the rear base 662 on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 so as to be opened rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, a gap equal to or more than one game ball B is formed between the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

  The upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball guide portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is higher than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A horizontal guiding portion 665a extending rightward, a vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guiding portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guiding portion 665b. ), And a ball ejection port 665c that opens downward. The ball ejection port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 116).

  In addition, the ball discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d, which alternately project inward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. The ball ejection path 665 allows the game balls B flowing in the vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward to alternately contact the plurality of protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game balls B to flow down in a zigzag manner. An increase in the speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

  Since the ball ejection passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, the ball ejection lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

  According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and the out sensor 664 is provided. And discharge it to the island facilities side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball release lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to move the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball-pull guide unit 627 and the ball-pull discharge passage 665 which are separate and independent from the game hall. As a result, only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 determine an accurate game ball B. The pachinko machine 1 can calculate the payout rate (payout rate).

  The number of game balls B counted by the out sensor 664 (the number of out balls) is entered into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning prize. The number of gaming balls B received from the gaming board 5 and discharged from the gaming board 5 after being received in the winning opening such as the mouth 2005, the role winning opening 2006, etc., and without being received in any winning opening after being driven into the game area 5a. The sum of the number of game balls B received by the out mouth 1008 and discharged from the game board 5 and the number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). is there.

  Note that the payout rate (payout rate) changes according to the game state, and is set as a payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) It is calculated as "number / number of out-balls in predetermined period = payout rate in predetermined period".

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out-ball path 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow, and the out-ball path. A game ball B flowing through the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. There is no need to provide an out-ball detecting unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce costs.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. Is formed, the out ball path 663 and the ball discharge path 665 move away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like, and the out ball path 663 and the ball discharge path 665 are connected to many game balls B. Of the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like due to electric noise due to static electricity or induced current generated by the circulation of the game ball B, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game balls B. It can be.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the game ball B, whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifying portion 663b of the out ball passage 663, is detected by the out sensor 664. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out sensor 664 is worn out and damaged at an early stage.

  Further, when the payout rate (ball-out rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out-balls per predetermined time is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the payout rate, The player wants to pay out many game balls B, so that if the displayed payout rate is large, it is immediately recognized that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility of paying out many game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act of paying out a lot of game balls B is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent activities can easily hesitate to perform fraudulent activities, because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily recognize fraudulent activities. It can be.

  Also, if the payout ratio calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position that is invisible to the player, the same reason as described above can be seen by the staff at the game hall, etc. Can detect wrongdoing. When the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained or the like, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, the connector, the wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and it is possible to reduce a burden on the game hall side.

  Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 circulate, a configuration for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit), so that the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the game balls B to be discharged. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining a player by providing the effect device in the secured space.

  In addition, since the ball ejection passage 665 has the vertical guiding portions 665b in which the plurality of protrusions 665d alternately protrude, the game balls B flow through the vertical guiding portions 665b, so that the game balls B are distributed. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the flowing game balls B, damage to the island facility side of the game hall receiving the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

  In addition, a meandering out ball straightening portion 663b is provided in the out ball passage 663, and a vertical guiding portion 665b is provided in the ball ejection passage 665, from which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude. Of the game ball B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 can be reduced, so that it is provided nearby. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game balls B can be provided.

  Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball discharge port 665c of the out ball path 663 and the ball discharge path 665 are opened downward, respectively, the out ball path 663 and the ball discharge path are provided. Since the game balls B are discharged downward from the 665, the game balls B are less likely to collide with other pachinko machines, walls and the like provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines are provided. It is possible to prevent the machine and the wall from being damaged. Further, since the game balls B are discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game balls B are hardly scattered, and the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 on the island facility side. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

  Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with a game. Since it is possible to deliver the game ball B hit into the area 5a to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 only by discharging the ball downward, the configuration relating to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is described. A simple (simple) configuration can be adopted, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge path 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball path 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge path 665 and the out ball path 663 are not provided. Since the discharged game balls B can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game balls B vigorously flowing through the ball-discharged discharge passage 665 and the out-ball passage 663 collide with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is hardly damaged.

  Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge path 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball path 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island facility side ( It is not necessary to advance the pachinko machine 1 to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, so that the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and the labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball discharge in substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example in which a guide piece is provided at an out-ball outlet of an out-ball passage. FIG. 118 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 118 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in FIG.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at a position of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is provided a merging portion 663e merging with the ball discharge passage 665. The junction 663e is open downward, and the open end thereof is an out ball discharge port 663d (ball discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 projects short backward from the front wall of the out ball discharge port 663d.

  According to the embodiment of FIG. 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward. . Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the portion (out receiving portion, bucket, Etc.), the game balls B can be easily released, and the island facilities can reliably collect the game balls B.

  In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, since the release direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is connected to the main body frame 4. Even when the game ball 5 is provided at a position immediately below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position near the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged at a position as forward as possible, so that the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be increased. Since the out-ball path 663 moves away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like, the out-ball path 663 is caused by electric noise due to static electricity, induced current, and the like generated when many game balls B flow through the out-ball path 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game balls B can be provided.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, an out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663 from below. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the lower guiding portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opened downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f And a sensor cover 668 for restricting the downward movement of the 664.

  The sensor mounting concave portion 663f is formed at a lower end portion of the lower guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in the present embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be viewed from above or below the base unit 660.

  The sensor cover 668 extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and has a base end 668a rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 at the base end thereof, and detection of an out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body 668a. A through-hole 668b through which the game ball B passes so as to be able to pass through at a position coinciding with the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw 668c provided on the side opposite to the base end side of the main body 668a. Have.

  The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the base end side of the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outer side opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. The locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the side of the out ball rectifying portion 663b.

  The sensor cover 668 is configured such that the locking claw 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f such that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 matches the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing it, the main body 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 118 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is It is discharged downward through. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

  When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw 668c to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating the sensor cover 668 about the base end side of the main body 668a and opening the sensor cover 668 so that the locking claw 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 is moved to the lower surface of the out sensor 664. Away, the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 118 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the present embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact feared object indicated by a two-dot chain line (for example, the outer frame 2). , The upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. Thus, even when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the contact danger, thereby preventing the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. be able to.

  According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so that many game balls B are distributed. As a result, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668 as described above, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, even when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 may come into contact with a contact danger such as the outer frame 2. However, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. More specifically, although the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, so that many game balls B There is a possibility that the locking claws 668c of the sensor cover 668 may be disengaged due to the vibration caused by the vibration and the sensor cover 668 may be opened. If the sensor cover 668 is opened during the game and the out sensor 664 falls down, the game sensor B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. By notifying the occurrence of the abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality. The lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the contact feared object and the like, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact feared object, and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, according to the embodiment in FIG. 118, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 at a portion of the sensor mounting concave portion 663f outside the outer ball rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be viewed well from below. Therefore, when the game ball B is clogged in the out ball path 663, the inside of the out ball path 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is clogged can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B at an early stage.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and turned upside down, and the replacement of the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660 can be performed. It is possible to easily perform operations such as checking the inside or the inside of the ball discharge passage 665.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted early. In addition, it is possible to alleviate the irritation of the player due to the interruption of the game and to suppress a decrease in interest, and also to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. it can.

  Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even when the sensor cover 668 is opened when exchanging the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 is not moved from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is suspended and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

  Further, in the sensor cover 668 holding the out sensor 664 from below, an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660 through which many game balls B flow, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). Since the game ball B is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660, the distribution of downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is determined on the side (one side) rotatably mounted on the base unit 660. Of the locking unit 663g of the base unit 660 (the other end side). Accordingly, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 by passing a large number of game balls B through the out sensor 664, the rotatable one end side of the sensor cover 668 has the same force. Since a large amount can be received, it is difficult to release the locking at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 falls off. .

[4-14. Third Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Next, a substrate unit 700 according to a third embodiment different from the above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 128 and the like. FIG. 119A is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment viewed from the front right, omitting a power supply unit, a payout control unit, and an interface unit. FIG. 119B is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 120A is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120B is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119A viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 121 (a) is a plan view of the board unit of FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the cocoon line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate unit in (a). FIG. 122 is a cross-sectional view taken along a section line in FIG. 121 (a).

  FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as exploded from the front, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as exploded from the rear. FIG. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the back. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the board unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram illustrating dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 119.

  The board unit 700 of the third embodiment is different from the board unit 620 and the board unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. The same components as those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted. 119 to 128, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are omitted.

  The board unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower rear part of the main frame base unit 500 instead of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The board unit 700 is provided behind the first ball path 701 and a first ball path 701 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can flow, and is discharged downward from the game board 5. Path 702 through which the game ball b can flow, a first ball sensor 703 for detecting the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701, and a game ball flowing through the second ball path 702. The second ball sensor 704 for detecting b and a ball passage 705 through which the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an opening opening upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 respectively detect the game balls B one by one. Discharge downward.

  In the present embodiment, in the game board 5, the game balls B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 flow through the first ball path 701, and the game board 5 receives a general prize. The game balls b received in the opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, and the bonus winning opening 2006 are configured to flow through the second ball path 702. In other words, the out sphere is configured to circulate through the first sphere path 701, and the safe sphere is configured to circulate through the second sphere path 702, and the number of all out spheres can be counted by the first sphere sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, fraudulent acts are performed on a prize port (prize port sensor) such as the general prize port 2001, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the big prize port 2005, and the special prize port 2006 of the game board 5. If performed, the number of safe balls on the gaming board 5 side will be different from the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, and it is possible to detect an illegal act on the winning opening.

  More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from behind, and a base unit 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. And a rear base 712 having a power passage unit 620c attached to the rear surface and having a ball passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. And a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate clogging of the game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent an intrusion of an illegal tool. A security cover 714 that can be opened and closed on the rear, and a rear end side of the ball passage 705 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 are closed. It includes a passage wall member 715, a frame relay substrate 716 is attached to the side of the rear base 712, a. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the spherical path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparent.

  The front base 711 is formed in a left and right long box shape opened rearward and upward. In the front base 711, a spherical path member 713 is accommodated from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving port 711a that opens long in the left and right direction on the upper peripheral wall, and a elimination port 711b that opens at a position closer to the right from the left and right center of the lower peripheral wall. ing. The front base 711 has the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 facing upward from the ball receiving port 711a with the ball path member 713 accommodated therein. Further, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 at the front end side of the solution opening 711b so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction.

  The rear base 712 is formed in a left and right long box shape opened rearward. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second spherical path 702 of the spherical path member 713 by the front wall. The rear base 712 receives a ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides the game ball B rightward in front view, and then guides the ball discharge passage 705 downward to discharge the ball B. Have. The ball passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712, and is entirely opened rearward. The rear end side of the ball passage 705 is closed by a passage wall member 715. A portion located above the speaker box 623 in the ball passage 705 of the rear base 712 (a portion on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. The rear side is closed by a passage wall member 715.

  Further, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides the game ball B backward, and then discharges the ball downward, and the second discharge guide section 712 of the ball path member 713. A second discharge guide section 712b that receives the game ball B flowing through the ball path 702, guides the game ball B backward, and then discharges the game ball B downward. The entrance sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b project forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the entrance of the first discharge guide section 712a opens forward. The entrance of the second discharge guiding portion 712b opens upward. The exits of the first discharge guide 712a and the second discharge guide 712b are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b are open rearward from the front wall, and closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715.

  In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball passage 705, the first discharge guiding portion 712a, and the second discharge guiding portion 712b are located to the left of the front opening 711b of the front base 711 in front view. From right to left. The exit of the ball passage 705 has a front end side that widens largely forward and a rear end side that widens slightly rearward with respect to the outlets of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b (FIG. 120 (b)). )). That is, the outlet of the ball ejection passage 705 is formed to be wider (wider) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide 712a and the second discharge guide 712b.

  The spherical path member 713 is inserted into the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear and accommodated therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The spherical path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a vertically extending downward from an upper end at a right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined so as to become lower rightward from a lower end of the left wall portion 713a. A step wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and an upper right shelf portion 713d inclined downward to the right from the lower end of the step wall portion 713c. A rectifying wall portion 713e extending obliquely to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a rightward sloping upper right shelf from a position separated rightward from a lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e. A lower shelf 713f extending rightward from the portion 713d; a right wall 713g extending vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall 713a; Upper right shelf 71 from the upper end of wall 713g d has an upper wall portion 713h extending leftward to the same position as the right end, and a U-shaped groove wall portion 713i connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opened upward. I have. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the upper right shelf 713d.

  Further, the spherical path member 713 extends vertically upward from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e to the left, and from the left end of the lower wall portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf 713b. The middle wall portion 713k protruding, the eaves portion 713l extending so as to become lower toward the left from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k, and vertically short and vertically from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f. It has a hanging wall portion 713m that extends and a lower wall portion lower 713n that extends leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the lower wall upper portion 713j. A portion located below the lower wall portion 713n between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is notched vertically so that the game ball B can pass through.

  Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h, and a plurality of obstacles provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The spherical path member 713 includes a left wall 713a, an upper left shelf 713b, a step wall 713c, an upper right shelf 713d, a rectifying wall 713e, a lower shelf 713f, a right wall 713g, a groove wall 713i, It has a plate-shaped partition wall portion 713p that partitions the space enclosed by the lower wall portion upper portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower portion 713n into front and rear.

  Further, the plurality of spherical path members 713 are notched in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end toward the partition wall 713p. Has a notch 713q. Each notch 713q is provided such that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, the gap being smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B, The dust and the like in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

  Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide protrusions 713r extending left and right. ing.

  Further, the spherical path member 713 is surrounded by a lower wall upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall lower portion 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and a sensor housing in which the first ball sensor 703 is housed. The front 713s and the rear side of the partition wall 713p are surrounded by the lower wall upper portion 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall lower portion 713n, and after the sensor housing portion in which the second ball sensor 704 is housed. 713t.

  At the front of the sensor housing 713s and the rear of the sensor housing 713t, the detection holes of the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are located below the portion between the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f. In other words, the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are accommodated with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 extend from the front 713s of the sensor housing and the rear 713t of the sensor housing to the left from the middle wall 713k. .

  Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion of the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n, which is located forward of the partition wall portion 713p, and projects the first ball guiding portion 713u that projects downward and is opened rearward. Have. When assembled to the substrate unit 700, the first sphere guiding portion 713u has the right half on the rear end side closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half has the entrance side of the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. Is facing. The first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to the right in front of the partition wall portion 713p, and then guides the game ball B backward. It can be delivered to the first discharge guiding section 712a of the rear base 712.

  On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, a portion opened below the lower wall portion 713n (a portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing portion rear 713t). Below (), an inlet opening upwardly of the second discharge guiding portion 712 b of the rear base 712 is located. Thereby, the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can be transferred to the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 behind the partition wall portion 713p.

  The right end of the upper left shelf 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the solution opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf 713d is located closer to the right than the right end of the solution opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf 713f is located to the left of the left end of the solution opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, a portion immediately above the solution opening 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the flow regulating wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side is vertically directed downward. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so that the left end side becomes narrower toward the left so that one game ball B can pass. . A plurality of game balls B can be rectified in a line and guided downward by the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f.

  As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension decreases toward the left (downstream direction in which the game balls B circulate). Depending on the distribution amount of the balls B, a plurality of game balls B may bite between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, which may cause ball clogging (see FIG. 126). Since the rectifying wall 713e is located above the rectifying port 711b, when a ball is clogged between the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the rectifying port 711b. In a state where the game ball B is opened, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearance opening 711b and the cutout portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below, and the game ball B caught by the tool is inserted. By hitting the ball, clogging of the ball can be eliminated.

  By the way, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a cutout portion 713q for eliminating clogging of balls and dropping dust and dust downward, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is provided. Through the notch 713q and above the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and further inserts the tip of the unauthorized tool into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701). There is a possibility that an illegal act may be performed on the game board 5 provided by extending upward from the ball path 702). The insertion of such an unauthorized tool is not limited to the lower shelf 713f, and there is a similar fear in the upper left shelf 713b and the upper right shelf 713d provided with the cutout 713q.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat obstructing ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h. Is provided, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h, the tip abuts on the inhibition rib 713o and Movement can be prevented, and further insertion of a malicious tool can be prevented (see FIG. 127). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent execution of an illegal act on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be provided.

  Note that, at the right side of the middle wall portion 713k of the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, the lower and left and right sides thereof have the rectifying wall 713e without the cutout 713q and the lower wall. Since it is closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an illegal tool is not inserted from below through the notch 713q of the corresponding part of the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b. No fraudulent acts are performed through the notch 713q.

  As described above, the spherical path member 713 is provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f, so that dust and dust are reduced through the cutouts 713q. (See FIG. 128). Dust and the like discharged downward through the cutout portion 713q located above the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion in the upper left shelf 713b are rectified wall portion 713e, lower wall upper portion 713j, and middle. It is accommodated in the space surrounded by the wall 713k. Thus, dust and the like do not adhere to the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t.

  Further, a wiring cable is connected to a left end side of the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t by a connector. It protrudes leftward from the front 713s of the sensor housing and the rear 713t of the sensor housing. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 protrude leftward from the middle wall portion 713k. In the middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends leftward from a portion above the sensor housing portion front 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper left shelf 713b. And dust falling downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves 713l, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 projecting leftward from the middle wall 713k. It is possible to prevent the wiring cable and the connector from dropping, and it is possible to avoid a problem caused by dust or the like.

  The base unit 710 includes a left wall part 713a, an upper left shelf part 713b, a step wall part 713c, an upper right shelf part 713d, a rectifying wall part 713e, a lower shelf part 713f on the front side of the partition wall part 713p in the spherical path member 713. The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form a first ball path 701, and a partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. The rear left wall 713a, upper left shelf 713b, step wall 713c, upper right shelf 713d, rectifying wall 713e, lower shelf 713f, right wall 713g, groove wall 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guiding portion 712b.

  The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the vicinity of the front end of the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 with the front end side rotatable around the left-right axis. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a which is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 122, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is horizontal, and the locking of the elastic locking portion 714a is performed. Is released and the rear end is rotated downward so that the rear end side is located downward, the release port 711b is opened. That is, the security cover 714 allows the solution opening 711b to be opened and closed.

  When the security cover 714 is closed, the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 can be closed, so that a linear unauthorized tool can be inserted from the elimination port 711b into the ball path member 713 (the first sphere path 701 or the first sphere path). Insertion into the two-ball path 702) can be prevented. The security cover 714 is opened when the ball is clogged between the straightening wall portion 713e of the ball path member 713 and the lower shelf portion 713f, thereby opening the solution opening 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a ball-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearance opening 711b and the cutout portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to eliminate clogging of the game ball B. Can be. The operation of eliminating the ball clogging is performed with the main body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In a state where the security opening 711b is opened (vertical state), the security cover 714 has a lower end (an end on the side of the elastic locking portion 714a) that is in contact with a fear of contact (here, the rear of the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is positioned lower than the height of the connecting tube 43a of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 122). Therefore, in order to eliminate clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the main frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 opened. Is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 abuts against the contact feared object (the connection cylinder 43 a of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. Thus, forgetting to close the security cover 714 can be avoided, and the security cover 714 can be securely closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exhibited.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the security cover 714 is opened for some reason while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, even if the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. Although the contact feared object comes into contact with the opened security cover 714 from the front, since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably mounted around the left-right axis, the contact feared matter is seen from the front. When the contact is made, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction, so that the security cover 714 can open the main body frame 4 without being caught by the contact danger object, and the security cover 714 and the contact danger object can be prevented from being damaged. .

  Since the security cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely causes clogging of the game ball B between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f and is basically in a closed state, the security cover 714 is opened. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to be difficult.

  The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball passage 705 that is opened rearward. In addition, the passage wall member 715 closes a portion of the rear base 712 that is open rearward on the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game balls B that have flowed through the second discharge guiding section 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

  The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 relays the connection between the handle control sensor 192, the single-button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. .

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment is configured such that the upper left shelf 713b and a part of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711. All game balls B facing upward and released downward from the game board 5 can be received. The game ball b that has dropped onto the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a rolls rightward and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the lower shelf 713f rolls to the left on the lower shelf 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are vertically stacked on the lower shelf 713f, they are broken by the upper rectifying wall portion 713e so as to be aligned in a row toward the left.

  The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the lower shelf 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf 713f, and is located in front of the partition wall 713p and is housed in the sensor housing front 713s. After being detected by the one-ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guiding portion 713u, it is discharged downward through the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case of being behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing rear portion 713t, the air is discharged downward through the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. Is done.

  As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B circulate through the paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. The front side is defined as a first spherical path 701, and the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p is defined as a second spherical path 702. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 forward from the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is discharged by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has dropped from the game board 5 behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, and is discharged downward after being detected by the second ball sensor 704. be able to.

  Further, the base unit 710 transfers the game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610 to remove the game balls B in the ball tank 552 or the like to the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. Can be drained downward through. The game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guiding section 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guiding section 712b (second ball path 702), and the ball removal path 705 of the base unit 710 are provided as island facilities. Is transferred to a part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B on the side.

  According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q, dust can pass through the cutouts 713q. And dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, so that it is possible to prevent dust and the like from obstructing the distribution of the game balls B, and to suppress occurrence of ball clogging and the like. Can be done.

  Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparent, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board is opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, the presence or absence of ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702) from above the base unit 710 (substrate unit 700). Can be easily confirmed. In addition, since the notch 713q is provided in the lower shelf 713f at a portion where the game balls B are aligned in a line by the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f in the ball path member 713, the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf are provided. When the ball clogging occurs with the portion 713f, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and the security cover 714 is opened, so that a rod-shaped tool is inserted from below through the elimination opening 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the clogging of the ball can be eliminated by the tool.

  Further, the lower shelf portion 713f is provided below the straightening wall portion 713e at a position below the straightening wall portion 713e, and is provided with a security cover 714 that closes the solving opening 711b. In addition to being able to eliminate clogging as described above, in a normal state, by closing the solution opening 711b with the security cover 714, a linear unauthorized tool can be removed from the solution opening 711b by the first ball path 701 or the like. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraud.

  In addition, since the security cover 714 for opening and closing the elimination opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating around the axis in the left-right direction at the front end side, the main body frame 4 is opened in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. When the security cover 714 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 comes into contact with the contact danger (the connection cylinder 43 a of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. The security cover 714 can be securely closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exhibited.

  Further, a plurality of plate-shaped inhibition ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h, the tip can be prevented from moving by contacting the inhibition rib 713o, Further insertion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent execution of an illegal act on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be provided.

  Further, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Because a complicated distribution route is constructed, even if a linear unauthorized tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a or the second discharge guide portion 712b, entry is prevented by a complicated route. This makes it possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the gaming board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

  Further, since all the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected. (For example, an out-ball detecting unit) for detecting the game ball 5 can be reduced, and the cost required for the game board 5 can be reduced. It is possible to secure a space corresponding to the configuration, and by providing the staging device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining a player.

  In addition, since the outgoing ball passes through the first ball route 701 and the safe ball passes through the second ball route 702, the safe ball count number in the game board 5 and the safe ball by the second ball sensor 704 are used. By comparing with the count number, it is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent activity has been performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against the fraudulent activity.

  Further, when the payout rate (ball-out rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out-balls per predetermined time is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the payout rate, The player wants to pay out many game balls B, so that if the displayed payout rate is large, it is immediately recognized that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility of paying out many game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act of paying out a lot of game balls B is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent activities can easily hesitate to perform fraudulent activities, because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily recognize fraudulent activities. It can be.

  Also, if the payout ratio calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position that is invisible to the player, the same reason as described above can be seen by the staff at the game hall, etc. Can detect wrongdoing. When the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained or the like, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, the connector, the wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and it is possible to reduce a burden on the game hall side.

  Further, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball passage 705 for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, so that the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are provided. In, the game balls B without balls are not counted. Therefore, only the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704.

  In the above-described embodiment, the outgoing ball flows through the first ball route 701 and the safe ball flows through the second ball route 702. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Out of the safe ball may flow through the second ball path 702, or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 regardless of the safe ball and the out ball may pass through the first ball path 701 and the second ball. Any of the ball paths 702 may be distributed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the security opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the security opening 711b is opened and closed by sliding forward and backward or left and right. It is good.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 is divided by the one partition wall portion 713p before and after the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Although the discharge through one of the two ball paths has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The game balls B discharged from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 129 is a front view of the game board in which the center role and the like are made opaque in the pachinko machine. 130 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 129 viewed from the front right, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 129 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the gaming board viewed from the back. . FIG. 133 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center role and the like are transparent. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate 2003 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B. , A second starting port 2004, a big winning port 2005, and an accessory winning port 2006. The game board 5 includes a game ball B in a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and a special winning opening 2006 in the gaming area 5a. This is for performing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to partition the rear end of the game area 5a. It has a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting magnetism acting improperly in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 137 and the like) that are in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 and a game carried out by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169 and the like) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1100. And further provided.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is mounted on the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a gate sensor 2801, a big winning opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2601, V This is for relaying the connection with the winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

  The table unit 2000 includes a plurality (three in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls B driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate 2003 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a further different position in the game area 5a, A second starting port 2004 in which a game ball B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the gate 2003, and a game to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 To the special winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the ball B, and to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A winning prize port 2006 in which the game ball B can be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B, and a game ball received in the special substance prize opening 2006 It has a V winning opening 2007 and a losing opening 2008 for giving an opportunity to accept B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting magnetism acting improperly in the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, right above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first opening port 2002 and a front opening unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and an upper left side unit mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 in a front view 2300 and a second starting port 2004, a special winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021 which are provided to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the gaming area 5 a when viewed from the front, in front view. The first attacker unit 2400 and the front of the inside of the game area 5a above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center won game 2500 provided substantially at the center slightly above closer, and a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the center role 2500 and above the first attacker unit 2400, and includes a second attacker unit 2600 having a role winning port 2006 and a second attacker unit 2600. A middle right side unit 2700 provided above and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022, and a gate provided above the middle right side unit 2700 and having a gate 2003 A member 2800.

  The first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and a large winning port sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball B received in the special winning port 2005. And The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with an accessory winning port sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the accessory winning port 2006. The gate member 2800 is provided with a gate sensor 2801 that detects that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism (not shown) for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600. In addition, the back unit 3000 detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000 and the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 and the general winning opening sensor 3001. The first starting opening sensor 3002 to be performed, the V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 after being received in the bonus winning opening 2006, and the after being received in the bonus winning opening 2006 And a loss sensor 3004 for detecting the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

  The back unit 3000 also includes a V winning opening door 3006 that can be moved forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball received in the role winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 forward and backward. And a V distribution solenoid 3007 for distributing B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a back front effecting unit 3100 provided near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back rear effect provided at an upper portion of the back box 3010 behind the back front effecting unit 3100. It comprises a unit 3200 and a lower back lower production unit 3300 provided below the rear upper production unit in the lower box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. FIG. 139 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the upper right corner of the front component and the game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the soot line in (a), and (c) is ( FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the main member, which is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 which connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes an out opening 1008 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear security projections 172 of the security frame 170 of the door frame 3 project rearward from the security cover 170. It will be in the inserted state. Thereby, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the panel 5 through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 will hinder the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 to form the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. I have.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent so that the gaming panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the front component 1000 is recessed from the front to the rear at a predetermined range along the right rail 1005 from the stop portion 1006 at the upper right corner in front view, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. Specification sticker 1021 to which the specification seal 1020 is attached, an insertion pin 1022 that projects in a cylindrical shape from the rear of the specification seal attachment 1021, and positions the stop 1006, and a center of the insertion pin 1022. And a separation hole 1023 penetrating back and forth.

  The specification seal affixing portion 1021 is formed to have a size slightly larger than the outer shape of the specification seal 1020, and is recessed deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) rearward from the thickness of the specification seal 1020 (FIG. 139). (B)). In the specification seal affixing portion 1021, the horizontally extending portion at the lower end and the linear portion of the portion vertically extending from the right end of the portion are formed on the contact surface for attaching the specification seal 1020. Is set.

  The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the specification seal sticking portion 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000. The stopper 1006 is positioned by inserting the insertion pin 1022.

  The separation hole 1023 penetrates from the front side to the rear side of the front component 1000. The separation hole 1023 is circular and has a constant inner diameter and extends back and forth. In a state where the separation hole 1023 is assembled to the game board 5, the front side is closed by the specification seal 1020 attached to the specification seal attaching portion 1021, and the rear side is closed by the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The inside of the separation hole 1023 is a closed space (closed space). This separation hole 1023 is provided at a position near the edge of the spec seal affixing portion 1021 (spec seal 1020) as illustrated.

  The inner diameter of the separation hole 1023 of this embodiment is in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1023 becomes small, so that it becomes easy to bend, and the spec seal 1020 may not be sufficiently pressed. This is because if the separation hole 1023 is larger than this, bending occurs at the portion of the specification seal 1020 at the separation hole 1023, and the appearance of the specification seal 1020 may be deteriorated.

  According to the front component 1000 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the spec seal 1020 cannot be correctly attached to the spec seal attaching section 1021, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the rear of the front component 1000. By passing the rod-shaped member through the hole 1023 and pressing the spec seal 1020 from the rear to the front with its tip, the vicinity of the edge of the spec seal 1020 can be removed so as to be turned forward. By pulling, the spec seal 1020 can be easily removed from the spec seal attaching portion 1021 and the spec seal 1020 can be re-attached.

  Further, in a state where the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated from each other, a bar-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the front component 1000, and the spec seal 1020 is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof, thereby forming the spec seal 1020. Can be easily removed from the specification seal attaching section 1021, so that the work of replacing the specification seal 1020 with a model change can be facilitated.

  Further, as described above, when the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated from each other, the spec seal 1020 can be easily removed from the spec seal affixing portion 1021 using the separation hole 1023. It is possible to easily separate the components of the pachinko machine from each other, thereby reducing the cost of disposing the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front by attaching the specification seal 1020 to the specification seal attachment portion 1021, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1023 can be suppressed, and the separation hole 1023 is provided to the player. It is possible to make it harder to notice the existence of 1023, and to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent activity using the separation hole 1023.

  Further, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to which the spec seal 1020 is attached. Since it does not penetrate the hole that passes to the rear side unlike the conventional pachinko machine, it is necessary to prevent a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole. It is possible to prevent improper conduct.

  Further, since the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front into the separation hole 1023 through the specification seal 1020, the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) does not remove the illegal tool. Since it is possible to prevent the above insertion (intrusion) from the rear, it is possible to prevent the intrusion of an illegal tool into the gaming board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023, and to prevent the illegal act from being performed. In addition, since the improper tool penetrates the specification seal 1020 to leave a trace on the specification seal 1020, execution of the improper act can be hesitated and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the improper act can be provided. be able to.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is provided in the specification seal sticking portion 1021. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 138 and the like. The gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached to the gaming panel 1100. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 137 and the like).

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when the obstruction nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is depressed upward from the lower end. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left and right direction at an upper edge and a lower edge from a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole and a short elongated hole penetrating front and rear, respectively. A plurality of engaging steps each having a small thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with respect to the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center role 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) is a plurality of games on the left and lower sides from the center. The ball B has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in the present embodiment) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a. A through-hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1122 penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full sphere path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 has an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step and has a plurality of projecting pins inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, respectively, and is disposed outside the holding step. And three engaging claws elastically engaged with the engaging step portions at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 projecting upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. And a pair of engagement pieces respectively engaged with the two engagement steps on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 from the upper front with an engagement piece, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the projecting pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparently together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the possibility of clearly seeing the boundaries of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, and Can be given to the player, and the size of the actual game area 5a does not change, but the player can make the game area 5a appear large (wide).

  In addition, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the like is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). Thus, it is possible to make it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below and the rear side in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 115) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169) for controlling the content of the game and the payout of the game ball B, a setting change board 1311 for setting the game performance (see FIG. 133), A main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200 is provided.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently formed, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized alteration is performed, Or whether an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence of the main control board 1310 against improper actions is increased.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a big winning opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2601, It is connected to the V winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

  The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a for switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and checking the setting value, a setting switching button 1311b for selecting and switching the setting value, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 by a connector (connection between boards) (the harness connects the connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). May be electrically connected to each other). By this connector connection (connection between boards), a signal from the setting key switch 1311a and a signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical dimension of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal dimension of the left and right sides of the main control board 1310 is the same. The center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction. Agree.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at a position that is the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted to be rotated below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, and a setting having a pressing operation portion above the center line of the setting change board 1311 is provided. A setting change permission lamp on which a switching button 1311b is arranged and which can emit a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. Below, a base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side is arranged, and the lower side of the main control board 1310 is closer to the center. , A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is disposed.

  In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion hole formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion hole extends in the vertical direction). , The setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be extracted from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot, other line-ups are arranged opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the members of the pachinko machine (or the members of the island facilities of the game hall) and the setting keys do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

  The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and the signal of the setting key ON is set. The data is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing the second ON operation. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key was turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees in a counterclockwise direction and turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder with the ENTER key turned ON. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions that are completely different from the function of the setting key ON and the function of the determination key ON can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a alone depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the determination key can be performed collectively by only the setting key switch 1311a alone.

  The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are respectively formed through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although it is exposed, the "gap" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, respectively. In order to prevent the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 from being modified by invading wires or the like from the outside, wire intrusion prevention portions are formed on the cover body with respect to these openings. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, since the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

  In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting key switch The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of OFF of 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are routed so as not to be close to each other (to be separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311. Also, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is formed at a distance, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed on the main control board 1310. Is transmitted (that is, the setting key switch 1311a) A wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key ON, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of OFF for the setting key switch 1311a) and the setting switching button 1311b The wiring from the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted is also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). Are formed so as not to be close to each other (to be separated from each other).

  The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case where the setting of the set value is changed will be briefly described, and the case where the current set value is confirmed and displayed will be briefly described. In addition, the setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current set value in addition to changing the set value. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

  When the setting of the set value is changed, the main frame is attached to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. It is necessary to satisfy a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is ON. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 has not been powered on (the pachinko machine 1 has been turned off), The operation of opening the body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch is turned 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Note that the above-mentioned “predetermined set value change permission condition” may further be a condition that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed, so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and The setting change of the set value may be made executable when the “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

  The person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then attaches the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Opening operation is performed, then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Subsequently, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a of FIG. Thereby, the signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current set value (set value 1 to set value 6 when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the unlit state to the lit state.

  When the person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting change button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 changes the detection signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is input to Each time a person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a executes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the set value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, the control returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, increases again by one value, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

  In order to determine the set value, the person who changes the set value rotates the set key cylinder 120 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (that is, turns the set key switch 1311a to the set key with the set key ON). A 60-degree counterclockwise rotation operation is performed to return the cylinder from the rotational position to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then to the OFF position. The setting key switch 1311a is set to the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation (by rotating the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a.

  The setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned from the turning position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder 1311a). When the switch 1311a is turned back to the setting key cylinder rotation position), the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value is determined only by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder as it is. And workability is improved.

  The person who changes the setting of the set value returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. The signal of the setting key OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed, and a state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned on from off.

  The person who changes the setting of the setting value extracts the setting key from the insertion hole of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, performs the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and performs the operation of changing the setting of the setting value. Complete.

  When the confirmation display of the currently set values is performed, the outer frame 2 is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation must be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred), The operation of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the first operation is performed by rotating 60 degrees clockwise. Is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

  The person who confirms and displays the currently set values first checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power has been restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure), and then checks the outer frame 2. To open the main body frame 4, and then insert the setting key into the insertion slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a and rotate it clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. This turns on the setting key switch 1311a. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current set value (set value 1 to set value 6 when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. (Set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who performs a confirmation display of the currently set value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the pressing operation is not performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

  After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the currently set value completes the confirmation of the currently set value, and turns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the original position). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by performing a 60-degree counterclockwise rotation operation so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the OFF position. The signal of the setting key OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed.

  A person who confirms and displays the currently set value, removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, performs the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and performs the current setting. Complete the work of confirming the displayed set value.

  The predetermined set value change permission condition is, as described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is determined when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. While the setting key must be turned on by being turned 60 degrees and being turned on by the first ON operation, the predetermined set value display permission condition is, as described above, the pachinko machine When the power is turned on and the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs momentarily), the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Key cylinder Set jack key is inserted, it is necessary to set the key cylinder is set key ON operation by the first ON operation is 60 degrees rotation operation toward the clockwise direction. As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. There is a common requirement that the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires “at the time of power recovery”, whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires “after power recovery”.

  Here, the setting value will be briefly described. The “setting value” is a probability for lottery determination whether a big hit or not and a probability for lottery determination whether a small hit or not. It is possible to change the probability of determining a lottery when moving to time, the distribution rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, and the like, which is advantageous to the player (that is, The probability (advantage) that the number of game balls B that can be increased can be increased is set in advance. In the present embodiment, as the set values, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance, and from set value 1 to set value 6, The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table in which a ratio of a big hit determination value indicating that a big hit has been won, a big hit symbol A big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the ratio of the determination value of the small hit symbol determination is defined A small hit symbol determination table, a normal shift determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the shift determination from the probable change to the normal time is selected, and used at various distribution rates associated with the set values. Select various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like) That. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. Note that various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and various tables used in various sort rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. Others may have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. Although the above-described set values are six set values (integers) in the range from set value 1 to set value 6, the set values may be smaller than this range, or may be set in a larger range. It may be something. For example, four set values (integers) in a range from set value 1 to set value 4 may be used, or eight set values (integers) in a range from set value 1 to set value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting display 1310g displays the set value, and also checks the content of the RAM incorporated therein when the power is restored by the main control MPU 1310a to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main-control-side power-off process is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality (or trust) in the content stored in the RAM incorporated therein. Is not possible), and an error message to that effect is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays an English letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined by the game board 5 among the game balls B fired in the game area 5a. The number of played game balls B is displayed. Of the game balls B fired in the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 169 and the like), and the detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. This is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected through the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays the result on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a was set from the initial position. Rotate only the range up to the rotational position of the set key cylinder with the key turned ON It may be used as the setting key switch 1311a 'that can be. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'is returned counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key was turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311 a ′ can be turned ON by turning it 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it OFF. The signal of this determination key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be described as "Modification (1) of determination key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation part of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the pressing operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A wire intrusion prevention portion is provided on the cover body with respect to the opening so that a wire or the like cannot be intruded from a “gap” formed in the opening to modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. It becomes a structure to be molded. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation part of the determination key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the pressing operation part of the determination key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a label on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). Also, a button with a cover that covers either one of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation unit may be used, or the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may be adopted. A switch having a different shape may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit as the determination key button may be employed. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Switches can be mentioned. When the setting change board 1311 is provided with the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switch button 1311b are routed. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the determination key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b are also not brought close to each other ( (Separated from each other). When the setting key button 1311 is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a ′ may be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “Modification (2) of enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the palm of the handle 195 in the handle unit 180 is A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not a finger is A detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player is branched at the payout control board 633, and the main control is performed via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, and the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or the finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or the finger is touched on the handle 195. When it is not touched, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194, the determination key is turned ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor). Good) may be described as “Modified example (3) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the firing control unit of the payout control board 633 described later is used. A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in the Through the control board 633, is input to the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from an oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, but determines that the determination key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “Modification (4) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the operation of the player sitting on the opposing face of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. A distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the distance is provided on the game board 5, and a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is used to control the surrounding area via a relay board. When the signal is input to the board 1510, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is branched at the relay board, input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and determined based on the detection signal. The presence or absence of the key ON may be determined. The distance measuring sensor transmits the light emitted from the light emitting unit through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflects the light on the arm or hand of the player within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, whereby the operation of the player can be detected. In this case, when a detection signal from the distance measurement sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal. While it can be determined that there is an operation, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the distance measurement sensor may be described as “Modification (5) of determination key”). .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing this, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (that is, the initial position), which is the original position from the rotational position of the The setting key cylinder 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so as to return the key switch 1311a to the setting key cylinder turning position that turns off the key switch 1311a. At the same time, the setting key cylinder is set so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF. A signal of this OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Was set, but the setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as serial information, a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. Thereby, security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with the serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 or on the payout control board 633. . When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and the It is possible to determine which one of the OFF states is to be transmitted (in some cases, the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit is described as "Modification (6) of determination key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing this, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (that is, the initial position), which is the original position from the rotational position of the The setting key cylinder 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so as to return the key switch 1311a to the setting key cylinder turning position that turns off the key switch 1311a. At the same time, the setting key cylinder is set so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF. A signal of this OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Was set, but the setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as a pulse signal, a pulse output circuit which can output to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. Thereby, security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with the pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 or on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit has a pulse width set to 1 ms if the information is to convey the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms if it is the information to convey the decision key ON. If the information indicates OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a outputs the setting key ON, the determination key ON, And OFF can be determined (in some cases, the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit is described as "Modification (7) of determination key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing this, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (that is, the initial position), which is the original position from the rotational position of the The setting key cylinder 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so as to return the key switch 1311a to the setting key cylinder turning position that turns off the key switch 1311a. At the same time, the setting key cylinder is set so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF. A signal of this OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Was set, but the setting key O , The voltage level of the determination key ON signal, and the voltage level of the OFF signal are set to an intermediate potential (for example, from zero V to 5 V) between the boards ranging from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Out of 2 V to 3 V), a comparator circuit is provided in the main control board 1310, and the result of comparison by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310a. ON / OFF, ON / OFF of the signal of the determination key ON, and ON / OFF of the OFF signal may be determined. Thereby, security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as “Modified example (8) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON was inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the determination key button, and the pressing operation unit of the determination key button corresponds to the pressing operation unit. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is formed on the cover body with respect to the opening so as to prevent wire or the like from entering through the “gap” formed in the dispensing control board 633 so as to be modified. Become. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation part of the determination key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the pressing operation part of the determination key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is stuck at a position corresponding to each of the determination key button and the error release switch so that the determination key button and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this seal, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers one of the press operation sections of the enter key button and the error release switch (a cover for pressing the press operation section). May be used.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the shape of the outer shape of the determination key button and the error release switch or the shape of the pressing operation unit. May be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit may be employed as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Switches can be mentioned. When the payout control board 633 is provided with an enter key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the payout is performed as a routing of a wiring pattern to the enter key button and a wiring pattern to the error release switch. The control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the determination key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error canceling switch should be kept close to each other (by separating them from each other). ) Is formed. When the payout control board 633 is provided with an enter key button, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a 'may be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "modified example (9) of the enter key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633, Is input to the main control MPU1310a control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of this signal. The error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display as described above, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed (when the various control boards are turned on at the time of power-on). When the pachinko machine 1 does not have an error, the pressing operation of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation section of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while determining based on the signal from the error release switch. Thus, when the pressing operation section of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as “variation example (10) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 outputs the logic of the signal from the error release switch to the dispensing control unit power supply described later. A command is created by monitoring in a port input process of the time process, a command created in a command transmission process of a payout control unit power-on process described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 receiving the command is transmitted. Of the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the enter key is ON. The error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display as described above, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed (when the various control boards are turned on at the time of power-on). When the pachinko machine 1 does not have an error, the pressing operation of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the payout control MPU has been operated based on the signal from the error release switch and informs the fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch, and receives a command notifying the fact. Then, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as “variation example (11) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder whose setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON. (Set rotation of key cylinder to turn off 1311a), turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633 so that R An operation signal from the M clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the enter key is ON based on an input operation signal. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). If the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Area except for the specific area in the entire area of). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. In That. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON.

  The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. The wire intrusion prevention portion is provided on the opening so as to prevent the wire and the like from penetrating through the “gap” formed in the portion and the corresponding opening to modify the dispensing control board 633. It becomes a structure to be molded into.

  The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, a seal printed with the name of each button is provided at a position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal.) Also, a button with a cover that covers one of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch are not confused. The cover may need to be opened.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, or the pressing operation may be performed. A switch having a different shape may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation section may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. When the dispensing control board 633 is provided with a RAM clear switch 1310f and an error clearing switch, the wiring pattern between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error clearing switch is routed in order to prevent unauthorized alteration. The dispensing control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection of the dispensing control board 633 to the connector terminal (the main control board 1310 connector terminal) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error clearing switch are also kept close to each other. (Separated). In the case where the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as a "variation (12) of the enter key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder whose setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON. (Set rotation of key cylinder to turn off 1311a), turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633 so that R The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the operation signal from the M clear switch 1310f in a port input process of a payout control unit power-on process described later, creates a command, and generates a command when the payout control unit power-on described later. The command created in the command transmission process of the process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has received this command may determine whether the enter key is ON. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). If the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Area except for the specific area in the entire area of). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Can be used as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in a frame command receiving process in a main control timer interrupt process described later. The payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated, and when it receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the determination key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 determines Operation of It can be determined not determined key ON when receiving a command to communicate that fact to determine that RAM clear switch 1310f pressing element when is not being operated dispensing control MPU of based on No.. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the RAM clear switch mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included). ").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574 or a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a branches at the payout control board 633 and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the decision key is ON. Alternatively, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 uses the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cutout detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 to perform a port input process of a payout control unit power-on process described later. And sends a command created in a command transmission process of a payout control unit power-on process to be described later to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has received the command determines the command. The presence or absence of the key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the payout unit). The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "Modification (16) of determination key".

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. This determination key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal of While it is possible to, it can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "Modification (17) of the enter key". In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn the determination key ON. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 again, pull out the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is determined to be ON when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal of While it is Rukoto can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the body frame 4 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "Modification (17) of the enter key". In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). (Rotational position), a 60-degree turn in the counterclockwise direction to turn off and a 60-degree turn in the counterclockwise direction to perform the second turn-on operation. Can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch is referred to as “modification of the determination key ( 8) "and there is a case to be described).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). (Rotational position), a 60-degree turn in the counterclockwise direction to turn off and a 60-degree turn in the counterclockwise direction to perform the second turn-on operation. Can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 and a setting key in which a setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the cylinder from the rotational position to the initial position and then turned off. When the OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the determination key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch). Mode 2 (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ') may be referred to as a "decision key modification (19)."

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. The signal of the determination key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation section of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the pressing operation section of the enter key button and the corresponding And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is formed on the cover so that the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by intrusion of wire or the like from a “gap” formed in the cover. Become. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation part of the determination key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the pressing operation part of the determination key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a label on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). Also, a button with a cover that covers either one of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation unit may be used, or the outer shape or pressing operation of the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be adopted. A switch having a different shape may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit may be employed as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Switches can be mentioned. If the main control board 1310 is provided with the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to approach each other (to be separated from each other). When the determination key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a 'may be used (the mode 2 of the enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as a "modified example (20) of the enter key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input is provided. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). If the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Area except for the specific area in the entire area of). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). Mode 3 (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a '). Note that the period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted to the payout control board 633 as described later. When the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch to be described later, the error release switch is not required on the payout control board 633 because the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the gate 2003 Gate sensor 2801, various sensors of various winning ports (for example, second starting port sensor 2401, large winning port sensor 2) 02, the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002), and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are determined based on these detection signals. The presence or absence of the key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (various sensors and the like). (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the gate 2003 or various winning ports in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the outgoing port 1008.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. This determination key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a was replaced with a stepping motor, a DC motor, It controls the operation of a movable body (accessory) by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and When determining the original position, the operating position, and the like of the movable body (accessory) based on a detection signal from a sensor (a photo sensor, a distance measuring sensor, or the like), the main control MPU 1310a based on the detection signal from the optical sensor May determine whether the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the optical key combination). The mode of the object sensor (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "Modification (23) of determination key". In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the enter key is turned ON, and the optical sensor moves the original position of the movable body (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON can be inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is Whether the decision key ON based on the output signal may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be turned only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as a "decision key modification (24)." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the gaming board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or beaten. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined by the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor for detecting a fraudulent action to enter a ball or a gate portion (gate) provided in the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310 a uses the vibration sensor based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor. In addition to determining the presence or absence of a fraudulent act, the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be referred to as a "decision key modification (25)." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to play the game. The game ball B is caused to malfunction by causing various sensors of various winning ports provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580 to malfunction. When the game board 5 or the payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulently acquired right, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence / absence of fraud based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor. May be determined based on the detection signal. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (for a radio wave sensor). The mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ') may be referred to as a "decision key modification (26)." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation section unit 350 Signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 for detecting the pressing operation of the touch operation unit of the effect operation unit unit 350 The detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 for detecting the contact of No. 02 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the production operation button). The mode of the unit (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as a "decision key modification (27)."

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 including the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are caulked with a one-way screw or the like at a caulking portion. The caulking portion is a sealing mechanism, and is provided with a plurality. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking part using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover cannot be removed from the base unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can be applied to a structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320, It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by entering a wire or the like from a “gap” formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. In order to prevent this, a wire intrusion prevention portion is formed on the cover body with respect to the opening. In addition, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is configured such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. An open / close switch for a setting change board cover body that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover open / close switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. May be configured. The case where the cover body is opened from the base body based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (the setting change board box). May be described as a “decision key modification (28)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected. In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the setting of the setting key switch 1311a is set. A wiring pattern for transmitting a key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting a determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key switch 1311a OFF signal, and a setting switching button 1311b. Are formed so as not to be close to each other (to be separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311 and to be connected to the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the The connection of the board 1310 to the terminal of the connector MSCN) is also formed at a distance. Also in the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and a determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a) And the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switching button 1311b) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b so as not to be close to each other ( (Separated from each other), a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a. , For one of the wiring patterns, the setting change board 1311 The connector is connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (an inter-board connection) via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN. Alternatively, another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected to each other via a harness. "Variation of the decision key (29)" may be described.)

  In addition, among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the determination key, an aspect of appropriately selecting and combining may be adopted (the variation of the selection combination in the modification example is referred to as “the modification example (30) of the determination key. ").

  In addition, with the above-described set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not a large hit is determined by lottery or the probability for determining whether or not a small hit is determined, a lottery determination is performed when shifting from a probable change time to a normal time. Can be changed, the distribution rate to an area that is advantageous for the player, and the like can be changed, which is advantageous for the player (that is, the number of game balls B that can be acquired by the player is increased. (Probability) can be set in advance. In the present embodiment, set values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 are prepared in advance as set values. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player has been set in advance. By the way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from the set value 1 to the set value 6, but the other pachinko machines have a probability (advantage) that the player has an advantage. In some cases, there is a single set value that is set in advance. In other words, the probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player as in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment exists in advance as a plurality of set values, and is advantageous for the player in which the game needs to be changed and for the game specification. There is a game specification in which a probability (advantage) has only a single set value in advance and no setting change is required at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in design in accordance with such a game specification and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed in design or is not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are not used. Is dependent on the game specifications, and therefore has a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations according to the game specifications. Therefore, a board that can be used in common with the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 without depending on the game specification, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration is required.

  For example, in a game specification in which only a single setting value exists in advance and the setting value is not necessary at all in a game specification in which the probability (advantage degree) that the player has an advantage is a probability (advantage degree) in which the setting value is advantageous to the player. Since there is no need to use the setting value, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 can be dealt with by a design change by software that assigns the following contents. Can be.

  For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine check operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area of the built-in RAM (area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area) (after the RAM is cleared). Variations can be given to the method of starting the pachinko machine 1). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (accessory) to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of the light-emitting body such as the lamp or the LED, the set value 1 is set to “all operations (movable body (accessory) Operation of the object, lighting of the light emitter) ”is assigned, and the actual device confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies“ movable (operation) operation ”as the set value 2 is assigned. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies “lighting of the light emitter” is assigned as the value 3, and the detailed operation (movable speed, movement over the entire operation area, other An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies “interference check with a structure or another movable body (accessory), operation order with another movable body (accessory), etc.)” is assigned. Light emitter 1 port unit (Main control MP The actual device confirmation operation pattern 5 for designating “lighting of the light emitter in a predetermined output port unit (ie, for each output port)” of 1310 a is assigned, and the actual device confirmation designating “no operation” as the set value 6 is assigned. The operation pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual device checking operation after the RAM is cleared may be described as “Modification (1) by common hardware configuration”). The main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (the accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing a main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, of the actual device check operation after the RAM is cleared. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 with the content (actual device check operation pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The operation of the (accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter can be performed. By changing the setting of the actual machine check operation after the RAM is cleared, the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared can be varied.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state). In this case, a time setting pattern 1 specifying “10 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 1, a time setting pattern 2 specifying “15 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “20 seconds” as the setting value 3 ", A time setting pattern 4 specifying" 25 seconds "is assigned as the setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 specifying" 30 seconds "is assigned as the setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 designating “35 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 6 (the change setting of the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state is referred to as “Modified example (2 ) ")). The peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. According to the mode of changing and setting the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the state of waiting for the player, the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the start of the demonstration can be varied.

  In addition, for example, it is possible to use the contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) performed after the symbol change ends as a set value capable of setting a plurality of contents. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that specifies “comical effect” as the set value 1 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies “comical effect, motion effect of movable body (accessory)” as the set value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that designates “serious effect” as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates “serial effect, motion effect of movable body (accessory)” as a setting value 4 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 that designates “era drama style effect” as a setting value 5 is set, and a demo effect setting that designates “era drama style effect, movable body (character)” as a set value 6 The pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the content of the demonstration effect may be described as “Modification (3) by common hardware configuration”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demo effect setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. According to the mode of the change setting of the content of the demonstration effect, the content of the demonstration effect performed after the change of the symbol can be varied.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of default sound volumes adjusted by a sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, a volume setting pattern 1 specifying “volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a volume setting pattern 2 specifying “volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “volume 3” is set as the setting value 3. ”, A volume setting pattern 4 specifying“ volume 4 ”is assigned as the setting value 4, a volume setting pattern 5 specifying“ volume 5 ”is assigned as the setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 designating “volume 6” is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the default volume may be described as “Modification (4) by common hardware configuration”). The volume is set so that the volume increases from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a sets a default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of “volume 1” assigned to the set value 1 is such that the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the volume has been moved to the lower end of the volume. When the sound volume is adjusted to the minimum volume, the sound may be muted. Alternatively, the sound volume may be set so that the sound can be recognized when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of “volume 6” assigned to the set value 6 is such that the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement to the volume maximum end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be the maximum volume, or may be a volume at a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. According to the aspect of the change setting of the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can have a variation.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of error notification sound volumes in error notification of various kinds of troubles, goto, errors, and the like. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, are not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by setting the maximum volume is set in the game hall. Although the clerk or the like is easy to notice, a player playing a game with another pachinko machine may feel harsh. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, an error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and an error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies “error notification volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2. An error notification volume setting pattern 3 specifying “error notification volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3, an error notification volume setting pattern 4 specifying “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and “5” is assigned as the setting value 5. An error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying “error notification volume 5” is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying “error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)” is assigned as the set value 6 (volume of error notification sound). The mode of the change setting may be described as “Modification (5) by common hardware configuration”). In addition, from the setting value 1 (a volume that does not become mute, the volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound), from the setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set so as to increase toward a volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even at a distance of several meters from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a performs control for emitting an error notification sound at a volume of an error notification sound (error notification sound volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. According to the aspect of the change setting of the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can have a variation.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of default luminances of a light-emitting body such as a lamp and an LED. The luminance of the luminous body to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default luminance. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 specifying “luminance 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 specifying “luminance 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “3” is assigned as the setting value 3. A default luminance setting pattern 3 specifying “luminance 3” is allocated, a default luminance setting pattern 4 specifying “luminance 4” is allocated as a setting value 4, and a default luminance setting pattern specifying “luminance 5” as a setting value 5 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 specifying “brightness 6” as the setting value 6 is assigned. (In some cases, the mode of the change setting of the default brightness is described as “Modification (6) by common hardware configuration”). is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the illuminant by repeatedly changing the default luminance by repeatedly executing a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and performs lighting, blinking, and gradation points of the illuminant. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a default luminance (default luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitter can be performed by adjusting the luminance of the light emitter that is present. According to the mode of changing and setting the content of the default luminance, the default luminance of the light-emitting body such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in error notification of various defects, goto, and errors. For the lamps to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, an error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification luminance 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and “error notification luminance 2” is set as the setting value 2. Error notification luminance setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, error notification luminance setting pattern 3 specifying “error notification luminance 3” is assigned as setting value 3, and error notification luminance 4 specifying “error notification luminance 4” is set value 4. A brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, an error notification brightness setting pattern 5 specifying “error notification brightness 5” is set as a setting value 5, and an error notification specifying “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” is set as a setting value 6. The luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the luminance of the illuminant in the error notification is referred to as “common hardware”). It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that the setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is not turned off, but the brightness of the lamp is low, and when the user stops at the front of the pachinko machine, the brightness of the lamp can be recognized as an error notification) is changed from the setting value 6 to the setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the illuminant by repeatedly performing a main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to set the change of the luminance of the illuminant in the error notification so that the illuminator emits light, blinks, a gradation point, and the like. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a includes an object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on an error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the luminance of the illuminant, it is possible to perform lighting, blinking, gradation point and the like of the illuminant. By changing the setting of the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification, the luminance of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification can be varied.

  Also, with respect to various set values assigned to the modified examples (1) to (7) based on the above-described common hardware configuration, a set value display permission condition predetermined in a set value confirmation display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a described later is satisfied. The setting display 1310g is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, but may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to when the power is turned off (setting value display). May be described as “Modification (8) by common hardware configuration”).

  Further, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) according to the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted as the modification (30) of the determination key described above.

  The predetermined set value change permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a executes a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-on processing described later. , And then proceed with the game by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. When the predetermined set value change permission condition described above is satisfied at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in a main control side power-on process to be described later to execute the main control built-in RAM. The game is cleared by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and when the above-described predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored, In any case, the main control MPU 1310a clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in a main control-side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined set value change permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Accordingly, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (the case where “variation of the predetermined setting value change permission condition” is described). is there).

  In addition, the above-described predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in a set value confirmation display process performed as one process of a main control timer interrupt process described later. 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the pressing operation unit be pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period during which the pressing operation is performed is limited. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined set value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be performed in addition to the pressing operation of the setting key (in the case where "the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition" is described). There is). In this case, when the modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control timer interrupt process described later, but executes the main control power supply described later. In the processing at the time of the insertion, the game is performed before the initial setting and the activation setting of the built-in WDT are performed, and thereafter, the interrupt progression setting and the like are performed so that the game proceeds. Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control timer interrupt process when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed, since the interrupt permission setting has not yet been performed. Without this, a detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a setting key are inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) in the clockwise direction, and the setting key is turned ON. A setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is read and the main control built-in RA Not stored in the input information storage area of the. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

  By adopting both the above-described modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-described modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on or a power failure (momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Assuming that the setting key has been turned ON by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been pressed. In some cases, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in a main control-side power-on process to be described later and closes the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. Then, while the game proceeds by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like, while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the main control side power supply described later. In the time process, a set value confirmation display process is performed, and thereafter, a game is advanced by performing an interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this aspect, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display processing is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by making an interrupt permission setting or the like, the set current set value is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by an out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in a ball counting process of a main control side power-on process described later. The number of played game balls B is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control-side power-on process described later, and the number of game balls B collected through the out port 1008 is counted as the base monitor 1310h. To be displayed. Therefore, the current setting value set by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-described base monitor 1310h (this may be described as “a modification of the method of using the base monitor”). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value during the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like using the base monitor 1310h. When the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like after the power is restored, the number of the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 (the out ball passage 663 of the main frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

  Further, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-described modification of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately used. The selection key may be adopted in the above-described modification example (30) of the determination key.

  In addition, any one of the above-described modification examples of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-described modification example of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately used. It may be selected and adopted in the modified examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has a state indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying a game state, and two state displays for displaying a normal lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B to the gate 2003. It has a normal symbol display composed of LEDs, and a normal reservation display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the reception of the game balls B to the gate 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the reception of the game ball B to the second ball and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display comprising eight LEDs to be displayed; and a second special reserve number display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting the game balls B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 displays a round including five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005. Display.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 169) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIG. 169).

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 or the frame of the center-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

  The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and is attached in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes one left fixing piece 1601 protruding leftward from the left side surface, and two right fixing pieces 1602 protruding rightward from the right side surface. The effect display device 1600 includes two fixed grooves 3010c opening on the right inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described below, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two right fixing pieces 1602 from diagonally behind 3010, the left fixing piece 1601 side is moved forward, the left fixing piece 1601 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism, and the lock mechanism is moved upward in rear view. By sliding, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 144 and the like. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the right game ball in the front unit. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in FIG. 144. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. I have.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, a gate 2003 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B, A game to the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate 2003. A special winning opening 2005 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by accepting the ball B, and a special winning opening 2005 provided at a position different from the special winning opening 2005 Prize winning opening which enables the reception of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. 2006, and a V winning opening 2007 in which a chance of receiving a game ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 is given.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is in the up-down direction on the right part in the gaming area 5a. It is arranged above the center. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The bonus winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and immediately below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The V winning opening 2007 is located at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the second starting opening 2004, and is arranged behind the game panel 1100.

  The first sub-out port 2021 is arranged below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2022 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a left front view of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 and having three general winning openings 2001, and an upper left side unit 2300 provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 in a front view. A first start port 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021 which are provided to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, in front view. Above the attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, the front center substantially in front of the inside of the game area 5a, A frame-shaped center won game 2500 provided on closer, and a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the center role 2500 and above the first attacker unit 2400, and includes a second attacker unit 2600 having a role winning port 2006 and a second attacker unit 2600. A middle right side unit 2700 provided above and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022, and a gate provided above the middle right side unit 2700 and having a gate 2003 A member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 so that the first starting port 2002 projects forward from the front of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the left and right direction of the center role 2500 Located just below the center.

  The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and the lower front of the rear unit 3000 of the rear effect unit 3100. It can be delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the effect unit 3160.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game balls B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning opening 2001 on the left side is open upward.

  When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and outputs the first discharge passage 3181 of the lower front production unit 3160 in the rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. Can be delivered to

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 inclined so as to be lower rightward.

  When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
Next, the first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. . The first attacker unit 2400 includes a gate 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a special winning port 2005 (see FIG. 144 and the like).

  In the first attacker unit 2400, in a front view, a second starting port 2004 is provided at an upper part on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the special winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and lower than the second starting port 2004. The first sub-out opening 2021 is provided below the second starting opening 2004 and lower than the special winning opening 2005.

  Further, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and a large winning port sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the special winning port 2005. 2402 and a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting illegal magnetism (see FIG. 169 and the like). Two large winning opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

  The first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and a normal lottery result in which the second starting port door 2411 is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003. The opening ball solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the above, the big winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the big winning opening 2005, and the receiving of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 with the big winning opening door 2413. And an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the user.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first shelf 2421 extending from the vicinity of the upper right corner to be lower to the left as viewed from the front, and a left shelf from the left end of the first shelf 2421. It is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and extends shorter than the first shelf 2421 so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2421. And a second shelf 2422 forming a second starting port 2004 between the second shelf 2422 and the second shelf 2422 so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the second shelf 2422 and smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. A third shelf 2423 extending shorter than the two shelves 2422; and a third shelf 243 spaced from the left end of the third shelf 2423 to a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B. From the position lower than the part 2423 to the left Biteori has a fourth ledge 2424 which forms the winning opening 2005 between the third ledge 2423.

  The right end of the first shelf 2421 is separated from the right side of the first attacker unit 2400 to the left slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2421, the second shelf 2422, and the third shelf 2423 are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2421 and the like. ing.

  In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a first standing wall portion 2425 extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf 2421 and a lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425 vertically extending from the left end of the first shelf 2421 downward. A second standing wall portion 2426 extending from the right end of the second shelf 2422 vertically to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, and a third shelf. A fourth standing wall portion 2428 extending vertically downward from the right end of the portion 2423 to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400; a fifth standing wall portion 2429 extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423; A sixth standing wall portion 2430 extending downward from the right end of the portion 2424 and a seventh standing wall portion 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 are provided.

  The fifth standing wall portion 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424 and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered leftward. , And extend further downward to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400. The sixth standing wall portion 2430 extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424 and then lower rightward. Above, it extends further downward to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400. The space in the left-right direction between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

  Further, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first horizontal wall portion 2432 connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2425, the second standing wall portion 2426, and the third standing wall portion 2427, and a right side of the first attacker unit 2400. The left fourth standing wall portion is inclined from the position lower than the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425 so as to be lowered to the left with an interval at which the game balls B can flow between the first standing wall portion 2432 and the fourth standing wall portion. And a second horizontal wall portion 2433 that is inclined so as to become higher toward the middle of 2428. The second horizontal wall portion 2433 is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2021 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

  In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 is provided between the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 in a direction approaching each other in the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430, respectively. A third horizontal wall portion 2434 extending to the vicinity, and a partition portion 2435 connecting the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2434 to each other and extending upward. I have.

  Further, the first attacker unit 2400 extends stepwise so as to be lower to the left along the upper side, and sets an interval at which the game balls B can flow between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423. It has an upper shelf 2436 that is provided separately. The upper shelf 2436 has a right end located right above a left end of the first shelf 2421 and a left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2424. The upper shelf 2436 is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end becomes lower to the right.

  Although not shown in detail, the first attacker unit 2400 forms the space in the space where the game ball B between the upper shelf 2436 and the special winning opening 2005 can flow to the left. A plurality of abutting portions having a triangular shape in a plan view protrude into the space so as to be staggered from the front wall and the rear wall in the left-right direction. These contact portions allow the game balls B rolling on the special winning opening door 2413 to flow in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction when the special winning opening 2005 is closed.

  The second starting port door 2411 is provided to move in the front-back direction. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves forward due to the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 projecting by the biasing force of the spring, and closes the second starting port 2004. I have. Further, in a state where the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward due to the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 retreating against the biasing force of the spring, and the second starting port door 2411 moves backward. The mouth 2004 is open.

  When the power is not supplied to the starting port solenoid 2412, the plunger protrudes forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger moves backward when the power is supplied.

  The special winning opening door 2413 is a flat plate that is long on the left and right, and is provided so as to move back and forth. The special winning opening door 2413 can open and close the special winning opening 2005 by moving the attacker solenoid 2414 forward and backward of the plunger. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the special winning opening door 2413 moves forward due to the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 projecting by the biasing force of the spring, and closes the special winning opening 2005. In addition, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 moves backward as the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 retreats against the urging force of the spring, and opens the special winning opening 2005. doing.

  In the attacker solenoid 2414, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown) when the power is not supplied, and the plunger retreats when the power is supplied.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are each in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 protrudes forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the second starting port door 2411 protrudes forward. In this state, the second starting port door 2411 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2411 cannot accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

  In a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the special winning opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the special winning opening door 2413 is located above the special winning opening 2005, and the game ball B cannot be received in the special winning opening 2005. That is, the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the special winning opening door 2413 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

  In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf 2421, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf 2421, and the upper surface of the second starting port door 2411 and the After rolling the second shelf 2422, the second shelf 2422 is discharged from the left end to the left. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls on the third shelf 2423 or the special winning opening door 2413 according to the momentum, and rolls leftward due to their inclination. When the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2422 contacts the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436 and rebounds to the right, a gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 is formed. May enter.

  At this time, the game ball B rolling on the special winning opening door 2413 closing the special winning opening 2005 has a plurality of balls provided in the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the special winning opening 2005. It comes into contact with the contact portion alternately, and rolls leftward while zigzag in the front-back direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the special winning opening door 2413 is released from the left end thereof to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 after rolling on the fourth shelf 2424.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows to the right of the first shelf 2421, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2425, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and falls on the second horizontal wall. Due to the inclination of the portion 2433, it rolls leftward and enters the first sub-out port 2021. Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423, it passes between the third standing wall 2427 and the fourth standing wall 2428 and the second horizontal wall 2433 It falls near the left end, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and enters the first sub-out port 2021.

  The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2021 is passed back to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the lower front production unit 3160 in the front production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and It is discharged from the discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B flowing on the right side of the first shelf 2421 and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 are both The first sub-out port 2021 is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2021.

  In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003, the plunger is opposed to the biasing force of the spring. It retreats, and the second starting port door 2411 moves backward. Then, by moving the second starting port door 2411 backward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game balls B can be received in the second starting port 2004. That is, the second start port 2004 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B flows down between the second standing wall portion 2426 and the third standing wall portion 2427, and the second starting port sensor 2401 After being detected, it is released backward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 and released from the first attacker unit 2400 to the rear is transferred to the third discharge passage 3183 of the lower front production unit 3160 of the rear production unit 3100 of the rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. Then, it is discharged from the third discharge passage 3183 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  On the other hand, in a normal state, according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats against the urging force of the spring, and the special winning opening door 2413 moves rearward. By moving the special winning opening door 2413 backward, the special winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the game ball B can be received in the special winning opening 2005. That is, the special winning opening 2005 is opened.

  When the gaming ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the game ball B passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 and is separated from the fifth standing wall portion 2429. Between the second vertical wall portion 2430 and the sixth vertical wall portion 2430 and the partition portion 2435, and is detected by one of the two large winning opening sensors 2402 on the third horizontal wall portion 2434. It falls and is discharged backward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 and released backward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the lower front production unit 3160 of the rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. Is discharged from the fourth discharge passage 3184 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2435, and each is detected by the different special winning opening sensor 2402. After that, the game balls B can be prevented from staying between the special winning opening 2005 and the special winning opening sensor 2402, and many game balls B can be released in a short time. Acceptable.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141 and the like. FIG. 141 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center part viewed from the front by exploding a portion thereof, and FIG. 141 (b) is a separation hole in a front member on the front side of the lower right guide path in the center part. FIG. 5 is a side cross-sectional view taken from the right side by cutting left and right at the portion of FIG. The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the game area 5a above the starting port unit 2100, substantially in the center in front view and slightly upward, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center role item 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and can visually recognize, from the front, various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000. .

  The frame-shaped center role 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped member projecting from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. It has a flange 2502 and a flat support 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall 2501. The peripheral wall 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state where the peripheral wall 2501 is assembled to the game board 5. The peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 into which the center role 2500 is inserted. When the peripheral wall portion 2501 is assembled to the game board 5, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center role object 2500.

  The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed smaller than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange 2502 and the support 2503 project from the peripheral wall 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support part 2503 (flange part 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall part 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

  A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall 2501 where the flange 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall 2501. The support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape following the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is not noticeable. The support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range from the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness (1 mm to 10 mm) of the panel plate 1110, and the player exerts an effect as reinforcement. To make it less noticeable.

  In addition, the center role 2500 includes a transparent flat plate-like closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall 2501. The closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from entering the rear (the back unit 3000) through the frame of the center role 2500.

  The center role item 2500 is a warp entrance 2511 in which a game ball B in the game area 5a is opened at a position on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 in a front view from the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 can be released, and the warp exit 2512 that is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover above the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 138 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the invasion of the game ball B from outside the frame of the center role 2500 into the frame by bouncing the game ball B bouncing on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

  The stage 2513 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to the position immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the position of the approximate center in the left-right direction when attached to the 1110 is slightly higher than both left and right sides thereof. In the stage 2513, a portion (central emission portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side emission portion 2513b) on the left and right sides thereof are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be lower, and the game balls B can be released into the game area 5a from those portions.

  In the state where the center role item 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2513 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The center role item 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 that is provided at the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game balls B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5 a (the stop of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) in the vicinity of the portion 1006 and is driven to the right above the center role 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

  The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the up-down direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is opened forward, so that the game balls B flowing therethrough can be visually recognized in a favorable state from the front.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and is located along the peripheral wall 2501 to the right of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 apart from the peripheral wall 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending therefrom. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated to the left and right. The outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally to the lower right along the arc above the right rail 1005.

  The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 in a state where the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located immediately below the lower end of the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the stop portion 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

  In addition, the center role 2500 has a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges the ball downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening diagonally lower left with a width of one game ball B.

  The lower right guide passage 2530 has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5 and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

  The center role 2500 will be described in more detail. The center role 2500 includes a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, and the like, and a lower right guide passage 2530. , A transparent flat plate-like front member 2531 attached to the center base plate 2540 so as to close the front side, and a lower right guide passage decoration attached to the front surface of the front member 2531 and having a predetermined decoration printed thereon. And a seal 2532 (see FIG. 141).

  The center base plate 2540 forms a part of the flange portion 2502 at the lower right corner in front view, and has a guide passage flange portion 2540a extending flat to the right and a peripheral wall portion 2501 along the lower side of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. A guide passage wall 2540b extending to the right and shorter than the guide passage flange portion 2540a so that the right end side is lower than a portion in front of the flange portion 2502 on the outer peripheral surface of the guide passage wall portion 2540a, and a right end near the right end of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. After extending up and down along the side and extending forward to the same position as the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b, a flat wall-like wall 2540c, and after extending to the lower left side continuously with the lower edge of the upright wall 2540c, A left guiding portion 2540d that extends obliquely to the lower right and is bent. A gap through which one game ball B can pass is formed between the guide passage wall 2540b and the upright wall 2540c.

  The center base plate 2540 guides the game ball B flowing down from above to the guide passage wall 2540b to the right by the guide passage wall 2540b, and then flows downward from between the guide passage wall 2540b and the upright wall portion 2540c. After that, it can be discharged obliquely to the lower left by the left guiding portion 2540d. The center base plate 2540 forms most of the lower right guide passage 2530 by the guide passage flange 2540a, the guide passage wall 2540b, the upright wall 2540c, and the left guiding portion 2540d.

  The front member 2531 extends in the left-right direction from the same position as the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 2501 to the same position as the right end of the guide passage flange 2540a, and the upper end is higher than the upper end of the guide passage flange 2540a. And the lower end is located below the guide passage wall 2540b.

  The front member 2531 has an attachment recess 2531a that is recessed rearward from the front surface so as to conform to the outer peripheral shape, and a separation hole 2531b that penetrates forward and backward at a portion of the attachment recess 2531a that matches the guide passage wall 2540b in a front view. And a plurality of mounting bosses 2531c that protrude rearward in a columnar shape from the rear surface and are mounted on the center base plate 2540.

  The affixed concave portion 2531a is recessed backward (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 (see FIG. 141 (b)). In the attachment concave portion 2531a, a portion on the left end side and a portion near the left end side on the upper end side are set as abutment surfaces for attaching the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532.

  The separation hole 2531b is a circular hole having a circular inner shape. When the separation hole 2531b is assembled to the center accessory 2500, the front side is closed by a lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 attached to the attachment concave portion 2531a, and the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 is closed. As a result, the rear side is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2531b becomes a closed space.

  The inner diameter of the separation hole 2531b of this embodiment is in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b is smaller than this, the diameter of the separating rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b becomes smaller, so that the separation rod 2531b is easily bent and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 cannot be sufficiently pressed. If the separation hole 2531b is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 2531b in the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, and the appearance of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 may be deteriorated. That's why.

  According to the center role 2500 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment concave portion 2531a of the front member 2531, the front member By passing the rod-shaped member through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the 2531 and pressing the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 from the rear to the front with the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be turned forward. The lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the attaching concave portion 2531a by pulling the turned portion by the operator, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be reapplied.

  Further, in a state where the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof, Since the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the attaching concave portion 2531a, the replacement work of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 accompanying the model change can be facilitated.

  Further, as described above, in a state where the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated from each other, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment concave portion 2531a using the separation hole 2531b. It is possible to easily separate the components of the machine 1 for each material, and it is possible to reduce the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the separation hole 2531b can be hidden from the front by attaching the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 to the attachment concave portion 2531a, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 2531b can be suppressed, and the player can be protected. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the separation hole 2531b, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan an illegal act using the separation hole 2531b.

  In the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, separation is performed by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 attached to the rear side of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is attached. Since the hole 2531b is closed from the rear and is not penetrated through a hole passing to the rear side as in a conventional pachinko machine, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is passed through the hole. It can be prevented from being inserted into the inside or a part where the game ball B circulates, and it can be prevented that an illegal act is performed.

  Further, since the separation hole 2531b is closed from the rear by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the separation hole 2531b through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 from the front, Since the guide passage wall 2540b can prevent further insertion (intrusion) from the rear, an unauthorized tool can enter the game board 5 or a portion where the game ball B flows from the front through the separation hole 2531b. Can be prevented and fraudulent acts can be prevented. In addition, when a fraudulent tool penetrates the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, a trace remains on the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532. Can be hesitated to execute, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be provided.

  Furthermore, according to the center role 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is located at the position where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is the outer edge of the 2500, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (in the frame of the center role 2500) can be relatively widened, and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 at the rear through the frame of the center role 2500, The decoration and the like of the back unit 3000 can be made more visible.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. This can prevent the peripheral wall 2501 from being deformed or damaged even when the game ball B comes into contact with the peripheral wall 2501 outside the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Further, since the strength of the center role 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center role 2500 can be released from the injection mold without being deformed.

  Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude shortly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. The visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 can be reduced.

  Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In a close part, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall 2501. Thereby, the game area by the plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a can be made as wide as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game.

  The peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503 is provided. Is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center role 2500 is made to appear to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 is more compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side can be more easily seen. In other words, when the non-distribution area (the inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center role 2500 is to be made large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You may do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

  In the above embodiment, the front member 2531 is provided with one separation hole 2531b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The separation hole 2531b is provided at a position that matches the guide passage wall 2540b in front view. A plurality may be provided.

  Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a portion of the center base plate 2540 that is inside the bent left guiding portion 2540d (the right portion in front view). When the separation hole 2531b is provided in the portion, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b is not directly closed by the center base plate 2540, but the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the game panel 1100 are located behind the separation hole 2531b. Therefore, since the hole continuous with the separation hole 2531b does not penetrate to the rear of the game board 5, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. Also, in this case, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the separation hole 2531b through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 from the front, the tip of the unauthorized tool is inserted into the lower right guide passage 2530 by the left guiding portion 2540d. B can be prevented from entering the area where B flows. Further, in this case, since the right side of the left guiding portion 2540d is open, the separation hole is provided from the rear even when the front member 2531 is still assembled by using a linear tool bent in a J shape. A tool can be inserted into 2531b, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be removed.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is located on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a. It is attached to the front of panel panel 1110 in panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 includes a bonus winning opening 2006 which is openable and closable to the left.

  The second attacker unit 2600 includes an accessory winning port sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the accessory winning port 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting an unauthorized magnet acting near the accessory winning port 2006 (see FIG. 146). Also, the second attacker unit 2600 is for opening and closing the bonus winning opening 2006 by opening the bonus winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the bonus winning opening 2006 and the movable winning opening door 2611. A bonus winning opening solenoid 2612, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance / retreat of the plunger of the bonus winning opening solenoid 2612 to move the bonus winning opening door 2611, and a game received in the bonus winning opening 2006 And a guiding passage 2613 for guiding the ball B and discharging it backward.

  The second attacker unit 2600 has a special winning opening door 2006 opening leftward at a position closer to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and closing the special winning opening 2006 from the left. 2611 are provided.

  The winning opening door 2611 has a semicircular lower side bulging downward, a right side linearly extending upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a lower side bulging leftward from the upper end of the right side. And an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the. The accessory winning opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotary shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link pin projecting rearward from a position further away from the rotary shaft. (Not shown). The lower part rotation shaft is rotatably mounted so that the upper part of the bonus winning door 2611 moves to the left.

  Although not shown in detail, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. A transmission member (not shown) includes a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612 and a link pin of the accessory winning opening door 2611 penetrating in the front-back direction and extending in the left-right direction. And a slit to be inserted, and is mounted so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned such that the right side thereof is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 when assembled to the game board 5, and has a bonus winning opening 2006 and a peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500. , A space through which the game balls B can flow is formed. In the second attacker unit 2600, when assembled to the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes more rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the own weight of the transmission member. In this state, the special winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the special winning opening 2006 is closed by the special winning opening door 2611. That is, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be received in the bonus winning opening 2006.

  In this normal state, depending on a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the role is determined. When the object winning opening solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmitting member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the accessory winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmitting member is pulled upward. In addition, by sliding in the slit, the accessory winning opening door 2611 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 2611a.

  As a result, the upper end of the bonus winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, the bonus winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the bonus winning opening door 2611 is tilted down. It will be in the state of having done. That is, the bonus winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the bonus winning port door 2611, it rolls rightward due to its inclination, and is received in the bonus winning port 2006. The game ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 is detected by the bonus winning opening sensor 2601 and then guided by the guidance passage 2613 to be discharged backward. The game ball B released backward from the guidance passage 2613 is transferred to the distribution passage 3158 of the back right decoration unit 3140 in the back production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is either the V winning opening 2007 or the loss opening 2008. After being sorted into crabs, they are discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 via the lower front effect unit 3160.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 144 and the like. The right side middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022.

  In the right side middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward in the left-right direction with the width of one game ball B, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001. The second sub-out port 2022 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

  Also, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward to the first guiding path 2701 and the second guideout ball 202 received in the second sub-out 2022 guides the game ball B backward. And two guide passages 2702. The first guidance passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, and then bends rightward and further backwards. The second guide passage 2702 extends backward from the second sub-out port 2022 below the first guide passage 2701 and is bent rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

  When the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. I have.

  In the state in which the right side middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game balls B can flow is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 in the center role 2500. In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened slightly upward to a position slightly to the left of the bonus winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is located between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. Are open upward substantially over the entire area (see FIG. 144).

  The right side middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide path 2701, and is provided at the back. It can be delivered to the first back guidance passage 3156 of the back right decoration unit 3140 in the back rendering unit 3100 of the unit 3000. The game balls B transferred to the first back guide path 3156 are detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 through the lower front effect unit 3160. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2022 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and then provides the back unit provided behind. It can be delivered to the second back guiding passage 3157 of the back right decoration unit 3140 in the back front rendering unit 3100 of 3000. The game ball B transferred to the second back guide passage 3157 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 through the lower front effect unit 3160.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143 and the like. FIG. 142 (a) is a perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front, FIG. 142 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the gate member, and FIG. 143 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line S-A in FIG.

  The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is disposed between the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 and the middle right side unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Have been. The gate member 2800 includes a gate 2003 for performing a lottery of a normal lottery result for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor 2801 for detecting that the game ball B has passed the gate 2003. ,have. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate 2003.

  The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 projecting obliquely to the lower left from near the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B passing through the gate 2003 to the lower left. When the guide piece 2802 is assembled to the game board 5, the guide piece 2802 is inclined so that an extension thereof passes near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

  The gate member 2800 is located substantially at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 when assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both left and right outer sides. The ball B forms a gap through which the ball can flow. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left from directly below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500, and also to the right from above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

  The gate member 2800 will be described in more detail. The gate member 2800 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and holds a gate body 2810 holding the gate sensor 2801. And a gate seal 2811 on which decoration is printed. The gate main body 2810 is formed transparent.

  The gate main body 2810 is provided at a front plate portion 2810a in the shape of a flat plate that is long in the left and right directions, a sticking concave portion 2810b that is recessed rearward in a horizontally long rectangular shape on the front surface of the front plate portion 2810a, and an upper left corner of the sticking concave portion 2810b. Erroneous sticking prevention part 2810c, separation hole 2810d penetrating front plate part 2810a forward and backward near the right end of sticking concave part 2810b, and a pair of arm parts extending rearward from both left and right sides of front plate part 2810a. 2810e, and a flat flange portion 2810f extending outward from the rear ends of the pair of arm portions 2810e in the left-right direction and connected to each other at a position below the front plate portion 2810a.

  The surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e that face each other are farther apart than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. In addition, the flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel plate 1110 with its rear surface in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

  Further, the gate body 2810 is recessed in the vertical direction at a constant height on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and on each of the opposing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e, and the accommodation groove 2810g for accommodating the gate sensor 2801. A rear extension 2810h extending rearward from the rear end of the left arm 2810e to extend the arm 2810e and the accommodation groove 2810g; and a rear extension extending from the rear end of the right arm 2810e. And a locking portion 2810i for locking the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g.

  Further, the gate main body 2810 is provided with a projection 2810j projecting into the accommodation groove 2810g at a portion where the front plate 2810a and the left arm 2810e intersect. The protrusion 2810j is formed in a shape corresponding to the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. Further, the gate main body 2810 includes a guide piece 2802 extending downward from the lower surface of the right arm portion 2810e.

  The attaching concave portion 2810b of the gate main body 2810 is recessed rearward (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (see FIG. 143 (b)). The erroneous sticking prevention part 2810c is formed in a C-chamfer shape larger than the other corners of the sticking concave part 2810b. In this gate member 2800, since the gate seal 2811 (attachment concave portion 2810b) has a rectangular shape that is long in the left and right directions, it is difficult to recognize the up and down direction of the gate seal 2811, and there is a possibility that the gate seal 2811 may be stuck upside down. However, the sticking direction of the gate seal 2811 can be specified by the erroneous sticking prevention unit 2810c, and the gate seal 2811 can be specified in a regular direction (a direction in which the cutout 2811a of the gate seal 2811 matches the erroneous sticking prevention unit 2810c). Can be pasted. If the gate seal 2811 is attached to the sticking concave portion 2810b with the gate seal 2811 turned upside down, a part of the gate seal 2811 protrudes from the sticking concave portion 2810b due to the wrong sticking preventing portion 2810c. Incorrect sticking of the seal 2811 can be noticed.

  In the attachment concave portion 2810b, the left end portion and the oblique portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c are set as contact surfaces for attaching the gate seal 2811. Accordingly, a clearance for attaching the gate seal 2811 can be secured not only in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction of the obliquely extending portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c. In other words, the clearance directions effective when attaching the gate seal 2811 are set to three directions, that is, the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the oblique direction, so that the attaching operation can be easily performed (see FIG. 183 (a)).

  The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular hole extending vertically. The separation hole 2810d has a front side closed by a gate seal 2811 attached to the attachment concave part 2810b when assembled to the gate member 2800, and a rear side by a front surface of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g. It is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2810d becomes a closed space.

  The length of the long side and the short side of the separation hole 2810d of this embodiment is in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d is smaller than this, the diameter of the separating rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d becomes small, so that it becomes easy to bend and the gate seal 2811 may not be sufficiently pressed. This is because if the separation hole 2810d is larger than this, the portion of the gate seal 2811 where the separation hole 2531b is bent may cause deterioration of the appearance of the gate seal 2811.

  The separation hole 2810d has the right inner peripheral surface flush with the bottom surface (the surface facing left) of the accommodation groove 2810g formed in the right arm portion 2810e. The vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d. Is protruding short to the left.

  The separation hole 2810d has a function of removing a gate seal 2811 to be described later, and a core for forming a rear end of the locking portion 2810i that is under when the gate body 2810 is injection-molded. The gate main body 2810 can be easily formed by injection molding.

  The gate seal 2811 is formed to be slightly longer in the left-right direction than a shape that is offset inward at a fixed distance from the outer shape of the attachment concave portion 2810b. At the upper left corner of the gate seal 2811, a C-chamfered notch 2811a corresponding to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is formed, and the normal sticking direction (here, the vertical direction) with respect to the sticking concave portion 2810b can be seen. It has become. The entire back surface of the gate seal 2811 is an adhesive surface having adhesive strength.

  According to the gate member 2800 of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the gate seal 2811 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810, the gate body 2810 (the front plate portion) 2810a), a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear, and the tip thereof presses the gate seal 2811 from the rear to the front, so that the vicinity of the edge of the gate seal 2811 can be removed so as to be turned forward. The operator can easily remove the gate seal 2811 from the attaching concave portion 2810b by pulling the turned portion, and the gate seal 2811 can be attached again.

  Further, in a state where the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 are separated from each other, a bar-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810, and the gate seal 2811 is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof to attach the gate seal 2811. Since the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the recess 2810b, the replacement work of the gate seal 2811 accompanying the model change can be facilitated.

  Further, as described above, when the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 are separated from each other, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b using the separation hole 2810d. Therefore, the sorting operation for each material can be easily performed, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the separation hole 2810d can be hidden from the front by attaching the gate seal 2811 to the attachment concave portion 2810b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 2810d can be suppressed, and the separation hole 2810d can be prevented from being provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence, and to make it difficult to plan an illegal act using the separation hole 2810d.

  Also, in a state where the gate seal 2811 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from behind by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached. Since it does not penetrate a hole that passes to the rear as in a conventional pachinko machine, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can pass through the hole into the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. Can be prevented from being inserted into the device, and improper conduct can be prevented.

  Further, since the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front into the separation hole 2810d through the gate seal 2811, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 can further increase the size. Of the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 from the front through the separation hole 2810d, it is possible to prevent the intrusion of an unauthorized tool. It is possible to prevent the act from being performed, and since a mark is left on the gate seal 2811 when the unauthorized tool penetrates the gate seal 2811, it is possible to hesitate to execute the illegal act and the deterrence against the illegal act is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is provided in the sticking concave portion 2810b to which the gate seal 2811 is stuck, if the gate seal 2811 is turned upside down, the gate seal 2811 can be stuck correctly. It is possible to make the operator aware of the incorrect sticking of the gate seal 2811 and to stick the gate seal 2811 in a regular direction, and to stick the gate seal 2811 upside down. It is possible to prevent the product from being shipped while being attached.

  Further, in the gate body 2810, since the projection 2810j is provided in the accommodation groove 2810g, when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the accommodation groove 2810g from the rear in a direction in which the projection 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 do not coincide with each other, The front surface of the gate sensor 2801 abuts on the protrusion 2810j before abutting on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a, so that the locking portion 2810i cannot be locked on the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. That is, the locking portion 2810i is locked to the rear end of the gate sensor 2801 only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the accommodation groove 2810g so that the projection 2810j and the cutout portion 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 match. Since the sensor 2801 is held, it is possible to prevent the gate sensor 2801 from being assembled in an incorrect orientation, and to suppress the occurrence of a problem with the gate sensor 2801.

  Further, the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g of the gate main body 2810 from the rear, and the engagement portion 2810i is engaged with the gate sensor 2801. Thus, after the accommodation groove 2810g, the engagement portion 2810i, and the attachment concave portion 2810b. With the side, the movement of the gate sensor 2801 in the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction can be restricted and positioned, and the pachinko machine 1 (the gate member 2800) can be easily assembled on the pachinko machine 1. Cost can be reduced. At this time, since the separation hole 2810d is located at a position on the front side of the accommodation groove 2810g in the gate main body 2810, if the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g, the separation hole 2810d is moved from the rear by the front end of the gate sensor 2801. It will be closed. Therefore, in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is formed by the gate sensor 2801 mounted on the rear side of the gate main body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached (pasted). Because it is closed from the rear and does not penetrate the hole that passes to the rear like a conventional pachinko machine, a linear tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole. Can be avoided, and fraudulent acts can be prevented.

  In addition, as described above, since the gate sensor 2801 is locked to the locking portion 2810i of the gate main body 2810, the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted, so that the gate sensor 2801 has penetrated the gate seal 2811 and the separation hole 2810d from the front. Even if the gate sensor 2801 is pressed backward by an unauthorized tool, the backward movement of the gate sensor 2801 can be prevented by the locking of the locking portion 2810i, and the gate sensor 2801 closes the separation hole 2810d from behind. It is possible to maintain and prevent wrongdoing.

  Further, since the locking portion 2810i of the gate main body 2810 is projected into the front projection range of the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d also serves as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion 2810i is inserted. The gate body 2810 can be formed by injection molding.

  From the above, the following technical ideas A to C can be grasped.

[Technical Thought A]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a given decoration,
A decorative part to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole which penetrates the decorative part back and forth and presses the bonded decorative body from behind to be separable. A front member,
A passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from behind, and having a passage portion through which game media can flow,
The front member,
A receiving portion that extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated portion and is concave toward the front from the rear end and the separation hole is located at the front end side, and is capable of receiving at least a part of the passage member from the rear side; Are further included. "

  Here, the gate seal 2811 is a decorative member, the gate body 2810 is a front member, the affixed concave portion 2810b is a decorative portion, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is a passage portion, and the gate sensor 2801 is a passage member. , 2810 g of storage grooves correspond to the storage portions, respectively.

  Accordingly, in the front member, since the separation hole is located at a position on the front side of the housing portion, when the housing portion houses at least a part of the passage member, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the same operation and effect as described above.

  In addition, since the front member has a housing portion, at least a portion of the passage member is housed in the housing portion from the rear, so that the housing member allows the passage member to move vertically, horizontally, and forward. The positioning can be regulated and the gaming machine can be easily assembled, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Technical Thought B]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a given decoration,
A decorative part to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole which penetrates the decorative part back and forth and presses the bonded decorative body from behind to be separable. A front member,
A passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from behind, and having a passage portion through which game media can flow,
The front member,
And a locking portion for locking the passage member, the locking portion protruding into the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated portion.

  Here, the gate seal 2811 is a decorative member, the gate body 2810 is a front member, the affixed concave portion 2810b is a decorative portion, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is a passage portion, and the gate sensor 2801 is a passage member. , And the locking portions 2810i correspond to the locking portions, respectively.

  As a result, since the locking portion locked to the passage member projects into the front projection range of the separation hole, when the passage member is locked to the locking portion, the separation hole is closed from behind. The passage member is sandwiched between the rear side of the covering decorative portion and the locking portion, so that the separation hole can be closed by the passage member and the movement of the passage member in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

  In addition, as described above, since the passage member is locked to the locking portion, the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted. Therefore, the passage member is moved rearward from the front by an unauthorized tool penetrating the decorative body and the separation hole. Even if pressed, the rearward movement of the passage member can be prevented by the locking of the locking portion, and the closing of the separation hole by the passage member from the rear is prevented, thereby preventing fraud. Can be.

  Further, since the locking portion of the front member is projected into the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[Technical Thought C]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a given decoration,
The decorative part that is recessed rearward from the depth of the decorative body in the front-rear direction and the decorative body is attached from the front, the decorative body penetrating the decorative part back and forth, and A separating hole which is capable of being separated by pressing from the receiving portion, a receiving portion which extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated portion, is recessed forward from the rear end and is located at the front end side, and A front member having a locking portion projecting into the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated portion,
At least a part of the front portion is accommodated from behind in the accommodation portion so as to close the separation hole from behind, and the engagement portion is engaged with the engagement portion, and the passage portion through which the game medium can flow is formed. And a passage member having the same. "

  Here, the gate seal 2811 is a decorative member, the gate body 2810 is a front member, the affixed concave portion 2810b is a decorative portion, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is a passage portion, and the gate sensor 2801 is a passage member. , The accommodation groove 2810g corresponds to the accommodation part, and the locking part 2810i corresponds to the locking part.

  Thereby, the decorative body provided with the predetermined decoration is in contact with the to-be-decorated portion which is the front surface of the front member provided on the front side of the passage member having the passage portion through which the game medium flows. Therefore, the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body. In addition, since the decorative part to which the decorative body is to be attached is recessed backward from the depth of the decorative body in the front-rear direction, when the decorative body is attached to the decorative part, the decorative part of the front member is Since the surrounding portion projects forward from the front surface of the decorative body, the decorative body can be complemented by being bordered by the portion of the front member that projects forward, and the decorative effect of the decorative body decoration And the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, since the decorative part to which the decorative body is to be attached is recessed rearward, the decorative body is brought into the correct position by attaching the decorative body using the surrounding of the front part of the front member where the decorative part protrudes as a guide. The attachment can be easily performed, and the failure of the attachment of the decorative body can be reduced, so that an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In this gaming machine, since the decorative portion of the front member is recessed rearward, when the decorative body is in contact with the decorative portion, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorative portion is at a recessed position. Therefore, even if it is attempted to remove the decorative body attached to the decorated portion, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side, and it takes time to remove the decorative body. On the other hand, since the separation hole is provided in the decorated portion, the decoration body is easily released from the rear of the front member by pressing the decorative body forward through the separation hole through the rod-shaped member. The decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part. Therefore, at the time of manufacture, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorative portion of the front member, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body is pressed from the rear by the tip. By doing so, the contact with the decorated part can be easily released, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part, and the decorative body can be reattached. Further, in a state where the front member and the passage member are separated, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body is pressed by the tip from the rear, so that the decorative member can be easily brought into contact with the decorated portion. Since it can be released, the decorative body can be easily removed from the part to be decorated, and the replacement work of the decorative body accompanying the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, in a state where the front member and the passage member are separated from each other, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part by using the separation hole. Can be easily performed, and the cost of discarding the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In addition, since the decoration portion is provided with the separation hole, the separation hole can be made difficult to see or hide from the front by attaching the decorative body to the decoration portion, and the appearance of the separation hole is suppressed from being deteriorated. In addition to this, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware of the existence of the separation hole, and to make it difficult for the player to plan improper behavior through the separation hole.

  Then, at least a part of the passage member is accommodated from the rear in the accommodation portion of the front member, and the engagement portion is engaged with the passage member. The movement of the passage member in the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction can be regulated and positioned, so that the assembling of the gaming machine can be facilitated and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. At this time, since the separation hole is located in the front part of the front member on the front side of the storage portion, when at least a part of the passage member is stored in the storage portion, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. It will be. Therefore, when assembled in a gaming machine, the separation hole is closed from behind by a passage member attached to the rear side of the front member to which the decorative body is attached, and the conventional game machine Since it does not penetrate the hole that passes to the rear side like a machine, it is possible to prevent a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the gaming machine through the hole, and an illegal act is performed Can be prevented.

  Further, since the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front into the separation hole through the decorative body, the passage member prevents further insertion (intrusion) from the rear. Since it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the passage portion from the front through the separation hole, it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed, and the unauthorized tool can prevent the decoration from being performed. Since traces are left on the decorative body by penetrating, it is possible to hesitate to execute a wrongdoing, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine with high deterrence against wrongdoing.

  In addition, as described above, since the passage member is locked to the locking portion, the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted. Therefore, the passage member is moved rearward from the front by an unauthorized tool penetrating the decorative body and the separation hole. Even if pressed, the rearward movement of the passage member can be prevented by the locking of the locking portion, and the closing of the separation hole by the passage member from the rear is prevented, thereby preventing fraud. Can be.

  Further, since the locking portion of the front member is projected into the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137, FIG. 144, FIG. When assembled on the game board 5, a center role 2500 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at both left and right outer portions and a lower portion of the center role 2500. Further, on the left side of the center role item 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300, a windmill W that is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven into the left side of the center role 2500 into a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. The wind turbine W is adjusted so as to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than the above. Thus, the game ball B is driven down the left side of the center role 2500 to be able to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 with a certain probability.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center role item 2500 and the gate member 2800 are larger than the gaming balls B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted so as to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly flows on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the middle right side unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game balls B mainly flow on the left side of the middle right side unit 2700.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the left side of the center role 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 as shown in FIG. 137. By N, it is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 or a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. You are guided to enter.

  The game ball B guided to the site on the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 will be accepted. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the first discharge passage 3181 of the lower front production unit 3160 of the rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. Then, after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the site on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B not accepted in the general winning opening 2001 are discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

  The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is centered in the left and right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the lower side of the center role 2500. Side and may be accepted into the first opening 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstruction nails N arranged diagonally, and may flow down to the side unit 2200. May be accepted in the general winning opening 2001.

  The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from a central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the central discharge part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513 into the game area 5a, the central discharge part 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first discharge port 2513a has a high probability. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

  The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the lower front production unit 3160 of the rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. Then, after being detected by the first start-up port sensor 3002, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the first starting port sensor 3002 detects a game ball B, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  It should be noted that the game ball B flowing on the left side of the center role item 2500 in the game area 5a can pass through the gate 2003 or be accepted by the second starting port 2004, the special winning port 2005, and the special item winning port 2006. There is no sex.

  In the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right of the center role 2500 is accepted by the second starting port 2004 is higher than the game ball B hit to the left of the center role 2500. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Thus, when the special winning opening 2005 or the special winning opening 2006 is not in the open state, it is possible to urge the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center role 2500 ("left hit").

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game balls B enter the upper part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 above the lower part from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right with the strength that the game balls B enter. When driven, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength to abut against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly closer to the right than immediately above the gate 2003.

  The game balls B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 are caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800, on the left side of the gate member 2800, at the gate 2003. , The right side of the gate member 2800, and the like.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center role 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. It is released from below. The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided such that the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2022. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the second back guide path 3157 of the right front decoration unit 3140 of the back front rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a through the lower front effect unit 3160. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 is released to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed is performed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability that the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 will cause the side middle right unit 2700 to move. It flows down on the left side, and is occasionally accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the right side middle unit 2700, or in rare cases, in the second sub-out opening 2022. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and thereafter, the first back of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the guide passage 3156 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 through the lower front and rear effect unit 3160. At this time, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

  The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the play ball B of the second attacker unit 2600 is opened. Down the left.

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “per hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the role winning Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the bonus winning opening 2006.

  The game ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 is detected by the bonus winning opening sensor 2601, and then guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 outside the gaming area 5a. It is delivered to the distribution path 3158 of the right front decoration unit 3140 in the effect unit 3100. By detecting the game balls B by the bonus winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  The game balls B transferred to the distribution passage 3158 are distributed to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by driving the V distribution solenoid 3007. The game balls B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 are discharged to the substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003. On the other hand, the game balls B distributed to the loss opening 2008 are discharged to the substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the loss opening sensor 3004 without being detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003. When the game ball B is received in the V winning opening 2007, a privilege of opening and closing the special winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

  In addition, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the bonus winning opening 2006 without being accepted by the bonus winning opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500 and exits from the lower right guide passage 2530. From the first attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B discharged downward (obliquely lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly transmitted from the lower right guide passage 2530 to the first attacker unit 2400. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2425.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and rolls on the upper surface of the second starting door 2411 and the second shelf 2422. Then, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf 2422 to the left. Then, the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls on the third shelf 2423 or the special winning opening door 2413 according to the momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclination. Then, after rolling the fourth shelf portion 2424 from the special winning opening door 2413, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2424 to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

  By the way, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500, the upper ball 2436 does not flow down to the first shelf 2421 by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N. May flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2436 rolls to the left due to its inclination, is discharged to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2436, and then to the obstacle nail N implanted to the left. After contacting and turning downward and flowing near the left end of the upper surface of the special winning opening door 2413, the special winning opening door 2413 and the fourth shelf 2424 are rolled to the left and outside the first attacker unit 2400. Released to Therefore, even if the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf 2436, the game ball B may be released from the upper shelf 2436 depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released and the timing when the special winning opening 2005 is opened. May be acceptable.

  Also, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500, the ball rebounds to the right due to contact with the obstacle N or the right end of the upper shelf 2436, etc. By flowing down, the first shelf 2421 may roll rightward against its inclination and be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2421. The game ball B discharged to the right from the right end of the first shelf 2421 flows between the first standing wall portion 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433. Then, it rolls leftward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433 and is received in the first sub-out port 2021. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is transferred to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the lower front production unit 3160 in the rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, It is discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500 and the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery by passing the game ball B at the gate 2003, the second starting port Since the door 2411 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf 2421 to the left can be received in the second starting port 2004. There is. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start-up opening sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  When the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2422, the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is obtained. As a result, when the "big hit" is selected by lottery, the special winning opening door 2413 is moved and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2422 is removed. , With a high probability. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2422, the game ball B abuts on a step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436, and flows downward diagonally to the lower right, and the third shelf 2422 and the third The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2423 and the shelf 2423. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 passes between the third standing wall 2427 and the fourth standing wall 2428 and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2433. It falls, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and is received in the first sub-out port 2021.

  The game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role item 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is not accepted by any of the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the first sub-out port 2021. In this case, the game panel 1100 is discharged from the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  Therefore, in order to open and close the special winning opening 2005 and the special winning opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to receive the game ball B, and the “winning” or “ It is necessary to have a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to let the game ball B pass through the gate 2003 and draw (allocate) the "normal hit" as a result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the opportunity to accept the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player inserts the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center role 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting port 2002. The pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game by displaying the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002. Expectations can be raised for acceptance of

  Then, when the game ball B is accepted to the first starting port 2002 and the “special hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the special winning opening 2005 or the special winning opening 2006 is opened and closed. In order to allow the game ball B to be received in the special winning opening 2005 or the special winning opening 2006, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to “right-handed”, and the special winning opening 2005 or the special winning opening 2006 is changed. Of the game ball B to the player can be increased.

  At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center role 2500, and the guide passages to be circulated make it easier to pass through the gate 2003, Since the second sub-out port 2022 is easily accepted, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates in a desired guide path. Can be enjoyed.

  In addition, by performing “right strike”, by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003, there is a possibility that “normal hit” in which the second start port 2004 is in the open state may be drawn, Since the game ball B can be accepted by the second starting port 2004 and "winning hits" or "big hits" may be drawn, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be.

[5-8j. Magnetic sensor]
Subsequently, the plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and the like. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of the magnetic sensors. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting a magnetic line of force from a magnet, and FIG. 147 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of a magnetic sensor which cannot detect a magnetic line of force from a magnet; () Is an explanatory view schematically showing a detection range by a magnetic sensor in a perspective view, and (d) is an explanatory view showing a positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body in which magnetic lines of force from a magnet cannot be detected; FIG. 4E is an explanatory diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view showing a state where the magnetic sensor is held by the holding member, FIG. 148 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the state where the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded view showing a cross section of the holding member.

  A plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided on the game board 5, and are for detecting illegal magnetism (lines of magnetic force) acting in the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 148 (c), the magnetic sensor 1050 includes a sensor main body 1051 for detecting magnetism, a sensor substrate 1052 having a white surface on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted, a sensor substrate 1052, and the sensor main body 1051. And a transparent sensor case 1053 covering the sensor case. Although not shown, an IC, a transistor, a resistor, a diode, a connector, and the like are mounted on the sensor substrate 1052 in addition to the sensor body 1051.

  The magnetic sensor 1050 has a rectangular shape in plan view, is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape having a height smaller than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one part of the side in the height direction is C-chamfered. The magnetic sensor 1050 can visually recognize the internal sensor body 1051 and the sensor substrate 1052 from the outside through the transparent sensor case 1053.

  The magnetic sensor 1050 can detect the passage of a magnetic field line parallel to the longest long side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the magnet 1055 are in a positional relationship as shown in FIG. 147 (a), the line of magnetic force of the magnet 1055 passes in a direction parallel to the long side, so that the magnetism (line of magnetic force) of the magnet 1055 Can be detected.

  On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the magnet 1055 are in a positional relationship as shown in FIG. 147 (b), the line of magnetic force of the magnet 1055 is perpendicular to the long side (with respect to the rectangular surface formed by the long side and the short side). In the vertical direction), the magnetism (lines of magnetic force) of the magnet 1055 cannot be detected.

  For this reason, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a magnetism detection area of the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side in the long side direction around the magnetic sensor 1050 as shown by hatching in FIG. 147 (c). Has DA. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-type detection area DA in which two spheres are combined.

  Then, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are respectively provided in appropriate directions. Each magnetic sensor 1050 has an illegal magnet acting near the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, and the warp entrance 2511 in the gaming area 5a. Are arranged so as to be detected. In other words, each of the magnetic fields is set such that the area in the gaming area 5a where the misconduct using the magnet is predicted to be performed is included in the detection area DA of the magnetic sensor 1050 (the area indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 146). The sensor 1050 is arranged in an appropriate direction.

  Also, in the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 is provided with a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a bonus winning port solenoid 2612, a V distribution solenoid, and a drive motor provided in the back unit 3000. In order not to detect magnetism (lines of magnetic force), each detection area DA is prevented from being applied to the solenoid or the drive motor.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (d), when the magnetic body 1056 is arranged in parallel with the magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect the magnetic line of force from the magnet 1055, the magnetic line of force is drawn to the magnetic body 1056, The lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 may decrease, and the magnetic sensor 1050 may not be able to detect the lines of magnetic force (magnetism) from the magnet 1055.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (e), when the magnetic body 1057 is arranged in series with the magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting the magnetic line of force from the magnet 1055, the magnetic field line is attracted by the magnetic body 1057, so that the magnetic field is drawn. The lines of magnetic force passing through the sensor 1050 can be increased. Thereby, the magnetism of the distant magnet 1055 or the magnet 1055 having a weak magnetic force can be detected.

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board using a screw made of a magnetic material, depending on the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the screw, the magnetic field lines from the magnet for performing the wrongdoing may be lost. In addition, there is a problem in that the magnetic force lines passing through the magnetic sensor decrease due to being attracted to the screw having high magnetic permeability, and it becomes impossible to detect the approach of the magnet. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached without using a screw.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding member 1060 has a housing 1061 that can house the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side, and an elastic claw 1062 that is locked to the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in the housing 1061. Further, the holding member 1060 has a projection 1063 projecting from the leg of the elastic claw 1062 into the housing 1061. This holding member 1060 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin.

  When the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted into the housing 1061 from the outside, the holding member 1060 elastically deforms the elastic claw 1062 in a direction away from the housing 1061, and when the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the housing 1061, the elastic claw 1062 returns and is locked to the magnetic sensor 1050. At this time, the protrusion 1063 provided on the leg portion of the elastic claw 1062 is in contact with the magnetic sensor 1050, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed against a portion of the inner surface of the housing 1061 opposite to the elastic claw 1062. I have.

  The locking of the elastic claws 1062 can prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from moving in the direction in which the magnetic sensor 1050 comes out of the housing portion 1061, and can prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from falling off. In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed into the housing 1061 by the contact of the protrusion 1063, rattling of the magnetic sensor 1050 in the housing 1061 can be prevented.

  As described above, since the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding member 1060 from drawing magnetic lines of magnetic force from the magnet when the magnet approaches the game area 5a. It is possible to prevent the magnetic field lines passing through 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, to detect fraudulent acts using the magnets at an early stage, and to notify the suspicious magnetism detection by the magnetic sensor 1050 to inform the fraudulent acts. Can be discouraged, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to fraudulent acts can be provided.

  In addition, the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material can prevent the lines of magnetic force from being drawn from the magnets and prevent a decrease in the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. The magnetism acting on the game area 5a can be effectively detected by the sensor 1050, the number of the magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced as compared with the related art, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. .

  Also, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding member 1060. Without using the screws described above, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claws 1062, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged (pressed) by the protrusion 1063 of the holding member 1060 toward the housing portion 1061, the fine vibration of the magnetic sensor 1050 due to the force of the protrusion 1063 can be suppressed. Disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 or occurrence of poor contact due to the vibration can be reduced, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

  Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material and provided on the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 attached to the game board 5 is located at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050. Alternatively, it can be provided at a position outside the magnetic detection area DA in the game area 5a. Thereby, the influence of a magnetic material such as a screw for attaching the holding member 1060 to the game board 5 can be reduced as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 reliably detects the magnetism acting on the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent acts using magnets.

  Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by a transparent holding member 1060 so as to be visible, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor body mounted on the sensor substrate 1052 through the transparent sensor case 1053 is provided. 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051 of a different color (for example, black) can be made to stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a genuine one. Can be hesitated, the deterrence against fraudulent acts can be enhanced, and the burden on the gaming hall on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

  Further, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is made white, the sensor substrate 1052 can be made inconspicuous, and the sensor substrate 1052 can be formed as a decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. Can be mistaken. Therefore, even if the sensor substrate 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, a normal player is not bothered and the appearance in the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated.

  Further, since the sensor main body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be viewed from the outside, the presence or absence of damage to the sensor main body 1051 can be checked from the outside, so that the maintenance work of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to reduce the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 149 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism (not shown) for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a back front effecting unit 3100 provided near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back rear effect provided on the upper side of the back box 3010 behind the back front effecting unit 3100. It comprises a unit 3200 and a lower back lower production unit 3300 provided below the rear upper production unit in the lower box 3010.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the effect display device 1600 is recessed from the inside of the frame to the right on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and a liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch portion 3010d which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the left side in the up-down direction and to which the lock mechanism is attached.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. The lock mechanism is attached to the back box 3010 so that the lock mechanism can slide up and down on the left side of the rear surface of the notch 3010d in the rear view.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, a boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the back front effecting unit 3100 and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000 and the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 and the general winning opening sensor 3001. The first starting opening sensor 3002 to be performed, the V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 after being received in the bonus winning opening 2006, and the after being received in the bonus winning opening 2006 And a loss sensor 3004 for detecting the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

  Further, the back unit 3000 can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and can move the V winning opening door 3006 forward and backward to reciprocate the game ball received in the role winning opening 2006. And a V distribution solenoid 3007 for distributing B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. The general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the V winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the V winning opening door 3006, and the V distribution solenoid 3007 are provided in the front effect unit 3100. .

[5-9a. Ura-mae production unit]
Subsequently, the back-side effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back front effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 151 (a) is a perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 151 (b) is a perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 152 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the front-side production unit cut in the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part in (a), and (c) is It is an expanded sectional view of the right part in (a). FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decorative unit of the back front effecting unit as viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. FIG. 154 is an exploded view of the back front left decorative unit, and only the back front left first decorative body, the back front left second decorative body, the back front left third decorative body, and the back front left decorative body base are viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back front left first decorative body shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is It is a front view of the back front left decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state.

  FIG. 156 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate, the light guide plate, and the decorative board for causing the front front left decorative unit to emit light, and FIG. 156 (b) shows the front front effect unit. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the relationship between a light guide plate and a decorative substrate for light-emitting decoration of a decorative body of the lower rear effect unit in FIG. FIG. 157 is a front view showing a state in which the back front left decorative unit is decorated with light emission. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate emits light, and FIG. 158 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate emits light. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a light emitting configuration of a second pattern of the light guide plate. FIG. 160 is a front view of the front-side effect unit shown in a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate emits light.

  The back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end in the back box 3010. The back front effecting unit 3100 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 provided at the center in front view, a back front left decorative unit 3120 provided on the left end side of the light guide plate 3110, and a right end portion of the light guide plate 3110. The right front decoration unit 3140 provided on the side and the lower end of the left front decoration unit 3120 and the right front decoration unit 3140 provided on the lower end side of the light guide plate 3110 are connected to each other. It includes a back front lower rendering unit 3160, and an upper connection base 3190 connecting the upper ends of the front left decoration unit 3120 and the front right decoration unit 3140.

  The back front right decoration unit 3140 is received in the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600. A V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B that is later distributed to the V winning opening 2007, and a gaming ball B that is distributed to the losing opening 2008 after being received in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600. Losing opening sensor 3004. In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 is a V winning opening door for distributing the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the loss opening 2008. 3006, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 for moving the V winning opening door 3006 back and forth (open / close).

  The lower front production unit 3160 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a game ball B received in a first starting opening 2002 of the starting unit 2100. And a first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back front effecting unit 3100 includes a first pattern 3111 (see FIG. 158 (a)) displayed by emitting light by reflecting only light from the left and right, and only light from a specific part below. 158 (see FIG. 158 (b)). That is, the light guide plate 3110 includes a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the back front left decorative board 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120, and the back front right first decorative board 3148 and the back front right in the back front right decorative unit 3140, which will be described later. When the second decorative substrate 3149 and the plurality of LEDs for the light guide plate of the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 emit light, the first pattern 3111 can be displayed by light emission. In addition, when the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 emit light, the second pattern 3112 can be displayed by light emission.

  As shown, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a pattern in which the letter “A” in the center is designed and a pattern in which “wings” on both left and right outer sides are expanded. . As shown in the drawing, the first pattern 3111 is configured such that the density and luminosity of the luminescent display differ depending on the part of the pattern, and the design and decorativeness of the pattern are enhanced. More specifically, in FIG. 158 (a), the first pattern 3111 is formed by a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED, and the shaded portion is the darkest in FIG. The portion is composed of a plurality of points that emit light by dispersing the cocktail light from the LED, and the other shaded portions are composed of a plurality of lines that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED.

  Here, the cocktail light is light of a color including two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is emitted to the spectral light emitting portion as cocktail light, the yellow light component is split into red light and green light, and red or green light is emitted at the site. A part that looks green appears. Alternatively, when white light is emitted to the spectral light emitting section as cocktail light, the white light component is split into red light, green light, and blue light, and a portion that looks red, green, or blue in the relevant portion or Thus, light of a color in which they are mixed appropriately appears, and rainbow-colored light emission can be exhibited. When light of only one of the three primary colors of light is irradiated to the spectral light emitting section, the light emits with the light of the color because there is no component to be separated. For this reason, the spectral light-emitting unit can emit light in a single color or emit light in multiple colors depending on the color of the light to be irradiated, and can perform a wider variety of light emission effects. it can.

  The LED (light guide plate LED 3128g or the like) for causing the first pattern 3111 to emit light includes a back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and a back front right first decorative board 3148 of the back front right decorative unit 3140. , A back front right second decorative board 3149 and a back front right light guide plate decorative board 3150.

  The second picture 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is constituted by a plurality of lines 3113 (straight lines) extending radially upward with a plurality of portions near the lower end spaced apart in the left-right direction. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED 3176 of the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate, which will be described later. The plurality of lines 3113 constituting the second picture 3112 are formed so as to reflect only the light from the corresponding LED 3176 forward, and are formed so that each can independently emit light. ing.

  In the second pattern 3112, the plurality of lines 3113 are, from the left, five line groups 3114 of a first line group 3114a, a second line group 3114b, a third line group 3114c, a fourth line group 3114d, and a fifth line group 3114e. Are divided into Each line group 3114 includes five lines 3113 from the left, a first line 3113a, a second line 3113b, a third line 3113c, a fourth line 3113d, and a fifth line 3113e. The five lines 3113 from the first line 3113a to the fifth line 3113e in one line group 3114 have their lower ends arranged at the same position, and extend radially upward with the lower end as a center.

  By the light-emitting display of the second picture 3112, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect such as a searchlight from below on the concert stage, and to show the inside of the game area 5a brilliantly, and to enjoy the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  The LED 3176 for causing the second picture 3112 to emit light is mounted on the left decorative board 3174 under the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 under the light guide plate of the lower front effect unit 3160 in the rear front effect unit 3100.

[5-9a-2. Back front left decorative unit]
The back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front effecting unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and is a long front and rear back logo composed of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. A decorative part 3121, a front upper left logo decorative part 3122 which is provided above the back front left logo decorative part 3121 and has a pattern of the letter "A", and is provided to the left of the rear front left logo decorative part 3121. And a back front left sub-decoration part 3123.

  The back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a transparent front back left first decorative body 3124 having a rectangular shape in front view that is long vertically and a transparent back front left provided behind the back front left first decorative body 3124. The second decorative body 3125, the transparent back left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the transparent provided behind the back front left third decorative body 3126 And a back front left decorative body base 3127.

  In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 is a back surface for causing the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front left upper logo decoration portion 3122, and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123 to emit light. A front left decorative board 3128, a back front left upper decorative board 3129 for illuminating the back front upper left logo decorative section 3122, and a back face for illuminating the back front left logo decorative section 3121 and the back front left sub decorative section 3123. And a front lower left decorative substrate 3130.

  Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a back front left reflector 3131 provided on the right side of the back front left decorative board 3128, and a back front left upper reflector 3132 provided below the back front left upper decorative board 3129. , A lower back left lower reflector 3133 provided above the lower back left decorative board 3130.

  The back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a left diffusion lens 3134 provided between the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127.

  The back front left first decorative body 3124 includes a back front left second decorative body 3125, a back front left third decorative body 3126, a left diffusion lens 3134, and a back front left decorative body base so as to sandwich the left end of the light guide plate 3110. It is attached to the front of 3127. The back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a transparent plate shape and a vertically long rectangle. The back front left first decorative body 3124 has a partition decorative part 3124a extending left and right and penetrating back and forth at a position approximately 3/4 from the bottom.

  The back front left first decorative body 3124 has a plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b penetrating front and rear. The plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b are provided near the upper end and the lower end and near the upper right end of the partitioning decorative portion 3124a. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b is formed in a rhombus shape in which four sides of a square are replaced by arcs bulging inward.

  In addition, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is provided below the partitioning decorative part 3124a on the front surface and forms a part of the back front left logo decorative part 3121, and the first front left logo decorative part 3124c; And a relief-shaped first back left logo decoration 3124d provided at a position corresponding to the first front left logo decoration 3124c on the rear surface. The right side of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a shape along the character string of the logo of the first front left logo decorative part 3124c and the first back left logo decorative part 3124d.

  The back front left first decorative body 3124 is provided in a relief shape above the partitioning decorative part 3124a on the back surface, and constitutes a part of the back front left upper logo decorative part 3122, and the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e. A plurality of first left sub-decoration portions 3124f provided in a relief shape to the left of the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d on the back surface and forming a part of the back front left sub-decoration portion 3123; have. The first upper left logo decoration 3124e constitutes the outermost part of the back upper left logo decoration 3122. The first left sub-decoration portion 3124f is formed into a cloisonne pattern in which circles of the same size are overlapped by quarters to extract a portion of one circle, and a rhombus pattern in which the outer circle of the cloisonne pattern is eliminated. And are lined up and down.

  The back front left first decorative body 3124 is shown as opaque in FIG. 153 and FIG. 154 and the like, but is actually transparent and is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (a). The first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, and the first left sub decoration part 3124f can be visually recognized.

  The back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the back front left second decorative body 3125 in a state assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, and the right side is located rearward with respect to the left side. (See FIG. 152). In the assembled state, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is positioned such that the left side surface is in contact with the right side surface of the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the back side is located on the left side. The first lower LED 3128a and the first upper LED 3128b of the front left decorative board 3128 are located. In the assembled state, the first LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is located above the upper surface of the back front left first decorative body 3129, and the first LED of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is located below the lower surface in the assembled state. One LED 3130a is located.

  When the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the back front left first decorative body 3124 becomes a substrate holding unit of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part are formed by light incident inside from a portion below the partition decoration part 3124a on the left side through 3125b and light incident inside from the lower surface through the lower part. 3124d and the first left sub-decoration unit 3124f perform light emission decoration. At this time, the inner surface of the partitioning decorative portion 3124a and the inner surface of the penetrating decorative portion 3124b provided near the lower end are also illuminated.

  In addition, in the partition decoration part 3124a, when the light that has entered inside from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decoration board 3128 or the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decoration board 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the inner peripheral surface is reflected toward the inside below the partition decorative portion 3124a, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3124a. Then, when the light emitted to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a, and the rest is partitioned from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3124a. Will be incident on the inner side above. As described above, since the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 passes through the partitioning decorative portion 3124a, it is greatly dimmed. Light from the first lower LED 3128a of the left decorative board 3128 or the first LED 3130a of the lower left front decorative board 3130 is almost illuminated (light emitting decoration) on the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e above the partition decorative part 3124a. However, only the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, and the first left sub decoration part 3124f can be displayed brightly.

  In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the front left front decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the front left upper decorative board 3129 emit light, the back front left first decorative body 3124 becomes the substrate of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e performs light emission decoration by light incident inside from a portion above the partition decoration portion 3124a on the left side via the holding portion 3125b or light incident inside from the upper surface. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration part 3124a and the penetrating decoration part provided above the partition decoration part 3124a also perform luminous decoration.

  In addition, in the partitioning decorative portion 3124a, when light incident inside from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the first LED of the back front left upper decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the peripheral surface is reflected toward the inside above the decorative partition 3124a, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the decorative partition 3124a. Then, when the light emitted to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a, and the rest is partitioned from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3124a. Will be incident on the inner side below. As described above, since the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 passes through the partitioning decorative portion 3124a, it is greatly dimmed. By the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the front upper left decorative board 3129, the first front left logo decorative section 3124c and the first back left logo decorative section 3124d below the partition decorative section 3124a, The first left sub-decoration part 3124f is hardly light-emission display (light-emission decoration), and only the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e and the upper through decoration part 3124b can be light-emission-displayed.

  As described above, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is configured such that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminous decorated (luminous display) with the partition decorative part 3124a as a boundary.

  The back front left second decorative body 3125 is formed entirely transparent, and has a flat decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the back front left first decorative body 3124, and a periphery excluding the right side of the decorative plate portion 3125a ( (A left side, an upper side, and a lower side). The substrate holding portion 3125b extends outward beyond the decorative plate portion 3125a, protrudes forward, and is recessed forward from the rear side. The board holding part 3125b cooperates with the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 to pinch and hold the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front left upper decorative board 3129, and the back front left lower decorative board 3130. It is for doing. The back front left second decorative body 3125 is inclined such that the front surface of the substrate holding portion 3125b is parallel to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3125a is located on the right side more rearward than the left side. ing.

  In addition, the back front left second decorative body 3125 has a partition decorative part 3125c extending left and right and penetrating forward and backward at a position about 3/4 of the height from below in the decorative plate part 3125a. I have. The partition decorative portion 3125c has the same size and the same height as the partition decorative portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

  In addition, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided below the partitioning decorative part 3125c on the rear surface, and forms a part of the back front left logo decorative part 3121. 3125d. The right side of the back front left second decorative body 3125 is formed in a shape along the character string of the logo of the second back left logo decorative part 3125d.

  In addition, the back left front second decorative body 3125 is provided in a relief shape above the partitioning decorative portion 3125c on the back surface, and constitutes a part of the back front left upper logo decorative portion 3122, the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e. A plurality of second left sub-decoration portions 3125f provided in a relief shape on the left side of the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d on the back surface and constituting a part of the back front left sub-decoration portion 3123; have. The second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e is formed to be one size smaller than the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124. The second left sub-decoration portion 3125f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decoration portion 3124f, and is formed in a similar shape that is slightly smaller.

  The back front left second decorative body 3125 is shown as opaque in FIG. 153 and FIG. 154 and the like, but is actually transparent, so is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (b). The second back left logo decoration part 3125d, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, and the second left sub decoration part 3125f can be visually recognized.

  In the state where the back front left second decorative body 3125 is assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3125a as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. A back front left third decorative body 3126 is located rearward. In the assembled state, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is mounted on the front holding side of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the back front left reflector 3131, and the back front left upper decorative board 3129 in the board holding portion 3125b that is recessed forward. The front end side of the back front upper left reflector 3132, and the front end side of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 and the back front lower left reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The second lower LED 3128c and the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 are located on the left side of the left side of the decorative plate portion 3125a, the second LED of the upper front decorative board 3129 is located above the upper surface, and the rear side is located below the lower surface. The second LED 3130b of the lower left decorative substrate 3130 is located respectively.

  The back front left second decorative body 3125 emits light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130, from the partition decorative portion 3125c on the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3125a. Also, the second back left logo decoration 3125d and the second left sub-decoration 3125f are illuminated with light that has entered the interior from below and the light that has entered the interior from the lower surface of the decorative plate 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration part 3125c is also illuminated.

  In addition, in the partition decoration part 3125c, when the light that has entered inside from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the inner peripheral surface is reflected toward the inside below the partition decorative portion 3125c, and the remainder is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3125c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the rest is separated from the internal peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3125c. Will be incident on the inner side above. As described above, since the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 passes through the partitioning decorative portion 3125c, it is greatly dimmed. Light from the second lower LED 3128c of the left decorative board 3128 or the second LED 3130b of the lower left front decorative board 3130 is almost illuminated (light emitting decoration) on the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e above the partition decorative part 3125c. However, only the second back left decoration part 3125d and the second left sub decoration part 3125f can be displayed brightly.

  In addition, the back front left second decorative body 3125 emits the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129, and the partition decorative section on the left surface of the decorative plate section 3125a. The second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e performs light emission decoration by light incident inside from a portion above the 3125c or light incident inside from the upper surface of the decoration plate portion 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3125c is also illuminated.

  In addition, in the partitioning decorative portion 3125c, when the light that has entered inside from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the second LED of the back front left upper decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the peripheral surface is reflected toward the inside above the decorative partition 3125c, and the rest is emitted from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the decorative partition 3125c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the rest is separated from the internal peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3125c. Will be incident on the inner side below. As described above, since the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 passes through the partitioning decorative portion 3125c, it is greatly dimmed. By the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the front left upper decorative board 3129, the second back left logo decorative section 3125d and the second left sub decorative section 3125f below the partition decorative section 3125c are almost all. Light emission display (light emission decoration) is not performed, and only the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e can be displayed brightly.

  As described above, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminous decoration (luminous display) with the partition decoration part 3125c as a boundary.

  The back front left third decorative body 3126 is formed entirely transparent, and is a flat plate-shaped decorative plate part parallel to the decorative plate part 3125a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the back front left second decorative body 3125. 3126a, and a flange 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) excluding the right side of the decorative plate portion 3126a. The back front left third decorative body 3126 is inclined so that the rear surface of the flange portion 3126b is parallel to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3126a is located on the right side more rearward than the left side. I have.

  In addition, the back front left third decorative body 3126 has a partition decorative part 3126c extending left and right and penetrating back and forth at a position about 3/4 from the bottom of the decorative plate part 3126a. I have. The partition decorative portion 3126c is formed to have the same size and the same height as the partition decorative portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

  The back front left third decorative body 3126 is provided below the partitioning decorative part 3126c on the rear surface and forms a part of the back front left logo decorative part 3121. 3126d. The right side of the back front left third decorative body 3126 is formed in a shape along the character string of the logo of the third back left logo decorative part 3126d.

  The back front left third decorative body 3126 is provided in a relief shape above the partitioning decorative part 3126c on the back surface, and forms a part of the back front left upper logo decorative part 3122, and is a third upper left logo decorative part 3126e. A plurality of third left sub-decoration portions 3126f provided in a relief shape to the left of the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d on the back surface and constituting a part of the back front left sub-decoration portion 3123; have. The third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e is formed to be one size smaller than the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The third left sub-decoration portion 3126f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decoration portion 3124f, and has the same size between the first left sub-decoration portion 3124f and the second left sub-decoration portion 3125f. It is formed in a suitable shape.

  The back front left third decorative body 3126 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154 and the like, but is actually transparent, and therefore is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (c). The third back left logo decoration part 3126d, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and the third left sub decoration part 3126f can be visually recognized.

  The back front left third decorative body 3126 is assembled with the back front left decorative unit 3120, and as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the back front left first in front of the decorative plate portion 3126a. The decorative plate portion 3125a of the second decorative body 3125 is located, and the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located behind. In the assembled state, the back front left third decorative body 3126 has the third lower LED 3128e and the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 on the left side of the left side of the decorative plate portion 3126a, and the rear side on the upper side. The third LED 3130c of the front lower left decorative board 3130 is located below the lower surface of the front left upper decorative board 3129, respectively.

  When the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is separated from the partitioning decorative part 3126c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3126a. The third back left logo decoration 3126d and the third left sub-decoration 3126f are illuminated and decorated by light that has entered the interior from below and the light that has entered the interior from the lower surface of the decoration plate 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration part 3126c is also illuminated.

  In addition, in the partitioning decorative portion 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the inside below the partitioning decorative portion 3126c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partitioning decorative portion 3126c. Then, when the light emitted to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3126c, and the rest is partitioned from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3126c. Will be incident on the inner side above. As described above, since the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 passes through the partitioning decorative portion 3126c, it is greatly reduced. Light from the third lower LED 3128e of the left decorative board 3128 or the third LED 3130c of the front lower left decorative board 3130 almost causes the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e above the partition decorative part 3126c to emit light (emission decoration). However, only the third back left logo decoration section 3126d and the third left sub decoration section 3126f can be displayed brightly.

  In addition, the back front left third decorative body 3126 emits the third upper LED 3128f of the front front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED of the front front left upper decorative substrate 3129, and the partition decorative portion on the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a. The third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e performs light emission decoration by light incident inside from a portion above the 3126c and light incident inside from the upper surface of the decoration plate portion 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration part 3126c is also illuminated.

  In addition, in the partitioning decorative portion 3126c, when light incident inside from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the third LED of the back front left upper decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the peripheral surface is reflected toward the inner side above the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3126c. Then, when the light emitted to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3126c, and the rest is partitioned from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3126c. Will be incident on the inner side below. As described above, since the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 passes through the partitioning decorative portion 3126c, it is greatly dimmed. By the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the front left upper decorative board 3129, the third back left logo decorative section 3126d and the third left sub decorative section 3126f below the partition decorative section 3126c are almost all. No luminous display (luminous decoration) is performed, and only the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e can be luminously displayed.

  As described above, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is configured such that the upper side and the lower side can be independently illuminated (luminous display) with the boundary decorative section 3126c as a boundary.

  The back front left decorative body base 3127 is formed entirely transparent, and is a flat plate-shaped decorative plate portion 3127a and a substrate provided around the decorative plate portion 3127a except for the right side (left side, upper side, lower side). Holding part 3127b. The decorative plate portion 3127a is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The substrate holding portion 3127b extends outward beyond the decorative plate portion 3127a, has a rear surface located rearward, and is recessed rearward from the front side. The board holding part 3127b cooperates with the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 to pinch the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front left upper decorative board 3129, and the back front left lower decorative board 3130. It is for holding. In addition, the left end of the upper connection base 3190 is attached to the upper part of the substrate holding part 3127b, and the left end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the lower front effect unit 3160 is attached to the lower part.

  In addition, the back front left decorative body base 3127 extends vertically over the entire width at a constant height in the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a, and is provided at intervals vertically. Three back front left belt decorative portions 3127c, and a base left upper logo decorative portion 3127d provided in a relief shape near the upper portion on the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a and constituting a part of the front front left upper logo decorative portion 3122; ,have. The upper left logo decorative portion 3127d is formed to be one size smaller than the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e of the third front decorative body 3126 on the back front.

  The back front left decorative body base 3127 is shown as opaque in FIG. 153 and FIG. 154 and the like, but is actually transparent, so as shown in FIG. 155 (d), the back provided from the front to the back. The front left belt decoration portion 3127c and the upper left logo decoration portion 3127d can be visually recognized.

  In the state where the back front left decorative body base 3127 is assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located in front of the decorative plate portion 3127a. In the assembled state, the back front left decorative body base 3127 is attached to the back front left decorative board 3128 and the back front left reflector 3131 at the rear end side and the back front left upper decorative board 3129 on the board holding portion 3127b that is recessed rearward. The rear end of the front left upper reflector 3132, the rear lower left decorative board 3130 and the rear lower left reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The lower base LED 3128h and the upper base LED 3128i of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a, respectively.

  When the lower base LED 3128h of the back front left decorative board 3128 emits light, the back front left decorative body base 3127 can make the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the decorative plate portion 3127a emit light. Each of the three back front left band decoration portions 3127c can be independently illuminated. In addition, the back front left decorative body base 3127 can make the base left upper logo decorative portion 3127d emit light by emitting the LED 3128i on the base of the back front left decorative board 3128.

  The back front left decorative substrate 3128 is in the shape of a flat plate that is long in the vertical direction, and the plate surface faces in the left-right direction. The back front left decorative substrate 3128 includes a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125 decorative plate portion 3125a, a back front left third decorative body 3126 decorative plate portion 3126a, and a back front left decorative. It is arranged on the left side of decorative plate portion 3127a of body base 3127. The back front left decorative board 3128 is sandwiched together with the back front left reflector 3131 between the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127. ing.

  The back front left decorative substrate 3128 is located to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124, and is provided with a plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a provided below the partitioning decorative portion 3124a, and the back front left first decorative body. A plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b provided to the left of 3124 and above the partition decoration part 3124a, and a partition decoration located to the left of the decoration plate part 3125a of the back front left second decoration 3125. The plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c provided below the portion 3125c and the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125 are located to the left of the partition decorative portion 3125c. A plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d and a plurality of third lower LEDs 31 located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and provided below the partition decorative portion 3126c. And 8e, located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and a, a plurality of third upper LED3128f provided above the separator decorative portion 3126C.

  In addition, the back front left decorative board 3128 includes a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g located to the left of the left diffusion lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110), and the front front of the back front left decorative body base 3127 in the decorative plate portion 3127a. Three base lower LEDs 3128h located on the left side of the left belt decorative portion 3127c, and a plurality of bases located on the left side of the upper left logo decorative portion 3127d in the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back front left decorative body base 3127. And an upper LED 3128i.

  When the plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 emit light, the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 are illuminated. Can be. When the plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 emit light, the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated. When the plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 emit light, the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be light-emitting decorated. When the plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 emit light, the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated.

  When the plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 emit light, the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the like can be light-emitting decorated. When the plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 emit light, the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be light-emitting decorated.

  When the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 emit light, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed through the left diffusion lens 3134. When a plurality (three) of the base lower LEDs 3128h of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 emit light, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be light-emitting decorated. When the plurality of base LEDs 3128i of the back front left decorative board 3128 emit light, the base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be light-emitting decorated.

  First lower LED 3128a, first upper LED 3128b, second lower LED 3128c, second upper LED 3128d, third lower LED 3128e, third upper LED 3128f, light guide plate LED 3128g, lower base mounted on the right side of the back front left decorative board 3128 The LED 3128h and the LED 3128i on the base are full-color LEDs.

  The front left front decorative substrate 3128 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, the back front left decorative board 3128 can be made hard to see, and the light from the mounted LED can be reflected, and the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo The decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123, and the like can be light-emitting decorated more brightly. In addition, the back front left decorative board 3128 uses ink of a color (for example, yellow) with high lightness or saturation to prevent confusion with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. This makes characters and symbols less noticeable. Although not shown, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, and the like are mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128 in addition to the LED.

  The back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is in the shape of a flat plate that is long in the left and right direction, with the plate surface facing up and down. The back front upper left decorative board 3129 includes a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125 decorative plate section 3125a, a back front left third decorative body 3126 decorative plate section 3126a, and a back front left decorative. It is arranged above decorative plate portion 3127a of body base 3127. The back front upper left decorative board 3129 is sandwiched together with the back front upper left reflector 3132 between the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127. ing.

  Although not shown, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 includes a plurality of first LEDs provided above the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a decorative plate portion 3125 a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It includes a plurality of second LEDs provided above and a plurality of third LEDs provided above the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

  When the plurality of first LEDs of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 emit light, the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the like can be illuminated. When the plurality of second LEDs on the back front left upper decorative substrate 3129 emit light, the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e and the like of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated. When the plurality of third LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 emit light, the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be light-emitting decorated.

  The plurality of first, second, and third LEDs mounted on the lower surface of the back upper left decorative board 3129 are full-color LEDs.

  The front left upper decorative board 3129 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to make the back front upper left decorative board 3129 difficult to see and reflect the light from the mounted LED, and to make the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122 and the like brighter and lighter. Can be done. In addition, the upper left front decoration board 3129 uses ink of a color (for example, yellow) with high brightness or saturation to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decoration boards. It is applied by screen printing. This makes characters and symbols less noticeable. Although not shown, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, and the like are mounted on the back upper left decorative board 3129 in addition to the LED.

  The back lower left lower decorative substrate 3130 is a flat plate that is long in the left and right directions, with the plate surface facing up and down. The back front lower left decorative board 3130 includes a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125 decorative plate portion 3125a, a back front left third decorative body 3126 decorative plate portion 3126a, and a back front left decorative. It is arranged below decorative plate portion 3127a of body base 3127. The back front lower left decorative board 3130 is sandwiched together with the back front lower left reflector 3133 between the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127. ing.

  The back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is provided below the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a plurality of first LEDs 3130 a and the back front left second decorative body 3125 below the decorative plate portion 3125 a. A plurality of second LEDs 3130b and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c provided below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126 are provided.

  When the plurality of first LEDs 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated. it can. When the plurality of second LEDs 3130b of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 emit light, the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be light emitting decorated. When the plurality of third LEDs 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the like can be light emitting decorated.

  The plurality of first LEDs 3130a, second LEDs 3130b, and third LEDs 3130c mounted on the lower surface of the lower left front decoration board 3130 are full-color LEDs.

  The front lower left lower decorative substrate 3130 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, the lower front lower left decorative substrate 3130 can be made harder to see, and the light from the mounted LED can be reflected, and the lower front left logo decorative portion 3121 and the like can be made brighter and lighter. Can be done. In addition, the lower left decorative board 3130 uses ink of a color (e.g., yellow) with a high brightness or saturation to prevent confusion with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. This makes characters and symbols less noticeable. Although not shown, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, and the like are mounted on the back front lower left decorative board 3130 in addition to the LED.

  The left diffusion lens 3134 is disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front left decorative substrate 3128 (back front left reflector 3131), and has a back front left third decorative body 3126 and a back front left decorative body base 3127. It is sandwiched between. The left diffusion lens 3134 diffuses light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and irradiates the left side surface of the light guide plate 3110.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first front left logo decoration part 3124c and a first back left logo decoration part 3124d of the back front left first decoration body 3124, and a back front left second decoration body 3125. Of the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d and the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d of the back front left third decoration body 3126 form one back front left logo decoration portion 3121. Since the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are different in the front-rear direction, the game is performed. When the position of the eyes of the person moves, the degree of their overlap changes, and a predetermined logo composed of a plurality of alphabets can be seen three-dimensionally.

  The front back left decorative unit 3120 includes a first lower LED 3128a, a second lower LED 3128c, and a third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and a first LED 3130a, a second LED 3130b, and a third LED of the back front lower left decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting the LED 3130c, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d are independently formed. Light-emitting decoration can be performed, and the back front left logo decoration portion 3121 can be light-emitting decorated in various light-emitting modes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124, and a second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the upper left logo decorative portion 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127 overlap one another to form one back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122. doing. Since the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e, the upper left logo decoration portion 3127d, and the position in the front-rear direction are different, the position of the player's eyes is different. When it moves, the degree of their overlap changes, and a logo in which the letter “A” is designed can be seen three-dimensionally.

  The back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, a second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e, a third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, a base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d, which are substantially at the same position as viewed from the front. Even with such a logo, a game is performed by sequentially illuminating the back front left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127. A pseudo animation with motion can be shown to the player, and it can appeal strongly to the player. This animation-like lighting effect causes the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d to emit light in sequence. The same operation and effect can be obtained.

  In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first upper LED 3128b, a second upper LED 3128d, a third upper LED 3128f, a base upper LED 3128i, and a first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 of the back front left decorative board 3128. By appropriately emitting light from the LED and the third LED, the first upper left logo decoration section 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration section 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration section 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration section 3127d are independently emitted. It can be decorated, and the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 can be illuminated and decorated in various emission modes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first left sub-decoration portion 3124f of the back front left first decorative body 3124, and a second left sub-decoration portion 3125f of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The third back sub-decoration portion 3126f of the back front left third decoration body 3126 overlaps front and back to form one back-front left sub-decoration portion 3123. Since the positions of the first left sub-decoration portion 3124f, the second left sub-decoration portion 3125f, and the third left sub-decoration portion 3126f are different from each other in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the degree of their overlap is changed. Is changed, and the back front left sub-decoration portion 3123 can be seen three-dimensionally.

  The front back left decorative unit 3120 includes a first lower LED 3128a, a second lower LED 3128c, and a third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and a first LED 3130a, a second LED 3130b, and a third LED of the back front lower left decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 3130c, the first left sub-decoration portion 3124f, the second left sub-decoration portion 3125f, and the third left sub-decoration portion 3126f can be independently illuminated and decorated. The portion 3123 can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes.

  Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a partition decorative portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124, a partition decorative portion 3125c of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a partition decorative portion of the back front left third decorative body 3126. 3126c, the partition decoration part 3124a, the partition decoration part 3125c, and the partition decoration part 3126c are bordered on the lower side (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front left sub decoration part 3123) and upper side (back side). The luminous decoration of the front upper left logo decoration section 3122) can be clearly separated, and the decoration effect by the luminous decoration of the back front left logo decoration section 3121 and the back front left sub decoration section 3123 and the luminous decoration of the back front left upper logo decoration section 3122 can be obtained. Can be further enhanced. At this time, since the partition decoration section 3124a, the partition decoration section 3125c, and the partition decoration section 3126c are also illuminated, the appearance of the partition decoration section 3124a, the partition decoration section 3125c, and the partition decoration section 3126c can be improved and the light emission can be performed. The decoration can be entertained.

  In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 emits the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130, and then the partition decoration of the back front left first decorative body 3124. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b below the portion 3124a can be illuminated. Also, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 emit light, the penetrating decoration above the partitioning decorative portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124. The portion 3124b can be illuminated. The appearance can also be improved by the light-emitting decoration of these penetrating decorative portions 3124b.

  In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 emits light from the LED 3128 g for the light guide plate of the back front left decorative board 3128, so that the back front right first decorative board 3148 and the back front right second decorative board in the back front right decorative unit 3140. 3149 and the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by cooperating with the light guide plate LED of the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150.

  As described above, according to the back front left decorative unit 3120, a transparent three-dimensional decoration such as the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front left upper logo decoration portion 3122, and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123 is provided. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance in the game area 5a and have a high appeal to the player.

  In addition, since the back front left logo decoration section 3121, the back front left upper logo decoration section 3122, and the back front left sub-decoration section 3123 can be illuminated in various light emission modes, the player can be bored with various light emission effects. It is possible to make it difficult to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  In the above description, the partitioning decorative portion 3124a, the partitioning decorative portion 3125c, and the partitioning decorative portion 3126c that block light from the LED are shown penetrating back and forth, but are not limited thereto, and are not limited to this. , Ridges, and so on. In addition, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided with a protrusion to be inserted into the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124, and the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion. May be. That is, the penetrating decorative portion 3124b may be used as the positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Back front right decoration unit]
The back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front directing unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and is a long front and back right logo composed of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. A decoration part 3141, a front right upper logo decoration part 3142 (see FIG. 151 (b)) which is provided above the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and has a pattern of the letter "A", and a back front right logo And a back front right sub-decoration part (not shown) provided near the decoration part 3141.

  The back-front right decorative unit 3140 includes a transparent back-front right first decorative body 3144 having a vertically long front-back shape and a transparent back-front right second body provided behind the back-front right first decorative body 3144. Decorative body 3145, transparent front right third decorative body 3146 provided behind back front right second decorative body 3145, and transparent back provided behind back front right third decorative body 3146 And a front right decorative body base 3147 (see FIG. 152).

  The right front end of the upper connection base 3190 is attached to the upper portion of the back front right decorative body base 3147, and the right end portion of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the lower front effect unit 3160 is attached to the lower portion. The back front right decoration base 3147 extends in the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction over the entire width at a certain height in the vertical direction, and is provided with three front right band decorations provided at intervals in the vertical direction. It has a portion 3147a (see FIG. 151 (b)).

  The back front right decoration unit 3140 includes a first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, a back front right logo decoration portion 3141, a back front right logo decoration portion 3142, and a back front right sub decoration portion for emitting light. The right first decorative substrate 3148 and the back front right second decorative substrate 3149, the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 for emitting and decorating the first picture 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, and the back front right upper logo decoration portion 3142 It has a back front upper right decorative board 3151 for luminous decoration and a back front lower right decorative board 3152 for luminous decoration of the back front right logo decoration section 3141 (see FIG. 156).

  In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 includes an upper right diffusion lens 3153 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right first decoration substrate 3148, and a light guide plate 3110 and the back front right second decoration substrate 3149. And a lower right diffusion lens 3155 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 (see FIG. 156). . The upper right diffusion lens 3153, the right middle diffusion lens 3154, and the lower right diffusion lens 3155 are provided between the back front right third decorative body 3146 and the back front right decorative body base 3147.

  Further, the back front right decoration unit 3140 receives the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and guided backward by the first guidance passage 2701, and guides the game ball B downward. 3156, and a second back guide passage 3157 that receives the game ball B received by the second sub-out opening 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700 and guided backward by the second guide passage and guides the game ball B downward. . One general winning opening sensor 3001 is provided in the first back guide passage 3156. The game balls B guided to the first back guide path 3156 and the second back guide path 3157 are discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 via the lower front effect unit 3160.

  In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 receives the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and is guided backward by the guiding passage 2613, and the V winning opening 2007 and the loss opening 2008 are provided. A distribution path provided, a V-prize port door 3006 for distributing the game ball B, which advances and retreats into the distribution path and is received in the role winning port 2006, to one of the V-prize port 2007 and the loss port 2008; A V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V winning opening door 3006 forward and backward, a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007, and a loss that detects the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008. And a mouth sensor 3004. The game ball B detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 or the losing mouth sensor 3004 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 via the lower front effect unit 3160.

  The configuration of the back front right decoration unit 3141, the back front right logo decoration unit 3142, the back front right sub-decoration unit, and the like in the back front right decoration unit 3140 are the same as those of the back front left decoration unit 3120. Omitted.

  In addition, the back front right first decorative body 3144, the back front right second decorative body 3145, and the back front right third decorative body 3146 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 include a back front right logo decorative part 3141 and a back front right upper right. Between the logo decoration portion 3142, there is provided a partition decoration portion 3144a extending left and right and penetrating back and forth. With the partitioning decorative portion 3144a, the back front right logo decorative portion 3141 and the back front right upper logo decorative portion 3142 can be independently illuminated.

  Furthermore, the back front right first decorative body 3144 has a plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3144b penetrating front and rear. The plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3144b can achieve the same operation and effect as the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

  Thus, according to the back front right decoration unit 3140, like the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right logo decoration unit 3141, the back front right logo decoration unit 3142, the back front right sub decoration unit, etc. With the transparent three-dimensional decoration, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Also, since the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front right logo decoration part 3142, and the back front right sub-decoration part can be light-emitting decorated in various light emission modes, it is difficult for the player to be bored by various light emission effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Also, in the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front right logo decoration part 3142 which are located at substantially the same position as viewed from the front, the back front right first decoration body 3144, the back front right second decoration body 3145, the back front right first decoration By sequentially illuminating and decorating the three decorative bodies 3146 and the back front right decorative body base 3147, a pseudo animation with motion can be shown to the player, and the player can be strongly appealed.

[5-9a-4. Production unit under the back
The lower front lower stage production unit 3160 in the front lower rear direction unit 3100 includes a disk-shaped lower front lower middle decoration body 3161 and a lower front lower middle decoration body 3161 each having a letter “SPIN” at the upper center in the left-right direction. A lower front lower rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction and a lower front lowering drive motor 3162 that raises and lowers the lower front middle decoration 3161 are provided. The lower front middle decorating body 3161 has translucency.

  In addition, the lower front lower stage effecting unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the lower front lower middle decorative body 3161 and has the same size of a disk-shaped lower front lower left inner decorative body 3163 and the lower front lower left inner decorative body 3163. A disk-shaped lower back left outer decoration of the same size provided on the left side and a disk-shaped lower front lower right decoration of the same size provided on the right side of the lower front middle decoration 3161 of the same size. A body 3165 and a disk-shaped lower front lower right outer decoration 3166 provided on the right side of the lower front lower right inner decoration 3165 and having the same size. The lower front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the lower front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the lower front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the lower front lower right outer decorative body 3166 have translucency.

  The lower back front effect unit 3160 is provided to the left of the lower back lower left outer decoration 3164, and includes a lower back logo decoration 3167 on which characters "Queen" are given. The lower back front logo decoration 3167 has translucency.

  Furthermore, the lower back front effecting unit 3160 includes a lower front lower middle decoration board 3168 for decorating the lower front lower middle decorative body 3161 with light emission, and a lower back lower left left for causing the lower front lower left inner decoration body 3163 to emit light decoration. An inner decorative substrate 3169, a lower front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170 for illuminating the lower front lower left outer decoration 3164, and a lower front lower right inner decoration for illuminating the lower front lower right inner decoration 3165 A substrate 3171, a lower front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating the lower front lower right outer decorative body 3166, a lower front lower logo decorative substrate 3173 for illuminating the lower front lower logo decorative body 3167, (See FIG. 156 (b)).

  These back and front lower middle decorative board 3168, back and front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back and front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back and front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back and front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back and front lower logo decoration The board 3173 includes a back lower middle decoration 3161, a lower back lower left inner decoration 3163, a lower back lower left outer decoration 3164, a lower front lower right inner decoration 3165, a lower back lower right outer decoration 3166, a back front. The lower logo decoration 3167 is provided behind the lower logo decoration 3167.

  In addition, the lower front lower middle decorative board 3168, the lower front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the lower front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the lower front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the lower front lower right outer decorative board 3172, the lower front lower logo The decorative substrate 3173 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface, and has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). The white solder resist can reflect light from the LED and from the front, etc., so that the decorations provided in front of each can be brightly decorated with light.

  In addition, the lower front lower middle decorative board 3168, the lower front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the lower front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the lower front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the lower front lower right outer decorative board 3172, the lower front lower logo On the decorative substrate 3173, characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative substrates are screen-printed using ink of a color with high brightness or saturation (for example, yellow). It has been given by. Thus, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the decorative body provided in front, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be reliably exhibited.

  Note that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower front middle decoration board 3168 are top-view type LEDs. On the other hand, it is mounted on a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, a lower front lower left outer decorative board 3170, a lower front lower right inner decorative board 3171, a lower front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and a lower front lower logo decorative board 3173. The plurality of LEDs are side view type LEDs.

  In these decorative substrates, members that do not emit light (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) other than LEDs are provided on the rear surface (rear surface), and care is taken so as not to hinder light-emitting decoration. I have.

  Lower front lower middle decorative body 3161, lower front lower left inner decorative body 3163, lower front lower left outer decorative body 3164, lower front lower right inner decorative body 3165, lower front lower right outer decorative body 3166, lower front lower logo decorative body As shown in FIG. 156, 3167 is located above the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 from the upper end. This makes the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 invisible from the player side (front). In addition, the lower front lower middle decorative body 3161, the lower front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the lower front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the lower front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the lower front lower right outer decorative body 3166 have upper ends respectively. However, as shown in FIG. 160, they are located below the lower end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and are spaced apart from each other at an interval corresponding to each line group 3114 forming the second pattern 3112. It is arranged in the direction.

  More specifically, the back lower middle decoration 3161 is in the third line group 3114c, the back lower left inner decoration 3163 is in the second line group 3114b, and the back lower left outer decoration 3164 is in the first line group 3114a. The lower right front decorative body 3165 is provided to correspond to the fourth line group 3114d, and the lower right front decorative body 3166 is provided to correspond to the fifth line group 3114e. Therefore, the front lower middle decoration 3161, the lower front lower left inner decoration 3163, the lower front lower left outer decoration 3164, the lower front lower right inner decoration 3165, and the lower front lower right outer decoration 3166 emit light (upper end). When only the part emits light or the whole emits light), the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 becomes as if the lower front lower middle decorative body 3161, the lower front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the lower front lower left outer decorative body 3164, It is possible to illusion the player as if it were illuminated and displayed by light from the lower front right inner decoration 3165 and the lower front right outer decoration 3166, and a luminous effect not available in the past pachinko machines Can be shown to others.

  In addition, the lower front lower effect unit 3160 includes a lower front lower middle decorative substrate 3168, a lower front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169, a lower front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170, a lower front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171, and a lower front lower right outer. The lower decorative substrate 3174 and the lower light guide plate, which are provided behind the decorative substrate 3172 and the lower front lower logo decorative substrate 3173, and for displaying the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by light emission (light emission decoration). A right decorative substrate 3175 is provided (see FIG. 156 (a)).

  The light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 each have five LED groups 3177 made up of five LEDs 3176. Five LEDs 3176 included in each LED group 3177 are arranged in order from the right in the order of a first LED 3176a, a second LED 3176b, a third LED 3176c, a fourth LED 3176d, and a fifth LED 3176e. Further, each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and from the left, the first LED group 3177a, the second LED group 3177b, the third LED group 3177c, and the fourth LED group 3177c. The LED group 3177d and the fifth LED group 3177e are arranged in this order.

  The LED 3176 of the first LED group 3177a and the second LED group 3177b are mounted on the lower left light guide plate 3174 of the light guide plate. LEDs 3176 of a third LED group 3177c, a fourth LED group 3177d, and a fifth LED group 3177e are mounted on the right lower decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate.

  The plurality of LEDs 3176 mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 are side view type full color LEDs. The light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 each have a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). The right decorative substrate 3175 under the light guide plate is made inconspicuous. In addition, characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as LEDs 3176 and other decorative substrates to be mounted are provided on the lower light guide plate left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower light guide plate right decorative substrate 3175 in terms of brightness and saturation. The printing is performed by screen printing using a high color (for example, yellow) ink. Thus, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the decorative body provided in front, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be reliably exhibited.

  When the first LED 3176a of each LED group 3177 emits light, the left lower decorative board 3174 of the light guide plate and the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate emit the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. Can be displayed (light-emitting decoration). In addition, when the second LED 3176b emits light, the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed (light-emitting decoration). When the third LED 3176c emits light, the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed (light-emitting decoration). Further, when the fourth LED 3176d emits light, the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed (light-emitting decoration). When the fifth LED 3176e emits light, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed (light-emitting decoration).

  Thereby, each of the plurality of lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be independently luminously displayed (luminous decoration), and a variety of luminous effects can be shown to the player. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be bored, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the lower front lower stage production unit 3160 includes a lower front lower middle decorative body 3161, a lower front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a lower front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a lower front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and a lower front lower right outside. Decorative body 3166, lower back front logo decoration 3167, lower back lower middle decoration board 3168, lower back lower left inner decoration board 3169, lower back lower left outer decoration board 3170, lower back lower right inner decoration board 3171, lower back lower It supports a right outer decorative substrate 3172, a lower front lower logo decorative substrate 3173, a lower light guide plate left decorative substrate 3174, a lower light guide plate right decorative substrate 3175, and the like, and includes a long and flat unit base 3178 on the left and right. . Near the left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178, the lower ends of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right decorative unit 3140 are attached.

  In addition, the lower front production unit 3160 includes a first discharge passage 3181 that receives the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges the game balls B to the lower substrate holder 1200; A second discharge passage 3182 for receiving the game balls B received in the first starting port 2002 and discharging the balls to the lower substrate holder 1200, and receiving the game balls B received in the second starting port 2004 of the first attacker unit 2400. And a fourth discharge passage 3184 for receiving the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharging it to the substrate holder 1200 below. Receiving the game ball B received at the first sub-out port 2021 of the first attacker unit 2400, A fifth discharge passage 3185 for discharging to the square of the substrate holder 1200, and a.

  In the first discharge passage 3181, three delivery ports are provided so as to correspond to the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general winning port sensors 3001 are provided so as to correspond to each of the delivery ports. Have been. In the second discharge passage 3182, a first starting port sensor 3002 is provided.

  The lower front lower stage production unit 3160 includes a lower front lower middle decorative body 3161, a lower front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a lower front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a lower front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and a lower front lower right outer decoration. By the body 3166 and the lower back logo decoration 3167, the lower part of the game area 5a can be decorated, the appearance can be improved, and by illuminating them, the player can be entertained by luminous effects. it can. In addition, the front lower middle decoration body 3161 can be rotated by the front lower lower rotation drive motor, and can be moved up and down by the lower front lowering drive motor 3162, so that the player can be entertained by a movable effect. .

  In addition, the underside front lower stage effecting unit 3160 can cause the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 to emit light by the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175. The light emitting effect by 3112 can be enjoyed by the player.

[5-9b. Production unit behind the back]
Next, the back-side upper presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 and 149 and the like. The rear production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper rear part of the front production unit 3100 in the back box 3010. The back-back upper presentation unit 3200 is rotatable about an axis extending left and right, and is movable up and down. The back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 and the back-front left decorative unit 3120 are the back-front left decorative body. A back-rear left side decorative body 3220 having three back-rear left belt decorative portions 3221 extending in the front-rear direction so as to continue with the three back-rear left belt decorative portions 3127c on the base 3127, and a back-front right. The back right side has three back right right band decoration portions 3231 extending in the front-rear direction so as to continue with the three back right right band decoration portions 3147a on the back front right decoration base 3147 of the decoration unit 3140. And a side decorative body 3230 (see FIG. 131).

  The back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided on the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 (see FIG. 129 and the like) in which five 7-segment display sections are arranged on the left and right, and on the back side of the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211. And a second upper decorative portion 3212 (see FIG. 162) in which predetermined characters (here, “JACKPOT”) are arranged in a row.

  In the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 is configured such that each of the segments in the five 7-segment display portions can emit light independently, and various characters and numbers, A picture, etc. can be displayed. As a result, the degree of expectation as to whether the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is a "big hit" or the like is determined. Can be displayed. In addition, in the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212, each character can emit light independently.

  In a normal state, the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 is in a raised position with the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 facing forward. The back and upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, or V In response to receiving (distributing) the game ball B into the winning opening 2007, the game device rotates 180 degrees around the axis extending left and right to turn the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 forward or descend from the rising position. Position (see FIGS. 161 and 162).

  According to the back and upper movable decorative body 3210, by turning or ascending or descending, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, and to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

  The three back left decorative strips 3221 of the back left side decorative body 3220 are three left front decorative strips 3127c extending left and right in the front left decorative base 3127 of the front left decorative unit 3120. It is provided so as to extend rearward from the right end of each. The back rear left band decoration section 3221 is capable of emitting light independently of each other, and is capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-rear direction.

  The three back right decorative strips 3231 of the back right side decorative body 3230 are the three back right decorative strips 3147a extending left and right in the front right decorative base 3147 of the front right decorative unit 3140. It is provided so as to extend rearward from the right end of each. The back rear right band decorative portion 3231 is capable of emitting light independently of each other, and is capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-back direction.

[5-9c. Urago lower production unit]
Next, the back lower production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to 135 and the like. The lower rear production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the rear box 3010 behind the rear front production unit 3100 and below the rear upper production unit 3200.

  The back rear lower production unit 3300 has a rear rear left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear, whose base ends adjacent to each other are supported rotatably about an axis in the front-rear direction and supported up and down, respectively. It has a rear right movable decorative body 3302. The back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are formed so as to rotate in directions opposite to each other as the base end side moves up and down.

  In the normal state, the back left rear movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 rotate in the direction in which their respective distal ends are separated from each other, and are hidden behind the front-side effect unit 3100 and forward (game). The user is in a retracted position that is invisible to the user (see FIG. 129 and the like).

  The back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back right movable decorative body 3302 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. In response to this, each of the distal ends rotates around the base end side so as to move upward and rises, and the right side of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the left side of the rear right movable decorative body 3302 contact each other. In contact. Thereby, the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are integrally formed to form one large decorative body, and the appearance position is visible from the front (see FIG. 163). ).

  As a result, a large decorative body in which the character “A” is designed appears in the center of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302, so that the player can be surprised. It is possible to make people think that there is something good and to suppress the decrease in interest. The back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back right movable decorative body 3302 are provided with a decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a plurality of LEDs are used for light emitting decoration to improve appearance. And attract the interest of the player.

  As shown in FIG. 167, the back left rear movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are located so as to overlap behind the first picture 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 in the appearance position. Accordingly, a large decorative body composed of the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 can be illuminated by the first pattern 3111, and thus the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body The three-dimensional decoration by the body 3302 and the luminescent display of the plane by the first pattern 3111 can show a deep decoration to the player, and can give a strong impact to the player and increase the interest of the player. It is possible to strongly attract the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 168 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the gaming board showing a state in which the back-upper upper movable decorative body is moved to the lower position in a state in which the first decorative portion is located forward in the back-upper upper movable decorative body in the back-upper effect unit of the back unit. . FIG. 162 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-back upper second decorative portion in the back-back upper-directing effect unit in the back-back upper-side effect unit has been moved to the lowered position, and the back-back upper second decorative portion is directed forward. . FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board in a state where the rear left movable decorative body and the rear right movable decorative body have been moved to the appearance position in the rear behind lower effect unit of the rear unit. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the lower-front lower middle decorative body of the lower-front lower-side production unit of the rear unit is raised.

  FIG. 165 shows the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front left decorative unit 3120, the back front left upper logo decorative unit, the back front left sub-decorative unit, and the back front left band decorative unit of the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state made to be made. FIG. 166 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back-side effect unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission. FIG. 167 shows that the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back-to-back rendering unit of the back unit is illuminated and decorated, and the back-to-back left movable decorative body and the back-to-back right movable decorative body in the back-to-back lower rendering unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate in the back effect unit of the back unit is illuminated and decorated.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side panel. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, As shown in FIG. 134, through them, the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140, and the back front lower production unit of the back front rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. Decorative lower body 3161, lower left inner decorative body 3163, lower front of 3160 Outer left decorative body 3164, lower back lower right inner decorative body 3165, lower front lower right outer decorative body 3166, lower front lower logo decorative body 3167, backer upper stage production unit 200 The side decorative body 3220, the rear right side decorative body 3230, and the like can be viewed well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well through the frame of the center role 2500. can do.

  More specifically, the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the like of the back front left decorative unit 3120 are located near the left side of the center role 2500, and about half are located within the frame of the center role 2500. . In addition, the back front right first decorative body 3144 and the like of the back front right decorative unit 3140 are located near the right side of the center role 2500, and a part thereof is located within the frame of the center role 2500. The lower front and rear production unit 3160 extends left and right at the lower part of the game area 5a, can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the center role 2500, and is partially good through the frame of the center role 2500. Can be visually recognized.

  The lower front lower middle decoration 3161 of the lower front lower stage effecting unit 3160 is located above the first starting port 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center role 2500. The lower left front decoration 3163 and the lower left outer decoration 3164 are located above the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the lower side of the center role 2500. The lower right front decoration 3165 and the lower right outer decoration 3166 are located above the large winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and near the lower side of the center role 2500. The front lower middle decoration 3161, the lower front lower left inner decoration 3163, the lower front lower left outer decoration 3164, the lower front lower right inner decoration 3165, the lower front lower right outer decoration 3166, the upper part is the center role It is located within the frame of 2500. The lower back front logo decoration 3167 is located at the lower left corner of the game area 5a outside the center role 2500.

  In addition, since the rear upper movable decoration 3210 of the rear upper production unit 3200 is located at the ascending position, it extends right and left above the game area 5a, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the horizontal direction is transparent. It can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 and the center role 2500, and a part can be well viewed through the frame of the center role 2500. The back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 has the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 having a plurality of 7-segment portions facing forward.

  The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower production unit 3300 are in a retracted position behind the rear front lower production unit 3160 and are visible from the front (player side). It is impossible.

  The game board 5 has a front-side effect of the back unit 3000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The unit 3100, the back-side upper production unit 3200, the back-side lower production unit 3300, and the like perform a predetermined movable performance or a luminous performance.

  Specifically, as a movable effect using the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, the movable effect has five 7-segment portions. With the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 facing forward, the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position. Thereby, since most of the back and upper movable decorative body 3210 is located within the frame of the center role 2500, the back and upper first decorative portion 3211 can be visually recognized in a favorable state. At this time, by changing and displaying the five 7-segment portions of the back and upper first decorative portion 3211, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the desired numbers and patterns are displayed in the five 7-segment portions. Depending on whether or not the information is displayed, the player can be excitedly excited.

  As an effect using the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, as described above, after moving the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 to the descending position while facing forward, as shown in FIG. Then, it is turned 180 degrees around the axis in the left-right direction, and the second back decoration upper part 3212 having a plurality of character strings is directed forward. As a result, the character of "JACKPOT" is directed forward, so that the player can be recognized as a "big hit", and the player is expected to have an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" gaming state) that is advantageous. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as an effect using the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating around the axis in the left-right direction, an intermediate portion between the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back-back upper second decorative portion 3212 is used. At the part, either the forward or reverse rotation may be repeated, and either the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 or the back-back upper second decorative portion 3212 may be stopped rotating forward. Thereby, depending on whether or not “JACKPOT” of the back and upper second decorative portion 3212 is directed forward, the player can be nervous and throbbing, thereby increasing the expectation of the player and suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  In addition, as an effect using the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, in the state of the ascending position, the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is turned forward by rotating it 180 degrees around the left-right axis. You may do it.

  In addition, as an effect using the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back right movable decorative body 3302 of the back rear lower effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. From the state of the retracted position where they are located, on the respective proximal ends, the respective distal ends are raised and contacted with each other by rotating them in directions opposite to each other around axes extending in the front-rear direction and by raising them, Is moved to the appearance position where the abutment is brought into contact. As a result, one large decorative body in which the character “A” is designed by the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 is formed in the game area 5 a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. In the center of the game, it can surprise the player greatly, attract the player's attention, and think that there is something good for the player It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as an effect using the lower front lower middle decorative body 3161 in the lower front lower direction unit 3160 of the lower front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. Or rotate it. As a result, in the lower center part in the game area 5a, the lower front middle decoration body 3161 rotates, so that it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and a sense of expectation for the game is provided. Can be increased. In addition, since the lower front lower middle decoration body 3161 is provided immediately above the first starting port 2002 and behind the stage 2513, the lower front lower middle decoration body 3161 rotates or moves up and down, thereby playing a game. It is possible to urge the player to perform the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002, and to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B inherent in the pachinko machine 1.

  As an effect using the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, a back front left decorative board 3128, a back front left upper decorative board 3129, and a back front left lower decorative board 3130, the LED mounted on the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front left upper logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, the back front left band decoration part 3127c, etc. emit light. Lighting effects for decoration can be performed. For example, in the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are sequentially arranged. By performing the luminous decoration, a luminous effect such as a neon sign that flows back and forth can be shown, and the player can be entertained.

  Although not shown, the back front right decoration unit 3140 can also perform the same light emission effect as the back front left decoration unit 3120, and can entertain the player.

  Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the back front left decorative board 3128 in the front front left decorative unit 3120, The front right right decorative board 3148, the front right right second decorative board 3149, and the plurality of light guide plate LEDs of the front right light guide plate decorative board 3150 in the front right decorative unit 3140 emit light to form a first pattern. 3111 is displayed (light-emitting decoration). In this way, a large first pattern 3111 in which the character “A” is designed to be illuminated and displayed in the center of the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can surprise the player, It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  As an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the first pattern 3111 is illuminated and displayed, and the back and left movable decorative body 3301 and the back and right movable of the back and back effect unit 3300 are displayed. The decorative body 3302 is moved from the evacuation position to the appearance position. Thereby, since the first pattern 3111 and the large decorative body of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back right movable decorative body 3302 are overlapped in front and back, a strong impact is given to the player. The player can entertain the player, and can make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player has an advantage will occur. Expectations can be raised.

  As an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. 168, the plurality of LEDs 3176 on the lower light guide plate left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower light guide plate right decorative substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 emit light as appropriate. Then, the second picture 3112 is displayed (light-emitting decoration). Accordingly, the lower front lower middle decorative body 3161, the lower front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the lower front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the lower front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the lower front lower right outside of the lower front lower directing unit 3160 Since a plurality of lines 3113 extending upward starting from the upper portions of the five decorative bodies of the decorative bodies 3166 are displayed as light emission, the player is provided with a light-emitting effect such as a searchlight from below at the concert stage. This makes it possible to show the inside of the game area 5a brilliantly and entertain the player.

  As an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. 168, in the state where the second pattern 3112 is illuminated and displayed, the lower front lower middle decorative body 3161 in the lower front lower effect unit 3160, the rear front The lower left inner decorative body 3163, the lower front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the lower front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the lower front lower right outer decorative body 3166 or the entire upper end thereof may be illuminated. Alternatively, a decorative body located below the line group 3114 of the second picture 3112 that is illuminated and displayed may be illuminated. As a result, the line 3113 forming the second picture 3112 is changed to a lower middle back decoration 3161, a lower back lower left inner decoration 3163, a lower back lower left outer decoration 3164, and a lower back lower right inner decoration 3165. It is possible to illusion the player as if it were illuminated and displayed by the light from the decorative body such as the lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc., and to show the player an unprecedented luminous effect and entertain the player. it can.

  Further, although not shown, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 may be displayed by light emission, and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 may be moved to the lowered position. This allows the player to show a light-emitting effect in which the back and upper movable decorative body 3210 is illuminated from below by the searchlight, so that the back and above upper movable decorative body 3210 can be gorgeously displayed and enjoyed. it can.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described light emitting effect and the movable effect can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. This makes it possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining the light-emitting effect, the display effect, and the like, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect image display on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b that controls the firing of the game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value and an error display, and a partition for the game board 5. A display for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a. Includes a Sumonita 1310h, the. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code having only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is added. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an inconsistent content, forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to the effect that it has been affected by electrical noise. This is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is performed, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later again. Will be done. In this case, since the main-control-side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, as described later, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Clear). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset signal is not output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is kept in the activated state.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) that updates a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. Random number circuit ”). The hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 65535 is set as the minimum value and the maximum value is set in advance in the present embodiment). The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. More specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in are completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. Is set as

  The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various sensors at its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be performed.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting for detecting a game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. A mouth sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2801 for detecting a game ball B passing through a gate 2003, a gaming ball B received in a special winning opening 2005. Winning game sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball, a game winning game sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the game winning opening 2006, and a V winning game sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B received in the V winning game 2007. , A loss opening sensor 3004 for detecting a game ball B received in the loss opening 2008, and detecting a game ball B discharged from the game board 5. Signals from an out sensor 664, a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and a vibration sensor for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 are transmitted to the main control input circuit via the main control input circuit. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the MPU 1310a.

  Further, respective detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are output via the payout control board 633 (through a payout control input circuit and a payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 (as they are, without passing through), they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The respective detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the second starting port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, and The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, each of the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, the big winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, the V winning opening sensor 3003, the loss opening sensor 3004, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor. The detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid driving circuit based on these detection signals, so that the starting control solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are output from the main control solenoid driving circuit. , A drive signal to the bonus winning opening solenoid 2612 and the V distribution solenoid 3007 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the function display unit. 1400 status display, ordinary symbol display, ordinary reservation display, first special symbol display, first special reservation number display, second special symbol display, second special reservation number display, round display, Each drive signal is output without passing through another substrate, that is, directly. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from an output terminal of a predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information relating to the game (game information) from an output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, and the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a firing permission signal notifying that the shooting of the game ball B is permitted, a firing permission signal notifying that the firing of the game ball B is permitted to the payout control board 633 is output. The logic of the firing permission signal for notifying that the firing is permitted is set to the firing permission logic when the firing is permitted, while the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) is the inverted firing permission logic when the firing is not permitted. Is set to The firing permission signal is set as an initial value (default) as the initial value (default). After the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), a firing permission signal setting process in a main control timer interrupt process described later is started. Up to this point, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) is inverted from the firing permission logic.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the special winning opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2601, the V winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, While a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the out sensor 664, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor The detection of the game ball B by 2801 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first startup port sensor 3002, the second startup port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

  Further, when an advantageous game state (eg, “big hit” game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2402 is used. Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the special winning opening sensor 2402. In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B fired in the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined by the game board 5, the detection of the game balls B by the out sensor 664 is also frequent. Occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening sensor 3001, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and long life may be used.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, and will format these various commands and transmit them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be described later in detail.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. To be described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the RAM during power-off processing even when power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, the firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and the firing that performs the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball for maintenance. A ball release switch for discharging the game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removal operation; , Is provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via a payout control I / O port, or receives the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch input from the dispensing control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are input to a payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed through a payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 and a main frame opening switch that detects the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Also, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310 The power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Is notified that the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it is "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball watching” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, that the game ball B bites between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number “3” is displayed, “Count (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". (Specifically, based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full and the number "7" is displayed.) Sometimes, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection has been cut off from anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. Is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of lent game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input to the ball lending display unit 226 of the operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the above; a firing solenoid driving circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; And a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing timing control circuit establishes the firing condition 1 that the palm or the finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board Is established, the firing condition 2 that the game ball B is permitted to be fired based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied. Is not output to launch the game ball 5 toward the game area 5a, so that, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and cannot fire the game ball B.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength appropriate for the rotational position of the handle 195 based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the launch reference pulse The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 b that controls the firing by the firing solenoid 542 and controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 is provided on the payout control board 633. You may comprise. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, The power may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not used.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although a detailed illustration is omitted, a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC for performing high-quality performance, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC. And a stored sound ROM.

  In the peripheral control IC, a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC performs peripheral operations based on the various commands. The CPU of the control IC converts the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 into a serial I / O for a lamp driving board. A game board-side drive data for transmitting from a port to each decoration board of the game board 5 or outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 for the game board decoration drive board The vibration is transmitted to the drive motor or the drive solenoid of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port, the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 36 , And door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 and the like, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. A door-side drive light-emitting data composed of a door-side drive light-emitting data for outputting the data from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 and a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition to transmitting the control data (display command) shown from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is generated by the sound source. Output to IC.

  Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the projection output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on the operation signal, the effect display control unit. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and the like provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. The control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is stored. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the system is running away.

  A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) are set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, and the like output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 are a plurality of serial input / outputs different from the display command. This is performed by a port, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP for displaying and controlling the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM. Have.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect on the effect display device 1600. Control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be rendered on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and control data (display command) for the schedule data. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various kinds of data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM from the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data is defined in advance.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs the extracted data to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to effect display device 1600. In addition, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP adopts a line buffer system. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. Output to the

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character. In the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in a horizontal 2 × vertical 3 or the like are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels in order from left to right as viewed from the front, and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction. And the sub-scan to be performed. When the rendering data for one line output from the rendering display control unit 1512 is input, the rendering display device 1600 sequentially performs one-line rendering from left to right as viewed from the front of the rendering display device 1600 as main scanning. Is output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the image is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more the balls are rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger they can be hit. B, that is, the game balls B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  Also, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game balls B come into contact with the obstacle nails N. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B, so that the movements can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest point in front view, it contacts the plurality of obstacle nails N, It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from a central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the central discharge part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513 into the game area 5a, the central discharge part 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first discharge port 2513a has a high probability. It is received in the starting port 2002. When game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, in the advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per hit”, “per probability change (probable change)”, A lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates “time reduction (time reduction)” is performed.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center role item 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 and the obstacle nail N of the upper left side unit 2300, and the side unit 2200 , Or the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, etc. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the guide of the center role 2500 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails which are discharged above the gate 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate 2003 After touching N, it passes through the gate 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened near the stopper 1006, and an entrance opened at an interval leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed), the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not touch the stop portion 1006 (right-handed). If the player hits the game ball B with a certain level of strength, the ball enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center role item 2500 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 with a higher probability when flowing through the second guide passage 2522 than when flowing through the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the selected normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the first attacker unit 2400 Is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2003, a certain time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  If the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  The game ball B passing through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 has a high probability of being left on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down, and is occasionally accepted at the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, or rarely accepted at the second sub-out opening 2022. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out similarly to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2022, the ball is discharged out of the game area 5a without a chance to be received in the accessory winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004, or the special winning port 2005.

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate 2003 is received by the second sub-out opening 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the special winning opening 2006, the second starting opening of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no opportunity to be accepted in the 2004 or grand prize opening 2005 and the game is discharged out of the game area 5a.

  As described above, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2022 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a driving operation such that the gaming ball B cannot be received at the mouth 2022. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role item 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2022 than the first guide passage 2521. Thus, the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522 can be prompted. In other words, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment in the rotation operation of the handle 182, rather than a “right-handed” operation in which the game ball B comes into contact with the stop portion 1006. The main game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the right side middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the right side middle unit 2700, and the play ball winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 is formed. After passing through the left, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500.

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “per hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the role winning Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the bonus winning opening 2006. When the gaming ball B is received in the bonus winning opening 2006 when the bonus winning opening 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

  The game ball B received by the bonus winning opening 2006 and detected by the bonus winning opening sensor 2601 circulates through the distribution passage 3158, and moves forward and backward by the V winning opening door 3006, so that the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 is performed. To any of When the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2007, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern as an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the game ball B is distributed to the losing opening 2008, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player does not occur.

  The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the bonus winning opening 2006 is the first shelf 2421, the second starting door 2411, and the second shelf 2422, and the upper left side After rolling, the game is released to the left, and further, the third shelf 2423, the special winning opening door 2413, and the fourth shelf 2424 are rolled to the left and discharged to the game area 5a. .

  When the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2411, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2003 is “normal hit”, and the second starting door 2411. Is retreated, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, in the advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per hit”, “per probability change (probable change)”, A lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates “time reduction (time reduction)” is performed.

  In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the special winning opening door 2413, a special lottery result (first special) obtained by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 If the lottery result and the second special lottery result are special lottery results (for example, "big hits") that generate an advantageous gaming state, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the special winning opening 2005 has the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. Can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball B, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment displays, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, A special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, and “period of time (shortening of time)” is performed. The special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). Special lottery results to be drawn by accepting include "losing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probable change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time Shortened) hit "," probable change time saving hit " "Probability variation shorter working hours per absent", "the second big hit", and the like.

  When the special lottery result is “per hit”, the bonus winning opening 2006 is set to the open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, after the special winning opening 2005 is opened to be able to receive the game ball B, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or the special winning opening 2005 When one of the conditions of the predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern in which the game balls B cannot be received in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as a "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the special winning opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, the special game state is set to ST (special time). ). This ST is to maintain a state of certainty and time saving during a predetermined number of times of change.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery to the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first starting port 2002 and the When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is not started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Suspended. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns is displayed in a state where three pattern rows are arranged in the left and right direction, and each pattern row is changed, and the pattern row that is variably displayed is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed such that the patterns of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the image sequence fluctuates and the final image is displayed). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player operation type operation can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the rear upper directing unit 3200, the back rear lower directing unit 3300, and the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake in an operation to be performed or does not perform the operation, a correct operation is performed. To the player.

[8. Second Embodiment of Game Board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172 and the like. FIG. 170 (a) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and FIG. 170 (b) is an enlarged view of a part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same portion as (a). FIG. FIG. 171 (a) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which the back front left decorative unit of the back front effect unit in FIG. FIG. FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the panel plate of the game panel is illuminated and decorated in FIG. 171 (a).

  The game board 5A of the first embodiment is different from the game board 5 of the first embodiment in that the front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are formed of a translucent milky synthetic resin. And the detailed description of the same components is omitted.

  In the game board 5 of the first embodiment, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 (the panel board 1110 and the panel holder 1120) are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, as shown in FIG. The front unit 1000 and the back unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100 can be viewed from the front (from the player side).

  On the other hand, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, the front component 1000A and the panel board 1110A are formed of milky white synthetic resin, so as shown in FIG. A portion of the back unit 3000 or the like provided behind the game panel 1100 except for the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A cannot be visually recognized from the front (the player side).

  The front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are formed of a translucent milky white opaque synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110A may be formed by cutting a milky white synthetic resin plate, or may be formed by injection molding using a milky white synthetic resin.

  In the game board 5A of this embodiment, since the panel plate 1110A and the like of the game panel 1100 are milky white, a part of the back unit 3000 provided rearward through the panel plate 1110A and the like (from the opening 1112 in front view). Outside) can be made invisible. Since the panel plate 1110A and the like have a light-transmitting property, when a decorative body or the like provided behind is illuminated, light from the rear decorative body transmits through the panel plate 1110A, and The light-emitting decoration can be visually recognized by the player.

  To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 171 (a), in the front left decoration unit 3120 of the rear front rendering unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110A or the like, the panel plate 1110A is viewed from the front. The upper left front logo decoration portion 3122 and the lower front left sub decoration portion 3123 located outside the opening 1112 are not visible from the front. Then, when the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front left upper logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub-decoration portion 3123, and the like are light-emitting decorated, they have translucency as shown in FIG. 171 (b). Light from the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123 and the like provided at the rear through the panel plate 1110A are transmitted and light emitting decoration is performed. The part 3123 and the like become visible.

  Since the panel plate 1110A and the like are milky white, the luminescent colors of the back upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123 and the like, which are luminescently decorated, can be transmitted as they are, and the color A rich luminous effect can be shown to the player.

  In addition, as the opaque material having a light-transmitting property in the panel plate 1110A, it is preferable that the light transmittance is 2% to 80% and the haze value is 80% to 100%. If the transmittance is lower than this, it is difficult to perform light emission decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it is difficult to obtain an opaque material. Further, when the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the member provided behind can be easily recognized, and there is a possibility that the effect of hiding cannot be sufficiently obtained.

  Further, the panel plate 1110A and the like are made milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2 / 0.5)), but “white Munsell value (N 9.5)” and “white powder Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2)” /0.5), "Ubana color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "generated color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "Lead white Munsell value (N9)", "Oyster white Munsell value" (5GY 8.5 / 0.3) "," gray-white Munsell value (10YR 9 / 0.5) "," white-blue Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2 / 1.3) "," hidden Munsell " Value (2B 8.5 / 2) "," Ivory Munsell Value (2.5Y 8.5 / 1.5) "," Cream Yellow Munsell Value (5Y 8.5 / 3.5) "," Sakura Munsell " Value (10RP 9 / 2.5) ", etc. .

  By the way, since the panel plate 1110A or the like is made of translucent milky white, if a colored decorative body such as black, red, or blue is provided behind the panel plate 1110A, the decorative body emits light. Even in a state where no decoration is made, the decoration may be seen through the panel plate 1110A depending on the color of the decoration. When the decorative body is seen through the panel board 1110A, the player notices the presence of the decorative body behind the panel board 1110A, and the impact (surprise) given to the player when the decorative body is illuminated and decorated. There is a possibility that the desired effect may not be obtained due to a decrease.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the back front left upper decoration unit 3120 and the back front left sub-decoration unit 3123 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 provided behind the panel board 1110A are formed. Since the left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127 are formed of a colorless and transparent member, the translucency is improved. There is no visible back front upper left logo decoration 3122 or back front left sub-decoration 3123 through the milky white panel board 1110A. Therefore, when the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub-decoration portion 3123, and the like are not light-emission-decorated, they are invisible to the player, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice their existence. . When the front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the front left left sub decoration portion 3123 and the like are illuminated, they become visible through the translucent milky white panel board 1110A, which surprises the player. And the light emitting effect can be enjoyed, and the light of the light emitting decoration can be seen through the panel board 1110A, so that the inside of the game area 5a can be seen brightly and beautifully, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. .

  In addition, the game board 5A of the present embodiment is provided with a panel decoration board 1130 on which a plurality of LEDs 1130a for irradiating light to the outer peripheral surface of the panel board 1110A are mounted outside a translucent milky white panel board 1110A. Have been. The plurality of LEDs 1130a are full-color LEDs. When the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emit light, the panel plate 1110A can be made to emit light as shown by hatching in FIG. As a result, the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) in which the game ball B circulates in the front is in a state of self-illumination, so that the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened and circulates in the game area 5a. The game balls B can be made easier to see, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, since the game panel 1100 self-illuminates, the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a can be seen in a silhouette, so that the game balls B can be easily recognized, and the delicate firing intensity is adjusted. It can be easy. In addition, if the panel decoration substrate 1130 is provided on both the left side and the right side of the panel board 1110A, it is possible to intuitively understand when giving advice of “right-handed” or “left-handed” to the player. become. More specifically, depending on the situation of the game, the LED 1130a of either the left or right panel decoration board 1130 emits light, and the left and right portions of the panel board 1110A are illuminated and decorated. It is possible to intuitively understand that "left hit" or "right hit" is advised, and to allow the player to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B, and to use the conventional pachinko machine. The player can entertain the player with a new sense of light emission.

  More specifically, in a conventional pachinko machine, in a game board using an opaque veneer plywood as a game panel, a decorative film on which a predetermined pattern or the like is printed is attached to the front of the plywood, so that the inside of the game area is reduced. I try to decorate it. However, when plywood is used for a game panel, decoration with a decorative film does not look like another game machine, and it has been difficult to increase the appeal to players. On the other hand, when the panel board 1110 through which the game balls B circulate is made transparent in the front as in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 are provided. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily seen and the open feeling can be obtained. On the other hand, the game ball B flowing in front of the transparent panel board 1110 appears to be floating, and depending on the player, the game ball B The movement of B may be difficult to understand.

  On the other hand, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 can make the light-transmissive panel board 1110A emit light, so that the light emission color and light emission pattern of the LED 1130a can be obtained. Can be changed in various ways, and the player can see the self-illuminated game board 5A which is not included in the conventional pachinko machine, and can pay attention to the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be strongly attracted and has a high appeal to a player. Further, since the panel board 1110A is self-illuminated by the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, the game balls B flowing in front of the panel board 1110A can be easily seen, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls B. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  According to the game board 5A of the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described functions and effects, the panel board 1110A and the like are made of milky white synthetic resin, and it is sufficient to use a resin of a lower grade than a transparent resin. The cost required for the panel plate 1110A can be reduced as compared with the case where a resin is used.

  In the above embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is provided outside the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The panel decoration substrate 1130 may be provided behind the panel plate 1110A. You may do it. Thereby, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. Further, compared to the case where the panel plate is made transparent, the point light from the LED 1130a or the like provided at the rear can be diffused by the milky white panel plate 1110A having optical properties. Can be softly illuminated, and glare can be suppressed to provide a game board 5A that is easy on the eyes.

  In the game board 5A of the present embodiment, although not shown, a decorative film (also referred to as a cell) having a predetermined pattern may be attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A. Thereby, the abrasion of the panel plate 1110A due to the distribution of the game balls B can be suppressed, and the appearance of the game area 5a when the rear decorative body is not illuminated by the cell pattern is suppressed. Can be better. In addition, the light from the LED provided behind the panel plate 1110A allows the cell pattern to be illuminated and decorated together with the panel plate 1110A, so that the decoration of the panel plate 1110A can be seen more beautifully.

  Further, as described above, in the case where the cell is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, the light emitting decoration by the LED provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110A is performed by making the picture provided on the cell an outline. Illumination), and the decorative effect by the luminous decoration can be further enhanced.

  Further, cells may be provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. Accordingly, the light from the LED or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A (cell) reflects the shadow of the cell (or the pattern applied to the cell) on the panel plate 1110A. Thereby, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be changed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. The shadow reflected on the panel board 1110A may be, for example, a character such as “right strike”, “left strike”, “chance”, etc., to entertain the player by indicating a change in the game situation. Can be.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative body (back front left decorative unit 3120) whose position is fixed is provided behind the milky white panel board 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A movable decorative body movable between a retracted position behind the panel plate 1110A and an appearance position inside the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A in a front view may be provided behind the panel plate 1110A.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the entirety including the inside of the panel plate 1110A and the like has been described as being milky white. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be milky. Specifically, for example, a panel plate formed by two colors of a transparent resin and a milky white resin, a panel plate obtained by bonding a transparent resin plate and a milky white resin plate, and at least one surface of the transparent resin plate A panel plate with a milky white film (cell) attached thereto, a panel plate with a transparent resin plate on the rear side of which has been processed by ultraviolet curing ink, a panel plate with a rear side of a transparent resin plate subjected to sandblasting, and the like. Can be

  Further, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110A and the like are made milky white. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a panel plate of an appropriate color such as red, blue, yellow, or the like may be used. good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front component 1000A is made to be milky white having translucency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front component 1000A is transparent like the game board 5 of the first embodiment. It may be a constituent member 1000 or a front constituent member of a color different from that of the panel plate 1110A.

[9. Third Embodiment of Game Board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the panel board and the cells in the gaming board of the third embodiment, which is disassembled and viewed from the front. The game board 5B of the third embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that a cell 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, and the parts having the same configuration are described in detail. Is omitted.

  In the gaming board 5B of the second embodiment, a film-shaped cell 1140 having a predetermined pattern is detachably provided on the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the transparent gaming panel 1100 in the gaming panel 1100. . The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and has a predetermined pattern printed thereon. The material of the cell 1140 is “polyethylene terephthalate resin”, “polycarbonate resin”, “ABS resin”, “AES resin”, “PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin”, “polypropylene resin”, “polyethylene resin” , "Polystyrene resin", "impact polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

  The cell 1140 is formed to have a size that covers only a part of the entire surface of the panel plate 1110 (here, a portion extending from the left side to the lower side of the center role 2500). Although not shown, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 using screws with a predetermined amount of backlash. Thereby, as compared with the case where the panel 1110 is attached to the entire surface, the labor required for mounting the cell 1140 can be simplified, and the amount of the cell 1140 used can be reduced. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the cells 1140 are provided on a part of the panel plate 1110, the number of cells 1140 that can be obtained from the resin sheet can be increased as compared with a conventional cell attached to the panel plate. 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state having a backlash, even if the cell 1140 expands and contracts due to a change in temperature, humidity, or the like, the difference in expansion and contraction from the panel plate 1110 can be absorbed by the backlash. it can. Thereby, even if the cell 1140 shrinks with respect to the panel plate 1110, it is possible to prevent the cell 1140 from wrinkling or cracking, and to maintain the decorative effect of the cell 1140 with the pattern. .

  Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with screws, the cell 1140 can be easily attached to and detached from the panel plate 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cell 1140 with a cell 1140 having a different pattern, the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. It is possible to easily cope with a change or a design change, etc., thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and by exchanging the cell 1140 with a pattern with a higher decorative effect for a game. Pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to a person can be provided.

  Further, since the cell 1140 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel board 1110, the distance from the player to the cell 1140 is longer than in the case where the cell 1140 is provided on the front face of the panel board 1110, and the game The feeling of oppression to the person can be reduced.

  Further, it is desirable that the cell 1140 has a light-transmitting property, and the light from the LED provided behind the panel plate 1110 (the cell 1140) can decorate the pattern of the cell 1140 by emitting light. The appearance in the area 5a can be improved, and the luminous decoration of the cell 1140 can strongly attract the interest of the player, and the appeal of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using screws. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cell 1140 may be attached to the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120. It may be mounted so as to be sandwiched between them.

  In the above-described embodiment, the opening 1112 where the center role 2500 of the panel plate 1110 is provided is provided at a position deviated to the upper right direction with respect to the panel plate 1110 (eccentric to the upper right). Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be offset in the upward direction (centered upward) or offset in the left-right direction (centered in the left-right direction). The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained by providing the cell 1140 behind a portion that is widened by the offset (eccentric) of the opening 1112.

  Further, the opening 1112 provided with the center role 2500 may be offset with respect to the center or the outer edge of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), or may be offset with respect to the center or the outer edge of the game area 5a. good. Therefore, for example, when the center of the panel board 1110 and the game area 5a do not coincide with each other, even if the center of the opening 1112 that is offset with respect to the center of the panel board 1110 matches the center of the game area 5a. Alternatively, the center of the opening 1112 offset to the center of the game area 5a may coincide with the center of the panel board 1110.

[10. Another Embodiment of Function Display Unit]
Subsequently, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided in the game board 5 and the like will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179 and the like. FIG. 174 (a) is a front view of the function display unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 174 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line in FIG. FIG. 2D is a perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174 as exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174 exploded as viewed from the rear. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 174 and the player. FIG. 178 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating the relationship between the function display unit and the player according to the third embodiment. FIG. 179 is a cross-sectional view of the function display unit according to the fourth embodiment.

  The function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment performs a variable display by blinking a plurality of LEDs 1401 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, similarly to the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment. Later, by turning on or off each of them in a predetermined combination, a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result (a first special lottery result, a second special lottery result), a normal lottery result , The number of special lottery results, the number of rounds at the time of the "big hit", and the like.

  More specifically, in the game board 5 or the like of the first embodiment, for example, when a game ball B is received in the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, or the like, a special lottery result is generated as an internal process in the main control board 1310. Will be drawn. Then, the main control board 1310 transmits a control signal for displaying the selected special lottery result to the function display unit 1400, and displays the special lottery result selected using the corresponding LED 1401 in the function display unit 1400. Like that.

  In addition, the control signal of the special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a predetermined effect image of the effect display device 1600 is displayed by the peripheral control board 1510 as an effect indicating the special lottery result. Is displayed. Since the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 focuses on entertaining the player, it is difficult to understand the details of the special lottery results drawn on the main control board 1310 that can be roughly recognized. Has become. On the other hand, in the function display unit 1400, the result of the special lottery selected is accurately displayed. However, since the result is displayed by the light emission of the plurality of small LEDs 1401, the displayed content can be understood only at a glance. It is difficult.

  Therefore, by photographing the function display unit 1400 with a digital camera (digital camera) or a camera attached to a mobile phone, the light emitting state of the LED in the function display unit 1400 is analyzed, and the contents displayed on the function display unit 1400 are analyzed. It is conceivable to try to know quickly.

  However, if the special lottery result selected by the light emission of the LED in the function display unit 1400 can be easily determined, the effect display indicates that the special lottery result displayed on the function display unit 1400 is “losing”. Even if an effect image for suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the device 1600, knowing the result makes it impossible to enjoy the effect by the effect image, and desires to end the effect image early. However, some players may get irritated and lose interest in the game.

  On the other hand, the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment allows the player to clearly see the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401, but when shooting with a digital camera or the like, the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 is not changed. This makes the displayed contents indistinct and cannot be determined.

  Specifically, the function display unit 1400A includes a function display substrate 1402 having a plurality of LEDs 1401 mounted on the front surface and a front surface of the function display substrate 1402, and transmits light from the LEDs 1401 independently and forwardly. 1403, a light-transmitting sheet 1404 provided in front of the reflector 1403, and an LED 1401 provided in front of the light-transmitting sheet 1404 and transmitted through the reflector 1403. And a reflector front 1405 for emitting light in different directions.

  As shown in FIG. 175, a plurality of LEDs 1401 are randomly mounted on the function display substrate 1402. After the reflector 1403, a plurality of through holes 1403a are provided so as to correspond to the respective LEDs 1401 of the function display substrate 1402. The plurality of through holes 1403a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display substrate 1402 (see FIG. 174 (b) and the like).

  The front 1405 of the reflector has a plurality of display holes 1405a corresponding to the respective through holes 1403a of the rear 1403 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The plurality of display holes 1405a are located immediately before the corresponding through-holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403 at the rear end sides thereof, and the front end sides thereof are perpendicular to the front of the functional display substrate 1402 passing through the center of the rear end side. It is located at various distances. That is, the plurality of display holes 1405a are oriented in different directions with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the function display substrate 1402.

  The front reflector 1405 has a distinction recess 1405b that is recessed from the front to the rear so as to connect the plurality of display holes 1405a. The plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into two, a display hole 1405a (LED 1401) relating to the first special lottery result and a display hole 1405a (LED 1401) relating to the second special lottery result, by the distinction concave portion 1405b.

  As shown in FIG. 177, the plurality of display holes 1405a on the front of the reflector 1405 show the LED 1401 when viewed from a player sitting at a position 50 cm to 70 cm away from the function display unit 1400A in front of the pachinko machine 1. Are directed in three directions: one that can be seen only by the left eye, one that can be seen only by the right eye, and one that can be seen by both the left and right eyes. That is, the plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into three: left eye, right eye, and both eyes.

  According to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, the light from all the LEDs 1401 is visible when the player looks at both eyes, so that when the special lottery result or the like is displayed, the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 is clearly displayed. The function can be visually recognized, and the same function as that of the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be exhibited without inferiority.

  Further, according to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, since the digital camera or the like is a single eye, either the left eye and both eyes or the right eye and both eyes is photographed. Therefore, it is difficult to capture the light emission state (light emission state) of all the LEDs 1401. That is, when photographing is performed with a digital camera or the like, the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be unclear, and it is difficult to determine the display content on the function display unit 1400A. Therefore, the display contents on the function display unit 1400A are clarified based on the photographed photograph, and the special lottery result of the lottery is determined as “losing”, mere “big hit”, “probable hit”, “time saving hit”, By knowing the "second big hit (per ST)", etc., it is not possible to enjoy the effect for indicating the special lottery result that has been drawn, or to enjoy the advantageous game state (for example, the "big hit" game) that is occurring. Can be avoided, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  According to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, the display holes 1405a in the front of the reflector 1405 have different orientations, and the display content is adjusted according to the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Of the function display unit 1400A can be seen unclearly from behind the seated player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility of peeping in from other players, and to play the game without hesitation by other players. Can be entertained.

  In addition, as described above, the display content can be viewed in good condition in accordance with the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that functions such as a digital camera can be performed from a position behind the player. Shooting of display contents on the display unit 1400A can be made more difficult, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, in the function display unit 1400A, the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405a is made different in the vertical direction in addition to the horizontal direction, so that the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see. When viewed from the height, the display contents are made to look good. Thus, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, it is necessary to match the height direction as well, and photographing the display contents on the function display unit 1400A can be made more difficult.

  In addition, since the directions of the display holes 1405a in the front of the reflector 1405 are made different for the left eye and the right eye, it is possible to suppress an increase in the distance in the left and right direction of the plurality of LEDs 1401 on the function display substrate 1402. The width of the display unit 1400A in the left-right direction can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are directed in different directions to be used for the left eye, the right eye, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a function display unit 1400B having a configuration as shown in FIG. 178 may be used.

  The function display unit 1400B includes a function display board 1411 on which a plurality of left LEDs 1411a and a plurality of right LEDs 1411b, which are separated by a predetermined distance (the distance between the left and right pupils of the player) in the left-right direction, are mounted on the front surface. A reflector 1412 is provided on the front side of the substrate 1411 and independently transmits light from the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b to the front, and a light-transmitting light provided on the front side of the reflector 1412. It includes a sheet 1413 and a front reflector 1414 that is provided on the front side of the translucent sheet 1413 and emits light from the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b that has passed through the rear reflector 1412 to the front.

  The left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display substrate 1411 are separated from each other by 40 mm to 80 mm in the left-right direction. A plurality of through holes 1412a are provided in the rear of the reflector 1412 so as to correspond to the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display substrate 1411. The plurality of through holes 1412a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display substrate 1411. A plurality of display holes 1414a are provided in the front 1414 of the reflector so as to correspond to the plurality of through holes 1412a of the rear 1412 of the reflector. The plurality of display holes 1414a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display substrate 1411.

  The function display unit 1400B is configured such that, when viewed from a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a is visible only to the left eye, and the light from the right LED 1411b is visible only to the right eye. ing. Therefore, when the player looks at both eyes, the light from all of the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, so that the same function as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be exhibited.

  Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b are separated from each other in the left and right direction, only one of them can be photographed with a monocular digital camera or the like. The same operation and effect as those of the function display unit 1400A can be obtained.

  Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the plurality of display holes 1414a of the front 1414 of the reflector are oriented in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display substrate 1411, the positions other than the front of the function display unit 1400B can be seen. Since the displayed content is not clearly seen, it is possible to make it difficult to photograph the displayed content using a digital camera or the like.

  Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of display holes 1414a of the front of the reflector 1414 are directed in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display substrate 1411, and all of them are in the same direction. And the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B having a configuration that is difficult to photograph with a single-lens digital camera or the like are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the function display unit having a configuration as shown in FIG. The unit 1400C may be used.

  The function display unit 1400C emits invisible light (infrared ray, ultraviolet ray, etc.) that can be photographed by a digital camera or the like, thereby making it difficult to determine the display content. Specifically, a function display substrate 1421 on which a plurality of LEDs 1421 a are mounted on the front surface, a reflector 1422 provided on the front side of the function display substrate 1421, and a flat plate provided on the front side of the reflector 1422. The light guide plate 1423 includes an auxiliary substrate 1424 on which an invisible light LED 1424a for irradiating invisible light to a side surface of the light guide plate 1423, and a reflector front 1425 provided on the front side of the light guide plate 1423.

  The rear reflector 1422 has a plurality of through holes 1422a respectively corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 1421a of the function display substrate 1421. When light from the invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 is incident on the light guide plate 1423 from the side surface, at least a portion of the display hole 1425a in the front 1425 of the reflector emits light.

  The invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 emits either infrared light or ultraviolet light as invisible light. The invisible light LED 1424a emits light when a plurality of LEDs 1421a display a special lottery result or the like, and emits invisible light from the light guide plate 1423. The front 1425 of the reflector has a plurality of display holes 1425a corresponding to the through holes 1422a of the rear 1422 of the reflector. The plurality of through-holes 1422a at the rear of the reflector 1422 and the plurality of display holes 1425a at the front 1425 of the reflector are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display substrate 1421.

  According to this function display unit 1400C, even if the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light by the invisible light LED 1424a, the invisible light cannot be seen by the player, so the LED 1421a provided behind the light guide plate 1423 is provided. And the display contents can be viewed in a good condition.

  On the other hand, if the function display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or the like, if the device can capture invisible light, the light guide plate that emits light by invisible light will cause the image to appear as if all display holes 1425a are emitting light. The displayed contents can be unclear, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration including the post-reflector 1403 (post-reflector 1412) and the light-transmitting sheet 1404 (light-transmitting sheet 1413) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the function display substrate 1402 (function A configuration in which the front of the reflector 1405 (the front of the reflector 1414) is directly provided on the front surface of the display substrate 1411) may be adopted.

  In addition, as a configuration that makes it difficult to capture the display content on the function display unit using a digital camera or the like, for example, LEDs may be dispersed and displayed over a wider range than the shooting range of the digital camera or the like, or a player may turn on the LED. It may appear that the LED is turned off when shooting with a digital camera or the like, but it may be displayed by blinking the LED at such a speed that it is turned off, or the LED that is not related to the display is turned off to the player It may be displayed in combination with a plurality of dummy LEDs that appear to be turned on or off when photographing with a digital camera or the like, or by arranging high-brightness LEDs near the function display unit When photographing with a digital camera or the like, halation may be caused so that the displayed content is not captured.

[11. Second Embodiment of Mounting Magnetic Sensor]
Next, a second embodiment of attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050 different from the game board 5 and the like will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor, FIG. 180 (b) is an explanatory view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor of FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in ()), and FIG. 4 (d) is an exploded perspective view of the mounting of the magnetic sensor shown by a holding member different from (c).

  The second embodiment of the mounting of the magnetic sensor 1050 includes a holding member 1071 which is mounted at a predetermined position on the game board 5 and has a pair of locking portions 1071a formed of through holes, and a locking of the holding member 1071. A holding container 1072 that has an elastic claw 1072a that is locked to the portion 1071a and houses the magnetic sensor 1050. The holding member 1071 is formed of a synthetic resin. The holding container 1072 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 can be visually recognized from the outside. Further, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are formed of a non-magnetic material.

  Further, the holding container 1072 has a hole on the surface on the side opposite to the elastic claws 1072a. Through the hole of the holding container 1072, an electric wire from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in the holding container 1072 can be drawn out.

  According to the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, since the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of a non-magnetic material, when the magnet is brought close to the game area 5a, the holding member 1071 and the like draw magnetic lines of force from the magnet. It can be prevented from approaching, and the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, to detect fraudulent acts using the magnets at an early stage, and to notify the suspicious magnetism detection by the magnetic sensor 1050 to inform the fraudulent acts. Can be discouraged, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to fraudulent acts can be provided.

  Further, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding member 1071. Therefore, the magnetic sensor 1050 is made of a magnetic material like a conventional pachinko machine. Even without using metal screws, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, and the time and labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. Cost increase can be suppressed.

  Further, the holding portion 1071a is provided with a locking portion 1071a penetrating therethrough, and the elastic sensor 1072a of the holding container 1072 is locked to the locking portion 1071a so that the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached. The configuration of the holding member 1071 to be attached can be simplified, and the cost of the holding member 1071 can be reduced.

  Further, since the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 are locked with the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), a plurality of sets of locking portions are previously attached to the holding member 1071. The position where the magnetic sensor 1050 is mounted can be set arbitrarily by providing the 1071a and locking the elastic claw 1072a to an arbitrary locking portion 1071a. Alternatively, another locking portion 1071a may be provided on the holding member 1071 at a position different from the locking portion 1071a where the elastic claw 1072a is locked. Accordingly, when the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 is to be changed or when the magnetic sensor 1050 is to be added, it is possible to cope without replacing the holding member 1071 with a new one. The versatility of the member 1071 can be improved.

  Also, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 and is locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily standardized. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 is locked to the locking portion 1071a at an appropriate position. Can be provided at an arbitrary position or the position can be easily changed. Accordingly, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or added, the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to a design change or a model change while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. be able to.

  Further, an urging portion such as a protrusion for pressing the magnetic sensor 1050 housed therein may be provided inside the holding container 1072. Accordingly, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be suppressed from vibrating finely, so that disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 and occurrence of poor contact due to the vibration can be reduced. The sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

  In the above-described embodiment, a penetrating hole is shown as the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any shape may be used as long as the elastic claw 1072a can be locked. , Slits, etc.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the holding container 1072 has been described as holding the magnetic sensor 1050 in the vertical direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the holding container may hold the magnetic sensor 1050 in the horizontal direction.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is accommodated in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claws 1072a, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the holding member 1071. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An elastic claw may be formed on 1053 so as to be locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071.

  In the above description, the mounting of the magnetic sensor 1050 has been described, but this mounting structure may be used for mounting the vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be housed in a holding container having elastic claws, and the elastic claws may be engaged with the engaging portions of the holding member to attach the vibration sensor. The vibration sensor is not affected by the surrounding magnetic material. However, if the same mounting structure as that of the magnetic sensor 1050 is used, it is effective to change / move the mounting location and reduce the cost for mounting.

[12. Another embodiment related to attachment of a decorative body such as a seal]
Subsequently, another embodiment related to the attachment of a decorative body such as a seal different from the above embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184 and the like. In this chapter, a member provided with a predetermined decoration is referred to as a decorative body, a member provided with the decorative body on one surface is referred to as a first member, and a member provided on the other surface side of the first member. The second member will be described. The decorative body, the first member, and the second member may be arranged in front and rear, may be arranged up and down, or may be arranged left and right.

  FIG. 181 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as a positioning hole for the second member, and FIG. 181 (b) is a view for removing the decorative body. It is an explanatory view showing a cross section of an example in which a closed space is formed by a second member behind a separation hole of the first member, and (c) shows a state in which decorative bodies having different thicknesses are attached in (b). (D) is an explanatory view showing an example in which a separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as a mounting hole of the decorative body. FIG. 182 (a) is an explanatory view showing the decorative member attached to the first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and (c) is a decorative member different from (a). FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a first member to which the first member is attached from the front.

  FIG. 183 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, FIG. 183 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member, and FIG. () Is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member provided symmetrically, and (d) is a description showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member provided symmetrically in a shape different from that of (c). FIG. FIG. 184 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, FIG. 184 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a decorative body and a 1st member in (a) and (c), (d) is a front view which shows the relationship between the decorative body of a form different from (a), and a movable 1st member. (E) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Q in (d).

  First, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181 (a), a decorative body 1801 on which predetermined decorations, characters, and the like are printed and formed of a sheet-like seal, and a first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached on one side are provided. , A second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821.

  The first member 1821 is a flat plate portion 1821a, a mounting recess 1821b that is recessed from one surface of the flat portion 1821a and to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and is opposite to the mounting recess 1821b of the flat portion 1821a. A boss portion 1821c protruding from the other surface portion, a separation hole 1821d penetrating the boss portion 1821c and the flat plate portion 1821a, and protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. Rib 1821e. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801.

  The second member 1841 protrudes from one surface of the base portion 1841a, the base portion 1841a having one surface to which the boss 1821c of the first member 1821 and the tip of the rib 1821e abut, and separates the first member 1821. And a positioning projection 1841b inserted into the hole 1821d. By inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned with respect to each other.

  When assembled, the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 has one side closed by a decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1821b and the other side closed by a positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841. And the inside is a closed space. The separation hole 1821d is provided at a position near the edge of the mounting recess 1821b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801. The separation hole 1821d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 on the second member 1841.

  According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly attached to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821, the other side of the first member 1821 By passing the rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1821d and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to the one side with the tip thereof, the decorative body 1801 can be removed so that the vicinity of the edge of the decorative body 1801 is turned up to one side, and the turned upside down When the worker pulls the part, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b, and the decorative body 1801 can be re-attached.

  Further, in a state where the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated from each other, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, and the decorative body 1801 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof, Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b, the replacement work of the decorative body 1801 due to the model change can be facilitated.

  Further, as described above, in a state where the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b using the separation hole 1821d. It is possible to easily separate the components from each other for each material, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1821b, the separation hole 1821d can be hidden from one side, so that the appearance of the separation hole 1821d can be suppressed from being deteriorated, and the separation hole 1821d can be suppressed for the player. Can be hardly noticed, and fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1821d can be hardly planned.

  Further, in a state where the decorative body 1801 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1821d is formed by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached. Since it is closed from the other side and does not penetrate the hole that passes through the whole like a conventional pachinko machine, a linear line like a piano wire is passed through the hole from the other side than the second member 1841. It is possible to prevent an illegal tool from being inserted into the game board 5, and to prevent an illegal act from being performed.

  Further, since the separation hole 1821d is closed from the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decoration body 1801 from one side and is inserted into the separation hole 1821d, the second Since the positioning protrusion 1841b of the member 1841 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side, the illegal tool can be prevented from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d. It is possible to prevent fraudulent conduct, and since a trace of the decorative body 1801 is left by a fraudulent tool penetrating the decorative body 1801, the execution of fraudulent behavior can be hesitated. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect on the pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 may be replaced by the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second The attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) and the second member 1841 may be a game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

  Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metatic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181 (b), a decorative body 1801 formed of a sheet-like seal on which predetermined decorations and characters are printed, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached on one side. And a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration (not shown).

  The first member 1822 penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and penetrates the flat portion 1822a at a position of the mounting recess 1822b. And a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. Although not shown in detail, at least a part of the plurality of ribs 1822d is provided to surround the separation hole 1822c.

  When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 has one side closed by a decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1822b and the other side has a plurality of ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842. It is open in a closed space surrounded by surfaces, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position near an edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801.

  According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly stuck to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822, the other side of the first member 1822 By passing the rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to the one side with the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the decorative body 1801 can be removed so as to be turned up to one side, and the turned upside down When the worker pulls the portion, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, and the decorative body 1801 can be re-attached.

  Further, in a state where the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1801 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof, Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting concave portion 1822b, the replacement work of the decorative body 1801 accompanying the model change can be facilitated.

  Further, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to easily separate the components from each other for each material, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, so that the appearance of the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed from being deteriorated, and the separation hole 1822c can be prevented from being supplied to the player. Can be hardly noticed, and fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1822c can be hardly planned.

  Further, in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached. Since the hole that passes through the entire machine is not penetrated unlike the conventional pachinko machine, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is passed through the hole from the other side than the second member 1842. It can be prevented from being inserted into the inside, and it is possible to prevent improper conduct.

  In addition, since the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decoration body 1801 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 further increases the separation tool. Can be prevented from being inserted (penetrated) into the other side of the game board, so that a fraudulent tool can be prevented from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, and illegal acts can be performed. In addition, since the improper tool penetrates the decorating body 1801 to leave a trace on the decorating body 1801, it is possible to hesitate to perform a fraudulent act, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent to fraudulent acts. can do.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be replaced with the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (start port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (a panel board 1110, a panel holder 1120) while the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, and the like are used.

  Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metatic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181 (c), a decorative body 1802 made of a seal provided with a predetermined decoration and having a certain thickness (for example, 0.4 mm to 5 mm) and a decorative body 1802 on one side are provided. It has a first member 1822 to be attached and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration (not shown).

  The first member 1822 penetrates through the flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, and a portion of the mounting recess 1822b. And a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed to be shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1802. Although not shown in detail, at least a part of the plurality of ribs 1822d is provided to surround the separation hole 1822c.

  When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by a decorative body 1802 attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and on the other side is a plurality of ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842. It is open in a closed space surrounded by surfaces, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position near an edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1802.

  According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the decorative body 1802 cannot be correctly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822, the other side of the first member 1822 By passing the rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1802 from the other side to the one side with the tip thereof, the decorative body 1802 can be removed so that the vicinity of the edge of the decorative body 1802 is turned up to one side, and the curled up When the worker pulls the portion, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, and the decorative body 1802 can be re-attached.

  Further, in a state where the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip thereof presses the decorative body 1802 from the other side, Since the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting concave portion 1822b, the replacement work of the decorative body 1802 accompanying the model change can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to easily separate the components from each other for each material, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

  Also, by attaching the decorative body 1802 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, so that the appearance of the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed from being deteriorated, and the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed for the player. Can be hardly noticed, and fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1822c can be hardly planned.

  In addition, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1802 is attached. Since the hole that passes through the entire machine is not penetrated unlike the conventional pachinko machine, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is passed through the hole from the other side than the second member 1842. It can be prevented from being inserted into the inside, and it is possible to prevent improper conduct.

  Further, since the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decoration body 1802 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 further increases the separation tool. Can be prevented from being inserted (penetrated) into the other side of the game board, so that a fraudulent tool can be prevented from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, and illegal acts can be performed. In addition, since the improper tool penetrates the decorating body 1802 to leave traces on the decorating body 1802, it is possible to hesitate to perform a fraudulent act, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent to fraudulent acts. can do.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be replaced with the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (start port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (a panel board 1110, a panel holder 1120) while the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, and the like are used. Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decoration holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or a decoration substrate.

  Examples of the decorative body 1802 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metatic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like. Examples of the decorative body 1802 include those formed by injection molding, vacuum molding, air pressure molding, high frequency molding, or the like.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181 (d), a decorative member 1803 provided with a predetermined decoration and having a large thickness (for example, 2 mm to 20 mm) and rigidity, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative member 1803 is attached on one side. And a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822.

  The decorative body 1803 has a mounting dowel 1803a projecting to the other side. The decorative body 1803 can be mounted on the first member 1822 by press-fitting the mounting dowel 1803a into a separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 described later.

  The first member 1822 has a flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one surface of the flat portion 1822a and is in contact with the decorative body 1803, and a mounting dowel that penetrates the flat portion 1822a at the mounting recess 1822b. It has a separation hole 1822c into which the 1803a is press-fitted, and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803. Although not shown in detail, at least a part of the plurality of ribs 1822d is provided to surround the separation hole 1822c.

  When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed at one side by a mounting dowel 1803a protruding from the decorative body 1803, and the other side is provided with a plurality of ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842. It is open in the enclosed space surrounded by, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position near an edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1803.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the decorative body 1803 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment recess 1822b of the first member 1822, it is separated from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing the rod-shaped member through the hole 1822c and pressing the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side to the one side with the tip thereof, the surface of the other side of the decorative body 1803 is separated from the surface of the mounting recess 1822b and the decorative body 1803 is removed. Can be easily removed from the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1803 can be reattached.

  In a state where the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip of the rod pushes the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side. By doing so, since the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822, the replacement work of the decorative body 1803 accompanying the model change can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, as described above, in a state where the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 using the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to easily separate the components of the pachinko machine from each other, thereby reducing the cost of disposing the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the dowel 1803a is press-fitted into the separation hole 1822c and the decorative body 1803 is mounted on the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, so that deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c is suppressed. In addition to this, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and to make it difficult for the player to take an illegal action using the separation hole 1822c.

  Further, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. Since the hole that passes through the whole is not penetrated, it is possible to prevent a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side than the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent improper conduct.

  Also, since the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fitted into the separation hole 1822c from one side and the decoration body 1803 has rigidity, it is attempted to insert an unauthorized tool through the decoration body 1803 from one side and into the separation hole 1822c. Also, penetration can be prevented by the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the mounting dowel 1803a. By analogy, even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side, so that the separation hole 1822c is It is possible to prevent the intrusion of an illegal tool into the game board 5 from one side through which the illegal tool is penetrated, and to prevent the illegal tool from penetrating the decorative body 1803. Traces, it is possible to hesitate to carry out wrongdoing, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against wrongdoing.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be replaced with the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (start port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (a panel board 1110, a panel holder 1120) while the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, and the like are used. Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decoration holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or a decoration substrate.

  In addition, as the decorative body 1803, a decorative body provided with a relief-shaped decoration and formed by injection molding can be given. Further, the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 may be formed integrally with the decorative body 1803, may be formed by insert molding, or may be separately assembled. good.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 182 (a) and (b), a decorative body 1804 on which predetermined decorations, characters, and the like are printed and formed of a sheet-like seal, and a decorative body 1804 is attached to one side. And a first member 1823. Note that the configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the first member 1823 may include any of the configurations described above.

  The decorative body 1804 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, character, or the like is printed, and has a light-transmitting property. The decorative body 1804 has a substantially square outer shape, and is provided with chamfers 1804a having a predetermined radius at three corners. Since the decorative body 1804 has an overall shape whose orientation is difficult to specify, the orientation can be specified by making the shape of one corner different from that of the remaining corners. . Note that, here, the chamfered portion 1804a is shown as an R chamfer, but may be a C chamfer.

  Decorative body 1804 has a glue surface 1804b (shaded portion in FIG. 182 (a)) provided on the back surface with a substantially constant width (width within a range of 3 mm to 6 mm) along the outer peripheral edge. have. The width of the glue surface 1804b is set to an appropriate width according to the size of the decorative body 1804. Restricting the glue surface 1804b to only the outer peripheral edge in this way is a transparent seal (decorative body 1804), which is often used when it is desired to show an electric decoration or a design surface such as an LED at the rear.

  The first member 1823 has a flat plate portion 1823a and a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1804 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1823a and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1804 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) It has a recessed portion 1823b that is concave and to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1823a at the portion of the recessed portion 1823b. This first member 1823 is formed transparent.

  The separation hole 1823c is provided at a position (closer to the glue surface 1804b) where the glue surface 1804b does not cover when the decorative body 1804 is attached, approaching the corner of the mounting recess 1823b. Thus, it is possible to prevent the adhesive strength of the decorative body 1804 from being reduced due to the adhesive surface 1804b covering the separation hole 1823c.

  This separation hole 1823c is a round hole. The inner diameter of the separation hole 1823c of this embodiment is in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separating rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1823c becomes small, so that it becomes easy to bend and the decoration 1804 may not be sufficiently pressed. If the size of the separation hole 1823c is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the decoration body 1804 at the separation hole 1823c, and the appearance of the decoration body 1804 may be deteriorated.

  Also, the first member 1823 is formed at three corners of the mounting recess 1823b, and is provided with a chamfered portion 1823d (having a larger radius) than the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804. The remaining one corner is used as an incorrect sticking prevention unit 1823e. Thus, the mounting recess 1823b has a shape similar to the decorative body 1804. Two edges forming the corners of the mounting recess 1823b where the chamfered portion 1823d is not provided are set as contact surfaces serving as a reference for attaching the decorative body 1804. Thereby, at least two clearance directions for attaching the decorative body 1804 are ensured, and the attaching operation is facilitated.

  Further, the first member 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f indicating a portion of the contact surface in the mounting recess 1823b. The identification portion 1823f is recessed from the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. When the operator views the identification portion 1823f, the position of the contact surface for attaching the decorative body 1804 can be immediately recognized, and the position of the contact surface can be prevented from being mistaken. It is easy to do.

  In the first member 1823, it is desirable that the distance from the outer peripheral edge of the flat plate portion 1823a to the outer peripheral edge of the mounting recess 1823b be 0.5 mm or more. If the distance is shorter than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, a portion outside the mounting concave portion 1823b is likely to be chipped.

  When the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b, first, the corner of the decorative body 1804 where the chamfered portion 1804a is not provided is placed on the contact surface of the mounting recess 1823b indicated by the identification portion 1823f (incorrectly attached). The adhesive portion 1804b is brought into contact with the prevention portion 1823e), and the adhesive surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recessed portion 1823b from the portion to be adhered. If the corner where the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804 is provided is to be brought into contact with the contact surface (the erroneous sticking preventing portion 1823e), the shape of the erroneous sticking preventing portion 1823e with respect to the chamfered portion 1804a is obtained. Are different from each other, it is possible to notice that the sticking direction of the decorative body 1804 is wrong, and the decorative body 1804 can be stuck in the regular direction.

  According to the configuration of this embodiment, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823, and the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the other side to the one side by the tip of the rod. The vicinity can be removed so as to be turned up to one side, and the worker can pull the turned up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1804 from the mounting concave portion 1823b (the first member 1823). The same operation and effect as the configuration can be obtained.

  In addition, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position that does not cover the glue surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting concave portion 1823b, the decoration hole 1823b is covered with the glue surface 1804b. It is possible to prevent the sticking strength of the body 1804 from decreasing, and it is possible to make the decorative body 1804 hard to come off.

  Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention part 1823e is provided in the mounting concave portion 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is stuck, if the decorative body 1804 is to be stuck in a direction different from the normal one, the decorative body 1804 is stuck. The difference between the shape of the chamfered portion 1804a and the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e makes it possible to notice an error in the orientation of the decorative body 1804, and attaches the decorative body 1804 to the first member 1823 in a regular direction. It is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from being shipped with the decorative body 1804 stuck in the wrong direction.

  Further, since the identification portion 1823f indicating the contact surface is provided in the mounting concave portion 1823b of the first member 1823, it is possible for the operator to immediately recognize the position of the contact surface serving as a reference for attaching the decorative body 1804. In addition, it is possible to prevent the position of the contact surface from being mistaken, and to easily perform the attaching operation.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 is replaced with the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) or a member (decoration holding member) provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 may be used.

  Examples of the decorative body 1804 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metatic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

  Next, the embodiment of FIG. 182 (c) is different from the embodiment of FIGS. 182 (a) and (b) in that the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is added to a portion along the outer peripheral edge, and on one diagonal line. Is also provided at the part. Other configurations are the same as those of the embodiment of FIGS. 182 (a) and (b), and description thereof will be omitted.

  According to the present embodiment, in addition to having the same operation and effect as described above, since the glue surface 1804b is also provided diagonally on the back surface of the decorative body 1804, the bonding strength is increased and the decorative body 1804 is harder to come off. In addition, even if the decorative body 1804 contracts at a different rate from the first member 1823 due to a change in environment such as temperature and humidity, the central portion is stuck by the diagonal glue surface 1804b. Therefore, the decoration 1804 can be prevented from swelling or waving, and the appearance of the decoration 1804 can be prevented from being deteriorated.

  Further, since the glue surface 1804b is provided diagonally, the glue surface can be reduced as compared with the case where the glue surface is provided on the entire surface of the decorative body 1804, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. it can. Further, since the bonding strength of the decorative body 1804 is lower than in the case where the glue surface is provided on the entire surface, the work of removing the decorative body 1804 using the separation hole 1823c can be facilitated.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 183 (a), a horizontally long rectangular decorative body 1805 (shaded portion) on which predetermined decorations, characters, and the like are printed and made of a sheet-like seal, and a decorative body on one side are shown. And a first member 1824 to which 1805 is attached. The configuration on the other side (including the second member) of the first member 1824 may include any of the above-described configurations. In the present embodiment, the description of the identification portion indicating the separation hole and the contact surface in the first member 1824 is omitted.

  The decorative body 1805 is a seal having a predetermined pattern, character, or the like printed on its surface. This decorative body 1805 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is provided with a C-chamfered chamfered portion 1805a which is obliquely cut at one corner (the lower left corner in the figure). Since the decorative body 1805 has a shape in which it is difficult to specify the vertical direction, the shape of one corner is different from the shape of the remaining corners, so that the direction can be specified. The glue surface of the decorative body 1805 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

  The first member 1824 has a flat plate portion 1824a and a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1805 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1824a and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1805 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) And a mounting recess 1824b to which the decorative body 1805 is attached.

  In addition, the first member 1824 has a C-chamfered erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c projecting into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner (lower left corner in the drawing) of the mounting recess 1824b. Thus, the mounting recess 1824b has a shape similar to the decorative body 1805. In this first member 1824, the part of the obliquely extending end of the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1824 c and the part of the short side connected to the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1824 c are the reference for attaching the decorative body 1805. Is set to the contact surface. Thereby, three directions of the clearance direction for attaching the decorative body 1805 are secured: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the perpendicular direction to the oblique side of the erroneous sticking prevention section 1824c. It is easy to perform the sticking work.

  In addition, in the first member 1824, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1824a to the mounting concave portion 1824b be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, a portion outside the mounting concave portion 1824b is likely to be chipped.

  When the decorative body 1805 is attached to the mounting concave portion 1824b, first, the oblique side of the chamfered portion 1805a of the decorative body 1805 and the short side connected to the chamfered portion 1805a are contacted with the mounting surface of the mounting concave portion 1824b. (A part of the oblique side of the sticking prevention part 1824c and a part of the short side connected to the erroneous sticking prevention part 1824c), and the glue surface on the back side is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1824b from the part. wear.

  If the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered portion 1805a is not provided is to be brought into contact with the contact surface (the erroneous sticking preventing portion 1824c), the shape of the erroneous sticking preventing portion 1824c with respect to the chamfered portion 1805a. Are different, it is possible to notice that the attaching direction of the decorative body 1805 is wrong, and the decorative body 1805 can be attached in a regular direction. Also, when the decorative body 1805 is attached to the mounting recess 1824b in a wrong direction, the right-angled corner of the decorative body 1805 protrudes from the mounting recess 1824b at the site of the erroneous sticking prevention part 1824c. The erroneous attachment of the decorative body 1805 can be noticed.

  According to the present embodiment, since the erroneous sticking prevention part 1824c is provided in the mounting concave part 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decorative body 1805 is stuck, the decorative body 1805 may be stuck in a different direction from the regular one. Then, since the shape of the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered portion 1805a is not provided is different from the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention part 1824c, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1805. 1805 can be stuck to the first member 1824 in a regular orientation, and it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1805 from being shipped with being stuck in the wrong orientation.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 may be replaced by the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (start port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) or a member (decoration holding member) provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 may be used.

  Examples of the decorative body 1805 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metatic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 183 (b), a circular decorative body 1806 (shaded portion) on which predetermined decorations, characters, and the like are printed and made of a sheet-like seal, and a decorative body 1806 on one side. And a first member 1825 to which is attached. The configuration on the other side (including the second member) of the first member 1825 may include any of the above-described configurations. In the present embodiment, the description of the identification portion indicating the separation hole and the contact surface in the first member 1825 is omitted.

  The decorative body 1806 is a seal having a predetermined pattern, character, or the like printed on its surface. The decorative body 1806 has a circular outer shape, and is provided with a cutout portion 1806a which is cut out in an arc shape from the outside (the lower side in the figure). Since the decoration 1806 has a shape in which the orientation is difficult to specify, the notch 1806a is provided so that the orientation can be specified. The glue surface of the decorative body 1806 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

  The first member 1825 has a flat plate portion 1825a and a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1806 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1825a and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1806 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). And a mounting recess 1825b which is concave and to which the decorative body 1806 is attached.

  In addition, the first member 1825 has an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c that protrudes in an arc shape with a radius corresponding to the notch portion 1806a of the decorative body 1806 at a periphery (a lower end portion in the periphery in the figure) of the mounting concave portion 1825b. doing. Thus, the mounting recess 1825b has a shape similar to the decoration 1806. In this first member 1825, the arc-shaped end side of the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1825c is set as a contact surface serving as a reference for sticking the decorative body 1806. As a result, at least two directions, that is, the direction along the arc of the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1825c and the direction away from the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1825c (vertical direction in the drawing), are used as the clearance directions for sticking the decorative body 1806. It is secured and easy to apply.

  In the first member 1825, the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b is desirably 1 mm or more. If the distance is shorter than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, a portion outside the mounting recess 1825b is likely to be chipped.

  When attaching the decorative body 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first, the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806 is brought into contact with the contact surface of the mounting recess 1825b (the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c), and the adhesive surface on the back side from the part is removed. It is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b and is attached.

  When the decorative body 1806 is applied to the peripheral surface other than the abutting surface (the erroneous sticking prevention part 1825c) of the mounting concave part 1825b and is attached, the decorative body 1806 protrudes from the mounting concave part 1825b at the site of the erroneous sticking preventing part 1825c. In this state, the worker can notice the erroneous attachment of the decorative body 1806.

  According to the present embodiment, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c is provided in the mounting concave portion 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decorative body 1806 is stuck, the decorative body 1806 may be stuck in a direction different from the normal. Then, the decorative body 1806 protrudes at the site of the erroneous sticking prevention part 1825c, and the user can notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1806. Thus, the decorative body 1806 can be stuck to the first member 1825 in a regular direction. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1806 from being shipped in a state where the decorative body 1806 is stuck in the wrong direction.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 may be replaced with the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (start port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) or a member (decoration holding member) provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 may be used.

  Examples of the decorative body 1806 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metatic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 183 (c) and (d), a pair of decorative body left 1807L and decorative body right which are provided symmetrically and have predetermined decorations, characters, etc. printed thereon and made of a sheet-like seal are provided. 1807R (shaded portion) and a pair of first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R to which the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are attached on one side. Note that the configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R may include any of the above-described configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the identification portions indicating the separation holes and the contact surfaces in the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R is omitted.

  The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are stickers having a predetermined pattern, character, or the like printed on the surface. The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are symmetrical with each other. The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R have an arc-shaped edge that is close to each other and extends linearly up and down, and that bulges the upper end and the lower end of the edge in a direction away from each other. It is formed in a substantially semicircular shape that is long vertically and connected.

  The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R in FIG. 183 (c) have different radiuses of the R chamfers provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction, that is, at the upper and lower ends of the semicircle. On the other hand, the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R in FIG. 183 (d) have a semicircular upper end (one end in the longitudinal direction) chamfered and a lower end (the other end in the longitudinal direction) straight. Notched. Both the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R have shapes that are difficult to specify for the left and right when the top and bottom are reversed. I can identify it.

  The glue surfaces of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) and the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

  The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R are formed symmetrically to each other. The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R are a flat plate portion 1826a and a decorative body left 1807L and a decorative body right 1807R that are slightly larger than the decorative body 1806 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1826a. A mounting recess 1826b to which the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are stuck and which is recessed (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the mounting body, and an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c at the lower end of the mounting recess 1826b. doing.

  In FIG. 183 (c), the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R have an incorrect sticking prevention portion 1826c having an R chamfer shape having a radius larger than the radius of the R chamfer on the lower end side of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R. It is provided in. On the other hand, the erroneous sticking prevention portions 1826c of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R in FIG. 183 (d) are provided in a horizontally extending linear notch shape. In any of the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c is set to a contact surface serving as a reference for sticking the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R. Have been.

  Accordingly, in the embodiment of FIG. 183 (c), the clearance direction for attaching the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R is the arc direction that rolls the arc of the erroneous attachment prevention unit 1826c, and the erroneous attachment is performed. At least two directions, that is, a direction (a vertical direction in the drawing) away from the preventing portion 1826c, are secured. On the other hand, in the embodiment of FIG. 183 (d), the clearance direction for attaching the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R is the direction along the straight line of the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1826c (the horizontal direction in the figure), At least two directions, that is, a direction (a vertical direction in the figure) away from the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1826c are secured. As described above, in any of the embodiments, at least two clearance directions are ensured, so that the attaching operation can be easily performed.

  In addition, in the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1826a to the mounting concave portion 1826b be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, a portion outside the mounting recess 1826b is likely to be chipped.

  When attaching the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, respectively, the longitudinal direction of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R is used. The larger radius of the R chamfer or the straight cutout of both ends is directed downward, and abuts against the contact surface of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b (the edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c). Then, the glue surface on the back side is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting concave portion 1826b from the portion to be attached.

  Note that if the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are turned upside down and then left and right upside down, the shape of the lower end portion will be affected by the contact surface (the erroneous sticking prevention section). 1826c), the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R can be noticed to be attached in the wrong direction, and the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R can be pasted in the correct orientation. Can be attached.

  According to the present embodiment, since the attachment recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R to which the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are affixed, the erroneous sticking prevention part 1826c is provided. When the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are to be pasted in a different direction from the regular one, the shapes of the longitudinal ends of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R and the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1826c Are different, it is possible to notice an error in the orientation of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R, and the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are oriented in the normal direction to the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R. And the decorative body left 1807L and decorative body right 1807R are pasted in the wrong direction. It can be prevented from being shipped in the state as it was.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R may be members (decoration holding members) provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000.

  Examples of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metatic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 184 (a) to (c), a decorative body 1808 formed of a sheet-like seal on which predetermined patterns, characters, and the like are printed, and the decorative body 1808 is attached to one side. And a movable first member 1827. Note that the configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the first member 1827 may include any of the above-described configurations. In the present embodiment, the description of the identification unit indicating the contact surface of the first member 1827 is omitted.

  The decorative body 1808 is a seal having a predetermined pattern, character, or the like printed on its surface. The decorative body 1808 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and has two chamfered upper corners and two lower corners. The difference between the upper and lower chamfer shapes allows the orientation of the decorative body 1808 to be specified. The glue surface of the decorative body 1808 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

  The first member 1827 has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1827a and a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1808 from one side of the flat plate portion 1827a and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1808 (0. (4 mm to 1.0 mm) a recessed recess 1827b to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, a separation hole 1827c penetrating the flat plate portion 1827a at the location of the recess 1827b, and two lower corners of the recess 1827b. And an erroneous sticking prevention section 1827d provided in the section.

  In addition, the first member 1827 has a pair of shaft portions 1827e that protrude from the vicinity of the lower ends of the left and right sides of the flat plate portion 1827a in the left-right direction, respectively, in a columnar shape. As shown in FIG. 184 (b), the shaft portion 1827e is located on the other side of the surface of the mounting recess 1827b. The first member 1827 has a pair of shaft portions 1827e rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1827 is movable and can rotate (rotate) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1827e. The shaft portion 1827e of the first member 1827 may be formed integrally with the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, may be formed by insert molding, or may be separately assembled. good.

  The separation hole 1827c is a round hole, and is provided near the upper corner in the mounting recess 1827b. Since the two separation holes 1827c are provided at positions far from the axis of the shaft 1827e, the weight of the first member 1827 at a position far from the axis of the shaft 1827e can be reduced. The rotational moment acting when the 1827 is rotated (rotated) can be reduced, the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved lightly. it can. Further, since the two separation holes 1827c are provided near the upper left and right corners, the forces applied to the left and right shaft portions 1827e can be made uniform, and the first member 1827 is balanced. This can reduce uneven wear and the like.

  The inner diameter of the separation hole 1827c of this embodiment is in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separating rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1827c becomes smaller, so that the separation rod 1827c is likely to bend and the decoration 1808 may not be sufficiently pressed. If the separation hole 1827c is larger than this, the decoration 1808 may bend at the portion of the separation hole 1827c, and the appearance of the decoration 1808 may be deteriorated.

  The erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d projects into the mounting recess 1827b in a shape corresponding to the C-chamfer at the lower corner of the decorative body 1808. In this embodiment, the diagonal edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d and the lower edge of the mounting recess 1827b are set as abutment surfaces serving as a reference for sticking the decorative body 1808.

  Since the incorrect sticking prevention portion 1827d protrudes from the mounting recess 1827b, the weight of the first member 1827 increases, but the wrong sticking prevention portion 1827d is provided at a position close to the axis of the shaft portion 1827e. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1827d can be reduced as much as possible, and an increase in the load on the rotational driving of the first member 1827 can be suppressed. In addition, since the erroneous sticking prevention portions 1827d are provided at the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b, the first member 1827 can be balanced, and uneven wear and the like of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. And the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

  In the first member 1827, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1827a to the mounting concave portion 1827b be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, a portion outside the mounting concave portion 1827b is likely to be chipped.

  When attaching the decorative body 1808 to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827, first, the C-chamfered corner of the decorative body 1808 is brought into contact with the contact surface of the mounting recess 1827b (the erroneous sticking prevention part 1827d). Then, the glue surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting concave portion 1827b from the portion to be stuck. If the decorative body 1808 is to be pasted upside down, the shape of the erroneous sticking preventing portion 1827d is different from the shape of the rounded chamfer at the corner of the decorative body 1808. The decoration 1808 can be attached in a regular orientation. Also, when the decorative body 1808 is stuck to the mounting recess 1827b in the wrong direction, the corner of the decorative body 1808 protrudes from the mounting recess 1827b at the site of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d, and the decorative body 1808 is provided to the operator. 1808 can be noticed.

  Further, the first member 1827 is concave at a portion near the edge in the mounting concave portion 1827b, and has a separation groove 1827f extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 184 (b)). When the decoration 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, the separation groove 1827f straddles the decoration 1808, and forms a space between the separation groove 1827f and the decoration 1808. When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b and the part of the decorative groove 1807f of the decorative body 1808 is pressed from the outside in a state where the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, a part of the decorative body 1808 is depressed into the separating groove 1827f. At the same time, the edge of the decorative body 1808 is raised from the mounting recess 1827b, and the decorative body 1808 can be removed from the mounting recess 1827b by pulling the raised portion.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827, and the decorative body 1808 is pressed from the other side to the one side by the tip of the rod. The decoration can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827) by the operator pulling the wound portion so that the vicinity can be rolled to one side. The same operation and effect as the configuration can be obtained.

  In addition, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d is provided in the mounting concave portion 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decorative body 1808 is stuck, if the decorative body 1808 is to be stuck in a direction different from the normal one, the decorative body 1808 is stuck. Is different from the shape of the corner portion of the decorative member 1807d and the shape of the erroneous sticking preventing portion 1827d, it is possible to notice an error in the orientation of the decorative body 1808, and the decorative body 1808 is stuck to the first member 1827 in a regular direction. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1808 from being shipped with the decorative body 1808 stuck in the wrong direction.

  Further, since the separation hole 1827c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation and the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d is provided at a position near the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1827 is rotated. Since the rotation moment can be reduced, the load on the rotation driving of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved (rotated) lightly.

  Also, since two separation holes 1827c and two erroneous sticking prevention portions 1827d are provided in the first member 1827, the forces acting on the left and right shaft portions 1827e can be balanced, and the shaft portions 1827e can be balanced. Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be used as a door member of a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a special winning opening, or provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. You may make it the movable member for effects.

  Examples of the decorative body 1808 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metatic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

  By the way, when the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the special winning opening 2005, the special winning opening 2006, and the like, the game ball B comes into contact with the decorative body 1808. It is desirable that the member 1827 has the following relationship.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), the distance from the front surface of the flat plate portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, and the distance from the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 is d. When the distance to the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 is c, and the radius of the game ball B is r, the distance d is set within the range of [0 <d <r]. It is desirable that c be in the range of [0 ≦ c <(2rd ＾ 2-d ＾ 2) ＾ 0.5]. The expressions in the parentheses are expressions.

  Thereby, since the game ball B can be prevented from contacting the upper end side of the decorative body 1808, the decorative body 1808 can be prevented from coming off due to the contact of the game ball B, and the occurrence of troubles is suppressed. Can be done.

  Note that the distance d is desirably in the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. If the distance d is smaller than this, the decorative body 1808 may protrude forward from the flat plate portion 1827a depending on the tolerance of the decorative body 1808, and the game ball B may be able to contact the upper end side. Is larger than this, the shadow due to the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b tends to fall on the decoration 1808, and the decoration effect of the decoration 1808 may be reduced.

  Further, the contact surface in the mounting recess 1827b may be set to the upper side edge. As a result, the upper end side of the decorative body 1808 comes into contact with the upper end side of the mounting concave portion 1827b, so that the game ball B does not come into contact with the upper end side of the decorative body 1808, and is similar to the above. Action and effect can be obtained.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 184 (d) and (e), a decorative body 1809 formed of a sheet-like seal on which a predetermined pattern or character is printed, and the decorative body 1809 is attached to one side. And a movable first member 1828. The configuration on the other side (including the second member) of the first member 1828 may include any of the above-described configurations. In the present embodiment, the description of the identification unit indicating the contact surface of the first member 1828 is omitted.

  The decorative body 1809 is a seal having a predetermined pattern, character, or the like printed on its surface. The decorative body 1809 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and has two upper corners chamfered, and two lower corners provided with a cutout 1809a cut out in a square shape. . The notch portion 1809a is formed in a shape corresponding to an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d of the first member 1828 described later. The difference in the shape of the upper and lower corners allows the orientation of the decorative body 1809 to be specified. The glue surface of the decorative body 1809 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

  The first member 1828 has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1828a and a size slightly larger than the decoration 1809 from one side of the flat portion 1828a and is deeper than the thickness of the decoration 1809 (0. (4 mm to 1.0 mm) a recessed recess 1828b to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, a separation hole 1828c penetrating the flat plate portion 1828a at the location of the recessed portion 1828b, and two lower corners of the recessed portion 1828b. And an erroneous sticking prevention section 1828d provided in the section.

  In addition, the first member 1828 has a semi-cylindrical shaft support portion 1828e bulging to one side with the shaft center in the left-right direction at the lower left and right corners of the flat plate portion 1827a, and a shaft support portion. A shaft hole 1828f is provided on each end surface on the left and right sides of the 1828e, and a columnar shaft portion 1828g inserted into the shaft hole 1828f. The first member 1828 has a pair of shaft portions 1828g rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1828 is movable and can rotate (rotate) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1828g. The shaft portion 1828g of the first member 1828 may be inserted at the time of molding the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, or may be separately assembled.

  The shaft support portion 1828e is provided up to the mounting recess 1828b, and a part of the shaft support portion 1828e forms an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d. The left and right corners on the lower side of the mounting recess 1828b are formed in a shape that is cut into a square by the shaft supporting portion 1828e (the erroneous sticking preventing portion 1828d).

  The separation hole 1828c is a round hole, and is provided near the upper corner in the mounting recess 1828b. Since the two separation holes 1828c are provided at positions far from the axis of the shaft 1828g, the weight of the first member 1828 at a position far from the axis of the shaft 1828g can be reduced. The rotation moment acting when the 1828 is rotated (rotated) can be reduced, the load applied to the rotation driving of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be moved lightly. it can. Further, since the two separation holes 1828c are provided near the upper left and right corners, the forces applied to the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be made uniform, and the first member 1828 is balanced. This can reduce uneven wear and the like.

  The inner diameter of the separation hole 1828c of this embodiment is in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1828c becomes small, so that the separation member 1828 may be easily bent and the decoration 1809 may not be sufficiently pressed. If the separation hole 1828c is larger than this, the decoration 1809 may bend at the portion of the separation hole 1828c, and the appearance of the decoration 1809 may be deteriorated.

  The erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d has a shape in which the shaft supporting portion 1828e protrudes in a rectangular shape at the lower corner of the mounting recess 1828b, and has a shape corresponding to the notch 1809a at the lower corner of the decorative body 1809. Has become. In this embodiment, the upper edge of the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1828d is set as a contact surface serving as a reference for sticking the decorative body 1809.

  Since the incorrect sticking prevention portion 1828d protrudes from the mounting recess 1828b, the weight of the first member 1828 increases, but the wrong sticking prevention portion 1828d is provided at a position close to the axis of the shaft portion 1828g. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1828d can be reduced as much as possible, and an increase in the load applied to the rotational driving of the first member 1828 can be suppressed. In addition, since the erroneous sticking prevention portions 1828d are provided at the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b, the first member 1828 can be balanced, and uneven wear of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. And the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

  In the first member 1828, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b be 1 mm or more. If the distance is shorter than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, a portion outside the mounting concave portion 1828b is likely to be chipped.

  When attaching the decorative body 1809 to the mounting concave portion 1828b of the first member 1828, first, the cutout portion 1809a of the decorative body 1809 is brought into contact with the contact surface (the erroneous sticking preventing portion 1828d) of the mounting concave portion 1828b, and Then, the glue surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting concave portion 1828b and the adhesive is attached. If the decorative body 1809 is to be pasted upside down, the shape of the erroneous sticking preventing portion 1828d is different from the shape of the R chamfer at the corner of the decorative body 1809. Can be noticed, and the decorative body 1809 can be pasted in a regular orientation. Also, when the decorative body 1809 is attached to the mounting recess 1828b in the wrong direction, the corner of the decorative body 1809 protrudes from the mounting recess 1828b at the position of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d, and the decorative body 1809 is provided to the worker. 1809 can be noticed.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828, and the decorative body 1809 is pressed from the other side to the one side by the tip of the rod. The vicinity can be removed so as to be turned up to one side, and the turned up portion can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828) by pulling the turned up portion by the operator, and the other The same operation and effect as the configuration can be obtained.

  In addition, since the erroneous sticking prevention part 1828d is provided in the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decorative body 1809 is stuck, if the decorative body 1809 is to be stuck in a direction different from the normal one, the decorative body 1809 is stuck. Is different from the shape of the corner portion of the decorative member 1828d, the mistake in the orientation of the decorative body 1809 can be noticed, and the decorative body 1809 is bonded to the first member 1828 in the regular direction. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1809 from being shipped while being attached in the wrong direction.

  Furthermore, since the separation hole 1828c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation and the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is provided at a position near the axis of rotation, the separation member 1828c acts when the first member 1828 is rotated. Since the rotation moment can be reduced, the load on the rotation driving of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be lightly moved (rotated).

  Also, since two separation holes 1828c and two erroneous sticking prevention portions 1828d are provided in the first member 1828, the forces acting on the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be balanced, and the shaft portions 1828g can be balanced. Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be used as a door member of a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a bonus winning opening, or provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. You may make it the movable member for effects.

  Examples of the decorative body 1809 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metatic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

[13. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
In the present embodiment, the LED 1401 of the function display board 1402 of the function display unit 1400A, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 of the function display unit 1400B, and the LED 1421a of the function display board 1421 of the function display unit 1400C are light emitting means of the present invention. In addition, the front 1405 of the reflector of the function display unit 1400A, the front 1414 of the reflector of the function display unit 1400B, the light guide plate 1423 of the function display unit 1400C, and the invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary board 1424 in the present embodiment respectively serve as image capturing inhibiting means of the present invention. Is equivalent.

  In addition, the display hole 1405a of the front of the reflector 1405 and the display hole 1414a of the front of the reflector 1414 in the present embodiment are used as the light emitting tube of the present invention, and the invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary board 1424 is used as the invisible light emitting means of the present invention. , Respectively.

[14. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special lottery (special lottery result) is determined by the establishment of the starting condition by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. In the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B, after the plurality of LEDs 1401 of the function display substrate 1402 and the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display substrate 1411 are turned on and blinked, the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed. A special symbol indicating the result is displayed by a combination of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b by turning on and off. At this time, light from the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411 a, and the right LED 1411 b is partially emitted by the plurality of display holes 1405 a of the front reflector 1405 and the plurality of display holes 1414 a of the front reflector 1414, which independently radiate forward. Is radiated only to one eye of the player, and at least part of the rest is radiated only to the other eye of the player. Thereby, since the light from all the LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b can be seen, it is possible to visually recognize the lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b in a good state. LED1401, left LED1411a and right LED1 11b due it can be clearly visually recognize the special symbol, the display function of a plurality of LED1401 and left for LED1411a and the right LED1411b can be exhibited without inferior.

  When a plurality of LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b (function display unit 1400A and function display unit 1400B) are photographed by a camera of a digital camera or a mobile phone, as described above, when viewed with both eyes of the player, Since the light from the LED 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b is made visible, only one of the two eyes can be photographed with a monocular camera, and the light emission status of all the LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b is determined. Accurate shooting can be difficult. Therefore, since the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b cannot be accurately captured, a special symbol in which an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player is advantageous is displayed. It is possible to make it impossible to easily determine whether or not there is a special lottery, and it is possible to enjoy an effect suggesting the lottery result of the special lottery to the end, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the function display unit 1400A, a part of the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is inclined in the front-rear direction toward the position of one eye of the player, and the other is inclined in the other eye of the player. It is tilted with respect to the front and rear direction toward the position, and is directed straightly in the front and rear direction. Accordingly, in addition to the same operation and effect as described above, the inclination of the display hole 1405a allows the players other than the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the light from all the LEDs 1401 in a good state. Because it is possible to make it difficult for other players, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, it is possible to reduce the possibility of peeping from other players, You can entertain the game without hesitation.

  Further, in the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of left LEDs 1411a and the plurality of right LEDs 1411b mounted on the function display board 1411 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) in the left-right direction, and then in front of them. Is provided with a reflector front 1414 having a plurality of display holes 1414a, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, since each display hole 1414a is directed straight in the front-rear direction, a plurality of displays are provided. It becomes easy to remove the mold when the hole 1414a is molded, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, in the function display unit 1400C, since the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a mounted on the function display board 1421 can be seen from the player side through the transparent light guide plate 1423, the special pattern by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be played in a good state. Can be shown to others. At this time, when the invisible light is irradiated from the invisible light LED 1424a to the side surface of the light guide plate 1423, the invisible light incident from the side surface is radiated from the light guide plate 1423 toward the player in front. Since the emitted invisible light cannot be seen by the player, the special design by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be clearly recognized through the light guide plate 1423, and the display function by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be exhibited without inferiority. Then, if the digital camera or the like shoots from the front while the invisible light LED 1424a is emitting light, the invisible light radiated forward from the light guide plate 1423 will be captured depending on the type of the digital camera or the like. The light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a provided behind is hard to be reflected by being brightly illuminated, and the light emitting state of the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be hardly determined. Can be embodied.

  In the function display unit 1400 or the like, the main control board 1310 may blink a plurality of LEDs at a speed at which the player can recognize that the special symbol is lit. Thereby, even if the plurality of LEDs of the function display unit 1400 are blinked at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310, it seems to be lit from the player, so that the display of the special symbol by the plurality of LEDs is clear. It can be shown, and the display function by the plurality of LEDs can be sufficiently exhibited. When the LED blinking at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 is photographed by a digital camera or the like, the image may appear to be turned off although the LED is turned on depending on the shutter speed. Even if a plurality of LEDs that appear in the (state) are photographed, the LEDs are turned on and off or shot off depending on the timing of the shutter release, making it difficult to determine the light emission status of the multiple LEDs. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized. The predetermined speed at which the LED is blinked by the main control board 1310 is preferably in the range of 30 Hz to 100 Hz. If the blinking speed is slower than this, the LED does not appear to be lit and the special symbol fluctuates. This is because the image blinks as if it were flashing, and if the flashing speed is faster than this, the image is shot in a lit state at the time of shooting.

  In addition, a high-brightness LED that can radiate light of higher brightness than the LED of the function display unit 1400 or the like may be provided near the function display unit 1400 or the like. Accordingly, when a high-brightness LED provided close to the function display unit 1400 or the like is caused to emit light, the high-brightness light from the LED causes dazzling, but a dynamic range in which the brightness of the player (human) is felt. Is large, the light from the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the like can be seen while being dazzling, so that the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the like can be recognized. The display function can be fully exhibited. If the function display unit 1400 or the like is photographed with a digital camera or the like while the high-brightness LED is emitting light, the dynamic range for the brightness of the digital camera or the like is narrower than that of a human, so halation is performed by light from the high-brightness LED. Is generated, and a portion of the function display unit 1400 or the like can be prevented from being imaged due to overexposure in the vicinity of the LED. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 and the like unclear, and to implement the pachinko machine 1 having the same operation and effect as described above.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, a plurality of decorative bodies (a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front effecting unit 3100 of the back unit 3000) are provided. In the front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127, the respective decorative portions (back front left logo decorative portion 3121, back front left upper logo decorative portion 3122, and back front) The left sub-decoration unit 3123) is provided in front of the back-front left decoration unit 3120 in a normal state in which the light-emitting means (LED mounted on the back-front left decoration board 3128) does not emit light. The translucent opaque white panel panel 1110A can obscure the front left upper logo decoration portion 3122 and the like of the rear front left decoration unit 3120, making it difficult to recognize. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the logo decoration section 3122 and the like on the back front, and to make the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 look bright by the white color. Can be prominent.

  Then, when a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative unit 3120 are appropriately illuminated and decorated by the plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative unit 3120 according to the progress of the game, the light of the luminously decorated back front left upper logo decorated part 3122 etc. Is illuminated forward through the translucent panel plate 1110A, and the luminous decoration such as the upper left front logo decoration portion 3122 is reflected on the white panel plate 1110A. The light emitting decoration such as the front upper left logo decoration part 3122 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration such as the front left upper logo decoration part 3122 and the like, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, by illuminating the front left upper logo decoration portion 3122 and the like of the front left decoration unit 3120, the player can be made aware of the existence of the front left upper logo decoration portion 3122 and the like that could not be foreseen. Because it can do, it can surprise the player greatly, can make the player strongly think that a chance has come, and can show the player a luminous effect with high staging effect to the player, and entertain the player A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the color of the translucent opaque panel plate 1110A is white, a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, rear front left decorative unit 3124) of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 provided at the rear are provided. The left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127) have respective decorative portions (first front left logo decorative portion 3124c, first back left logo decorative portion 3124d, One upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first left sub decoration part 3124f, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, second left sub decoration part 3125f, third back left logo decoration part 3126d, The light emission color decorated in the three upper left logo decoration portions 3126e, the third left sub decoration portion 3126f, and the base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d) is played through the panel plate 1110A as it is. Can be shown to the player, and the luminous effects of various colors can be shown to the player, and the various luminous effects can make it difficult for the player to be bored, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player. it can.

  In addition, the decoration portions having the shapes related to each other (“the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d”, the “first One upper left logo decoration portion 3124e, second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e, third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e, base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d "," first left sub decoration portion 3124f, second left sub decoration portion 3125f, third A plurality of decorative bodies (a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125, a back front left third decorative body 3126, and a back front left decorative body) provided with a left sub decorative part 3126f ") The base 3127) is overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the decorative portions are independently formed by light emitting means (LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front left upper decorative board 3129, the back front left lower decorative board 3130). Since the light decoration can be used, the position of each decoration part in the front-back direction is different, so if each decoration part is illuminated decoration, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect with a sense of depth, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, decorations related to each other of the plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). (“First front left logo decoration 3124c, first back left logo decoration 3124d, second back left logo decoration 3125d, third back left logo decoration 3126d”, “first upper left logo decoration 3124e, Second upper left logo decoration 3125e, third upper left logo decoration 3126e, base upper left logo decoration 3127d "," first left sub decoration 3124f, second left sub decoration 3125f, third left sub decoration 3126f "). Since the light emitting means (LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front left upper decorative board 3129, the back front left lower decorative board 3130, and the like) are illuminated in appropriate order by the light emitting means, the movement of the movement is improved. The player can show the player a luminous effect, and can strongly attract the player's interest. At the same time, he can make the player think that something is good. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, it is provided in each of a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). Decoration parts ("first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, Second upper left logo decoration 3125e, third upper left logo decoration 3126e, upper left logo decoration 3127d "," first left sub decoration 3124f, second left sub decoration 3125f, third left sub decoration 3126f ") Since the light emitting means (LEDs on the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front left upper decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130) can be independently illuminated and decorated, Variety emission effect by combining escutcheon for decorating appropriately can show the player and it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player. In addition, since each decorative portion can be independently illuminated and decorated, the combination of the decorative portions to be illuminated and decorated in accordance with the progress of the game provides an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage. ) Can be suggested to the player.

  In addition, each decoration body of the back front left decoration unit 3120 (back front left first decoration body 3124, back front left second decoration body 3125, back front left third decoration body 3126, and back front left decoration body base 3127). , Light-shielding portions (divided decorative portions 3124a, 3124a, 312a) are provided between decorative portions (front left logo decorative portion 3121, front left upper logo decorative portion 3122, and front left sub decorative portion 3123) provided at different positions from each other. Since the partitioning decorative portion 3125c and the partitioning decorative portion 3126c) are provided, the other decorative portion emits light by blocking light for causing one decorative portion to emit light and decorate the other decorative portion by the light shielding portion. Decoration can be prevented, and only one (desired) decorative portion can be illuminated. Therefore, since a plurality of decorative portions provided in one decorative body can be individually illuminated and decorated, a variety of luminous effects can be achieved by illuminating and decorating appropriate decorative portions as the game progresses. Can be shown to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the game.

  In addition, each decoration body of the back front left decoration unit 3120 (back front left first decoration body 3124, back front left second decoration body 3125, back front left third decoration body 3126, and back front left decoration body base 3127). , A plurality of decorative portions (back front left logo decorative portion 3121, back front left upper logo decorative portion 3122, and back front left sub decorative portion 3123) are provided at different positions from each other, and a light shielding portion (separating decorative portion 3124a) is provided therebetween. By providing the partitioning decorative portion 3125c and the partitioning decorative portion 3126c), each of them can be independently illuminated and decorated, so that each decorative portion in the decorative body has a completely different type of decoration, so that the game progresses. Can be shown to the player in different modes according to the light, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be entertained by the luminous effect Bets can be, the reduction of interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the respective decorative bodies of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) , A plurality of decorative portions (a back front left logo decoration portion 3121, a back front left upper logo decoration portion 3122, and a back front left sub-decoration portion 3123) include a hole-shaped light shielding portion (a partition decoration portion 3124a, a partition decoration portion 3125c). Since the partitioning decorative portion 3126c) is provided, light for making one decorative portion emit light is emitted from a part of the light shielding portion to the outside. Can be done. Therefore, by forming the light-shielding portion in a predetermined shape, the light-emitting decoration of the light-shielding portion in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the decorative portion can be shown to the player, and a more diverse light-emitting effect can be performed.

  In addition, since the back front left first decorative body 3124 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 has the penetrating decorative portion 3124b penetrating back and forth in a predetermined shape, the decorative portion according to the progress of the game. When the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, and the first left sub decoration part 3124f are illuminated, the peripheral surface of the penetrating decoration part 3124b emits light. Since the decoration is performed, the light-emitting decoration of the penetrating decoration part 3124b can be shown to the player in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the decoration part, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed on the game panel 5B by the change of the environment such as temperature and humidity. Even if the cell 1140 expands and contracts more, the cell 1140 can be freely expanded and contracted since the cell 1140 is provided so as to be able to expand and contract with respect to the panel plate 1110, and even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes. There is no wrinkle or crack in the cell 1140, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be maintained. At this time, the cell 1140 is provided behind a portion of the panel plate 1110 opposite to the predetermined direction in which the opening 1112 to which the center role 2500 is attached is offset, that is, behind a wide portion of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the pattern of the cell 1140 seen through the transparent panel board 1110 can be made easily visible to the player, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be sufficiently exhibited. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved by the picture, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the cell 1140 is provided on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a stretchable state, and is not attached to the game panel (panel plate) as in the related art. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, in the panel plate 1110 to be cut, the cells 1140 can be provided after the cutting, so that the cells 1140 are not damaged when the panel plate 1110 is cut. Further, the cut surface does not become rough due to the difference in the material or the like between the panel plate 1110 and the cell 1140, and the finishing step after the cutting process can be omitted. On the other hand, in a game panel (panel plate) formed to have an opening by cutting or injection molding, since the cell 1140 is not attached, the labor required for attachment can be eliminated. Therefore, the cell 1140 can be provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 more easily than in the conventional technique, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the usage of the cell 1140 is smaller than when the cell 1140 is provided on the entire surface of the panel board 1110. Can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the cell 1140 is detachable from the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5B) can be attached to or replaced with a cell 1140 having a different pattern from the panel board 1110. 3) It is possible to easily cope with the specification change and the model change, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the cells 1140 can be illuminated and decorated by the light emission of various LEDs provided in the back front rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the pattern of the cells 1140 seen through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 emits light. By being decorated, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a, and the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened. The game balls B flowing in the area 5a can be easily seen.

  Furthermore, the cells 1140 provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 can be illuminated and decorated by various LEDs provided on the back front rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The luminous decoration allows the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a to be illuminated from the rear to make them look like a silhouette. Since the drop can be suppressed and the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily recognized by showing them in silhouette, the driving strength of the game balls B is finely adjusted. The pachinko machine 1 that devises the driving operation of the game ball B can enjoy the original game.

  In addition, since the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, it is easy for the player to focus on the pattern of the cell 1140 when looking inside the game area 5a. Therefore, just by looking at the game panel 1100 (the panel board 1110), the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused, and the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is visually recognized. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B entertain and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a cell 1140 having a predetermined pattern is provided behind a part of the transparent panel plate 1110, the back unit 3000 provided behind the rear unit 3000 provided with the pattern of the cell 1140 is provided. The decorative body and the like of the unit 3100 can be hidden from the player side. Therefore, in a state in which the decorative body provided behind the cell 1140 is not illuminated and decorated, the pattern of the cell 1140 can prevent the player from noticing the presence of the decorative body. When the decorative body is illuminated and decorated in accordance with the progress of the game, the cell 1140 is illuminated and decorated by the light from the decorative body. Can be noticed, can greatly surprise the player, can make the player strongly think that a chance has arrived, and can show the player a luminous effect with a higher stage effect, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the cell 1140 can hide the rear left movable decorative body 3301 as the movable decorative body provided behind at the rear of the lower back effect unit 3300 so as not to be seen from the player side, The back left movable decorative body 3301 is moved in accordance with the progress of the game from a state in which the cell 1140 is not visible to a state in which the cell is visible through an opening 1112 penetrating the panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 before and after. Thus, a movable effect in which the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 appears according to the progress of the game can be shown. Accordingly, the appearance of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the like can indicate to the player that a chance has come, so that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player (for example, “ It is possible to strongly think that a “big hit” game state) will occur, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a in which the game ball B circulates is provided in the game board 5A, is formed as a translucent opaque milky white. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a look bright, to make it easier to see the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a, and to use the LEDs and the effect display device 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1. , Light from the lighting in the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other game machines such as other pachinko machines and slot machines, etc. Is diffused on the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, so that the panel plate 1110A can be seen as if it is self-luminous. Furthermore, when the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 capable of irradiating light to the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110A emit light, the light is diffused by the translucent opaque milky white panel plate 1110A. Therefore, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be softly illuminated and decorated like a fluorescent lamp like indirect lighting with a soft feeling, and the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened, and the glare caused by the LED 1130a can be reduced. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be suppressed and is easy on the eyes of the player. Therefore, as compared with the conventional pachinko machine using a plywood or a transparent board as a game panel (panel board), the game panel 5 has a game area 5a that emits light like a fluorescent lamp, which has never been seen before. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game panel 1100 (the game area 5a), and the player can feel that something is good. A feeling of expectation can be raised, and the game balls B flowing in the game area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel board 1110A, so that the game balls B can be easily recognized. With this, it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest.

  If a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the color development of the pattern applied to the decorative film by the milky white panel plate 1110A can be improved. The decoration of the picture can improve the appearance in the game area 5a, and the LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 emits light to make the pattern of the decorative film emit light through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the appearance in the game area 5a can be further improved, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, when a decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, a portion to be light-embellished by the LED 1130a or the like tends to be unclear due to the opaque panel plate 1110A having translucency. In order to achieve this, light emission is achieved by devising the design (or devising the arrangement of the LED 1130a and the like) so that the part where the luminous decoration becomes unclear is hidden by a part of the design of the decorative film. The decoration can be seen clearly, and the decoration effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, when a decorative film is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, by using a material having excellent wear resistance as the decorative film, the panel film is prevented from flowing through the game ball B by the decorative film. The front surface of 1110A can be protected. Accordingly, it is not necessary to use a material having high wear resistance as the material of the panel plate 1110A, and a low-grade, low-cost material can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, when a decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, the light applied from the back of the decorative film to the front causes the shadow of the pattern of the decorative film to be reflected on the panel plate 1110A. The pattern can be shown to the player, and the player can see the luminous effect of projecting the pattern, characters, etc. of the lightly wound film from the back onto the panel board 1110A. It can be made to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Alternatively, as the light-emitting effect, a game film B is projected from the rear on a panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, such as a pattern or a character that prompts a “right-hand” with a decorative film, an operation of the effect operation unit 301, or the like. , The operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect, etc., can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

  When decorative films are provided on both the front and rear surfaces of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, when light is emitted to the side surface of the panel plate 1110A by the LED 1130a or the like of the panel decoration substrate 1130, as described above, the panel becomes When the board 1110A is self-illuminated, the decorative film on the front side is illuminated and decorated, and the player can enjoy the pattern of the decorative film on the front side. On the other hand, when light is emitted from the rear of the game panel 1100 to the front by the LED or the like, the shadow of the pattern of the decorative film on the rear side is reflected on the panel board 1110A, and the shadow overlaps with the pattern of the decorative film on the front side. The pattern of the decorative film on the side will appear to change. Thereby, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the upper left front logo decoration portion 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the rear front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 provided behind the translucent opaque milky white panel board 1110A. Is decorated with light in accordance with the progress of the game, the light is transmitted to the front (to the player side) to some extent through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100. The decorative portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 can be partially illuminated and decorated in the same manner, and the presence of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 provided at the rear are determined. It can make players aware. Therefore, by seeing the luminous decoration of the upper left front logo decoration portion 3122 and the upper right front logo decoration portion 3142 through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, there may be something good for the player. It can be made to remind, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the upper left front logo decoration portion 3122 and the lower right front logo decoration portion 3142 provided behind the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are formed of a colorless and transparent material, the panel plate 1110A is milky white. , The colors of the upper left front logo decoration portion 3122 and the upper right front logo decoration portion 3142 are assimilated with the color of the panel board 1110A so that they cannot be seen from the front. The presence of the upper left logo decoration 3122 and the front upper right logo decoration 3142 can be made unnoticed. Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 are illuminated, as described above, the luminescence decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 through the panel plate 1110A. , The player can be greatly surprised by noticing the existence of the upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the upper right logo decoration part 3142, whose presence could not be foreseen, and that the player has a chance. In addition to making the player feel strongly, the light emitting effect with a higher effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the normal state, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower lower production unit 3300 are located behind the opaque milky white panel board 1110A, so that they cannot be visually recognized from the front. It moves to a position behind the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A in accordance with the progress of the game, and becomes visible through the opening 1112. A movable effect in which the movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 appear can be shown. Accordingly, the appearance of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 can indicate to the player that a chance has come, so that the player has an advantage over the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous game state (for example, a game state of "big hit") will occur, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, by enabling the back left rear decorative ornament 3301 and the back right movable decorative body 3302 to be illuminated, the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are not visible when they are invisible. A panel having translucency by lighting / flashing the light-emitting decorations of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 (or the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142). Through the board 1110A, the player can be made aware of the existence of the back left rear decorative ornament 3301 and the back right movable decorative body 3302, and the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 can be visually recognized. Depending on whether or not the player moves to the state (whether the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back right movable decorative body 3302 appear), the player can be excitedly excited. Come, it is possible to perform a moving effect capable of causing more entertain the player.

  Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a is provided in the front is made opaque with transparency, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, the panel board 1110A is placed on the front of the panel board 1110A. Since it is easy to focus, just by looking at the panel board 1110A, the game ball B naturally flowing in the game area 5a is focused. At this time, as described above, since the panel board 1110A is in a state where the panel board 1110A is self-illuminated by the light from the outside or the like and the light from the LED 1130a that emits light, the light flows through the game area 5a. The game ball B that is present can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel board 1110A, so that the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily recognized, and the movement of the game ball B The pachinko machine 1 which devises the operation of playing the game balls B, while making it possible to make the fine adjustment of the driving strength of the game balls B easy, We can entertain game of the body.

  Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made of a translucent opaque milky white material (synthetic resin), compared with the case where the panel board is made transparent, a lower grade synthetic resin is used. It can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the panel plate 1110A is made of a translucent opaque milky white color, the color of the decorative body provided in the present pachinko machine 1 is relatively conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the decorative body is strongly exhibited. To provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player, and the LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 and the decoration provided behind the game panel 1100. When the body or the like is luminously decorated, the luminous color can be transmitted forward as it is, so that the player can enjoy a colorful luminous effect.

  In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque and milky white having translucency, a decorative body (for example, a back front left decorative unit 3120) or the like provided behind the game panel 1100 can be viewed from the front (from the player side). It can be made invisible. When the decorative body provided behind the game panel 1100 is illuminated and decorated, light from the decorative body is transmitted forward through the light-transmitting game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A). The light emitting decoration can be partially provided, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the decorative body provided at the rear. In addition, when the decorative body provided behind the game panel 1100 is moved to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110A, the decorative body can be visually recognized from the front through the opening 1112. It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the decorative body is hidden or appears. In this manner, various light-emitting effects and movable effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the light from the LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the like can be diffused by the translucent opaque milky white panel plate 1110A, the gaming panel 1100 can be softly light-emitting decorated with a soft feeling. Thus, the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened as if it were indirect lighting, and at the same time, the glare caused by the LED 1130a can be suppressed, and the pachinko machine 1 that is easy on the eyes of the player can be provided.

  In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 1130a and the like of the panel decoration substrate 1130, for example, the LEDs 1130a can be provided on the left and right sides of the panel plate 1110A, and each can emit light independently. Then, when the right side is illuminated according to the situation (progress) of the game, the right portion in the game area 5a becomes brighter through the panel board 1110A, so that the interest of the player is increased by the right part of the game area 5a. , And it can be prompted to hit the game ball B to the right portion of the game area 5a ("hit right"). On the other hand, when the left side emits light, the left portion in the game area 5a becomes bright via the panel board 1110A, so that the interest of the player can be directed to the left part of the game area 5a, and the left part of the game area 5a It is possible to urge the player to hit the game ball B ("left hit"). In this way, by causing the LED 1130a at an appropriate position to emit light, it is possible to intuitively understand that the light emitting decoration of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) advises "left-handed" or "right-handed". Thus, the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B, and can entertain the player with a new sensation of light emission that is not available in the conventional pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the game panel 1100 is constituted by a plate-shaped panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) and a panel holder 1120 which has a frame shape thicker than the panel plate 1110A and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A. Therefore, when the thickness of the panel holder 1120 is set to be the same as the thickness of the game panel of the conventional pachinko machine, the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (the panel plate 1110) in which the game area 5a is provided in front is made larger than that of the conventional game panel. The thickness of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel board 1110A) can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the game panel 1100 is constituted by the panel board 1110 or the panel board 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the panel board 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be detachably attached, and the panel holder 1120 can be used as a common general-purpose part. Becomes Accordingly, by mass-producing the panel holder 1120, the cost of the panel holder 1120 can be reduced. In addition, by manufacturing the panel plate 1110 or the panel plate 1110A corresponding to each model, a new or model change is performed. And other costs can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a state where the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the housing part 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 of the holding member 1060, the elastic claw 1062 is locked to the magnetic sensor 1050, The magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060. Further, in a state where the magnetic sensor 1050 is accommodated in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claw 1072a, the elastic claw 1072a is locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, so that the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 can be used. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5. At this time, since the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 are made of a non-magnetic material, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the game area 5a, the holding member 1060 and the like draw magnetic lines of force from the magnet 1055. Can be avoided, and a decrease in the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, to detect the fraudulent activity using the magnet 1055 at an early stage, and to notify the suspicious magnetism detection by the magnetic sensor 1050 to inform the illegality. The act can be discouraged, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against illegal acts can be provided.

  Further, as described above, the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 made of a nonmagnetic material prevent the magnetic field lines from being drawn from the magnet 1055 and prevent the magnetic lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a with a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reduce the number of magnetic sensors 1050 as compared with the conventional one. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the housing 1061 and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding members 1060 and the locking portions 1071a of the holding members 1071. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claws 1062 and the elastic claws 1072a without using a metal screw made of a magnetic material, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. Such effort can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 is locked to the locking portion 1071a at an appropriate position. Can be provided at an arbitrary position or the position can be easily changed. Accordingly, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or added, the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to a design change or a model change while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. be able to.

  Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged into the accommodating portion 1061 by the projection 1063 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be suppressed from finely vibrating due to the urging by the projection 1063. Accordingly, disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 and occurrence of poor contact can be reduced, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

  In addition, the magnetic sensor 1050 is visually held by the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent. The mounted sensor body 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051 of a different color (for example, black) can be made to stand out. Therefore, the player can strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a genuine one. It is possible to hesitate to perform the act, increase deterrence against fraudulent acts, and reduce the burden on the gaming hall on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, even if the sensor main body 1051 can be seen through the transparent sensor case 1053, a normal player does not pay much attention to the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050, so that he is not bothered. On the other hand, a person who intends to cheat looks closely into the game area 5a, so that the contrast between the white sensor substrate 1052 and the black sensor main body 1051 makes the magnetic sensor 1050 more easily noticeable. I can see it. Therefore, by noticing the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to hesitate to execute a fraudulent act using a magnet, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence.

  Further, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is made white, the sensor substrate 1052 can be made inconspicuous, and the sensor substrate 1052 can be formed as a decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. Can be mistaken. Therefore, even if the sensor substrate 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, a normal player is not bothered and the appearance of the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated.

  Further, since the sensor main body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be viewed from the outside, the presence or absence of damage to the sensor main body 1051 can be checked from the outside, so that the maintenance work of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to reduce the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Since the magnetic sensor 1050 is provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, the holding member 1060 and the holding member 1071 are provided on the game board 5. When attaching using a magnetic body such as a screw when attaching, the part of the holding member 1060 or the holding member 1071 attached to the game board 5 is located at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or in the game area 5a. It can be provided at a position outside the magnetic detection range. Thereby, since the influence of the magnetic material such as the screw can be reduced as much as possible, the magnetism acting on the game area 5a can be reliably detected by the magnetic sensor 1050. The pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence can be provided.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the LED 3176 for causing the light guide plate 3110 and the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 to emit light is mounted in the back-side effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. In front of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, the back lower lower middle decorative substrate 3168, the lower front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169, the lower front lower left outside of the lower front lower effect unit 3160. Decorative substrate 3170, lower front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171, lower front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172, etc., which can be illuminated and decorated by LEDs that irradiate light to the front and lower front lower middle decorative body 3161, lower front lower A left inner decorative body 3163, a lower front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a lower front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a lower front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc. are provided. By providing LEDs 3176 (light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175) behind 1 etc., the LED 3176 is made invisible (hidden) by the lower front middle decorative body 3161 and the like. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the LED 3176, that is, the light guide plate 3110. In this state, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated and displayed by the LED 3176, and the lower front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like are illuminated by the LED mounted on the lower front lower middle decoration board 3168 and the like. When this is done, the light from the LED 3176 is light reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, whereas the light from the LED on the back front lower middle decoration board 3168 and the like is light directly irradiated forward, The lower middle back decoration 3161 etc., which is luminous decorated than the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, can be made to shine brighter, and the attention of the player is strongly attracted to the lower middle middle decoration 3161 etc. Can be done. Then, since the second picture 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 that is light-emitted is extended upward from a predetermined position (a slightly upper position) close to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 that is light-emission-decorated. Since the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be strongly mistaken for the player as if the light is displayed using the light from the lower front middle decorative body 3161 or the like, which is light-emitting decorated, as a light source. The light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3110, which has not been seen in the above-mentioned pachinko machines, can be shown to the player, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower light guide plate left decorative substrate 3174, the lower light guide plate right decorative substrate 3175, the lower front lower middle decorative body 3161, and the like are provided in front of the light guide plate 3110, the lower light guide plate lower decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate are provided. Since the light from the LED mounted on the lower right decorative board 3175 illuminates the light guide plate 3110 to prevent the transparent light guide plate 3110 from being seen by the player, the second pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be avoided. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can sufficiently exert the effect of the light emission display such as 3112 and the like, and can surely achieve the above-described operation and effect.

  In addition, since the lower middle decorative body 3161 having a light-transmitting property is provided in front of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate are provided. When the LED mounted on the lower right decorative board 3175 emits light, the lower middle lower decorative body 3161 and the like can be illuminated and decorated. In addition to the effect by the light emitting display of the second pattern 3112 and the like of the light guide plate 3110, In addition, the effect of the luminous decoration such as the lower front middle decoration body 3161 can also be shown to the player, and the variety of effects makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated and displayed, and the LEDs mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 are illuminated, as described above, the light guide plate lower left The lower middle back decoration 3161 etc. are brightly shined by the LEDs mounted on the decoration board 3174 and the lower right decoration board 3175 of the light guide plate, and thereby the lower middle back decoration 3161 etc. which are decorated with light emission of the player's interest. The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 extending upward from a predetermined position close to the lower front middle decoration body 3161 and attracting the player's interest to the lower front middle decoration body 3161 It can be directed from 3161 or the like to the upper end where the second picture 3112 extends through the second picture 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. Therefore, a part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, the back-upper upper movable decorative body 3210 that moves up and down in the back-upper upper effect unit 3200, and the like are provided at the upper end where the second pattern 3112 extends. At the point where the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is extended, it is possible to make the player excited by whether or not a further effect (the effect by the effect image, the movable effect, etc.) is executed, and the player can be excited. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of line groups 3114 each of which includes five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position, and each of the lines 3113 emits light independently. Since LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided so as to be able to display and correspond to each line 3113, the first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e of LED group 3177 emit light in order to emit light. The displayed line 3113 changes to show a pseudo animation. Since the lower back middle decorative body 3161 and the like are provided at a lower position near the lower end position (predetermined position) of the plurality of lines 3113, the back surface of the light guide plate 3110 on which the second pattern 3112 is luminously decorated. The light from the front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. can be made to appear to be moving as a light source, so it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and make it seem that there is something good. Thus, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the characteristic operation and effect of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1805, the decorative body 1806, the decorative body 1807L and the decorative body 1807R, the decorative body 1808, the decorative body 1809, and the gate seal 2811 in the present embodiment are used as the decorative body, and the glue surface 1804b in the present embodiment. On the glue surface, the first member 1823, the first member 1824, the first member 1825, the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the first member 1827, the first member 1828, and the gate main body 2810 in the present embodiment. The flat plate portion 1823a, the flat plate portion 1824a, the flat plate portion 1825a, the flat plate portion 1826a, the flat plate portion 1827a, the flat plate portion 1828a, and the front plate portion 2810a in the present embodiment correspond to the flat plate portion, respectively. In addition, the mounting recesses 1823b, 1824b, 1825b, 1826b, 1827b, 1828b, and 2810b of the present embodiment are used as mounting recesses, and the separation holes 1823c, 1827c, and The separation hole 1828c and the separation hole 2810d are provided in the separation hole. 1828d and the incorrect sticking prevention unit 2810c correspond to the wrong sticking prevention unit, respectively. Furthermore, the contact surface of the first member 1823, the contact surface of the first member 1824, the contact surface of the first member 1825, the contact surfaces of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R, and the contact surface of the first member 1827 in this embodiment. The contact surface of the first member 1828 and the contact surface of the gate body 2810 correspond to a positioning part. From here to the paragraph [1873], the decorative body is the decorative body 1804, the pedestal member is the first member 1823, the flat plate portion is the flat plate portion 1823a, the mounting concave portion is the mounting concave portion 1823b, the separating hole is the separating hole 1823c, and mis-adhesion is prevented. Each of the components is described as a representative, such as an erroneous sticking prevention unit 1823e, and the positioning unit is a contact surface of the first member 1823 (an erroneous sticking prevention unit 1823e). Has the same function and effect, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a part of the peripheral wall of the attachment concave portion 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is used as the contact surface of the first member 1823 (the erroneous attachment preventing portion 1823e). Therefore, when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting concave portion 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, two adjacent sides of the decorative body 1804 are applied to the peripheral wall portion of the mounting concave portion 1823b by the first member 1823. The decorative body 1804 can be positioned with respect to the first member 1823 by abutting on a portion that is a surface (an erroneous sticking preventing portion 1823 e) and aligning and pasting the same. Can be easily performed, and the decorative body 1804 can be accurately attached to a regular position. Therefore, the decorative member 1804 can be prevented from being attached to the first member 1823 in a state where the decorative member 1804 is inclined or displaced by the contact surface (the incorrect sticking preventing portion 1823e) of the first member 1823. In addition, since the appearance of the first member 1823 can be suppressed from being deteriorated, the decoration effect of the decorative body 1804 can be surely exerted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decorative body 1804 can be accurately adhered to a regular position by the contact surface of the first member 1823 (the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1823e), the decorative body 1804 can be easily adhered to a correct position, and the decoration can be easily performed. Failure to attach the body 1804 can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the decorative body 1804 has an asymmetric shape, the orientation of the decorative body 1804 can be prevented from being mistaken, and the decorative body 1804 can be stuck to the flat portion 1823a of the first member 1823 in the correct direction. The decorative effect of 1804 can be reliably exhibited.

  In addition, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e protruding from the peripheral wall of the mounting concave portion 1823b of the first member 1823 is provided, if the decorative body 1804 is stuck in an incorrect direction, the decoration at the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e is made. Since the body 1804 is turned up, it is possible to recognize that the decoration body 1804 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decoration body 1804 is re-applied in the correct direction to ensure the decoration effect of the decoration body 1804. Can be demonstrated.

  In addition, since the separation hole 1823c penetrating the flat plate portion 1823a is provided in the mounting recessed portion 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823. Then, when the back end of the decorative body 1804 is pressed by the tip, a part of the decorative body 1804 is lifted to the front side from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 against the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b, and the decorative body 1804 By pulling the part, it can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily peeled off.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative body 1804 having a predetermined decoration is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, The appearance of the first member 1823 can be improved, and the decorative member 1804 can be supported by the first member 1823. Also, since the mounting recesses 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached are recessed from the surface of the flat plate portion 1823a, when the decorative body 1804 is bonded to the mounting recesses 1823b, the mounting recesses in the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 are formed. Since the periphery of the 1823b is in the state of surrounding the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be enhanced by being bordered by the portion, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body 1804 can be easily exhibited. As a result, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a includes a band-shaped part on the periphery of the decorative body 1804 and a band-shaped part obliquely crossing the band-shaped part. Since it is provided only in a specific part and is not provided on the entire back surface, the bonding strength is lower than in the past. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the back end of the decorative body 1804 is pressed by the tip thereof, the first member is pressed against the adhesive force of the glue surface 1804b with a relatively weak force. The decorative body 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the decorative body 1823, and even if the strength of the decorative body 1804 itself is weak, the decorative body 1804 can be removed without being broken on the way. Can be improved.

  Also, from the above, when the decorative body 1804 cannot be correctly attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1804 is separated from the back side of the first member 1823. The decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a by passing the rod-shaped member through the hole 1823c and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the back side with the tip thereof, so that the decorative body 1804 can be easily re-attached. . Further, in a state where the first member 1823 is detached from the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823, and the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the back side by the tip thereof, whereby the first member 1823 is pressed. Since the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, the replacement work of the decorative body 1804 accompanying the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, since the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a by using the separation hole 1823c, it is possible to easily perform a separating operation for each material with respect to the components of the pachinko machine 1. The cost for disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position not in contact with the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire surface of the glue surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Therefore, by providing the glue surface 1804b only on a part (specific part) of the decorative body 1804, the bonding strength is lower than before, but since the entire glue surface 1804b is bonded to the flat plate portion 1823a, It is possible to prevent the adhesive strength from being unnecessarily reduced due to the separation hole 1823c being applied to the glue surface 1804b. The decorative body 1804 is sufficiently adhered to the flat plate portion 1823a while maintaining the adhesive strength sufficiently. Can be attached.

  Also, since the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided at the peripheral band-shaped portion and the band-shaped portion obliquely crossing (diagonal portion), the decorative body 1804b is formed by the band-shaped portion of the glue surface 1804b. Since the peripheral edge of 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804 can be prevented from floating from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be hardly peeled off from the peripheral edge as a starting point. Further, since a portion near the center of the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a by a band-shaped portion that crosses the glue surface 1804b obliquely, the first member can be changed due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. Even if the difference in contraction between the 1823 and the decorative body 1804 is large, it is possible to reduce swelling and wrinkling of the decorative body 1804, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative body 1804 from deteriorating. Accordingly, the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be reliably exhibited, and the larger decorative body 1804 can be stuck to the flat plate portion 1823a in a favorable state, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the glue surface 1804b is provided on the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 are made to have a light transmitting property, and the back side of the first member 1823 is directed to the decorative body 1804 side. When a light source such as an LED for irradiating light is provided, the band-shaped glue surface 1804b is located at a position where light from the light source is not obstructed, and the light is diffused or attenuated by the glue surface 1804b to decorate. Since it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the appearance such as the luminous decoration of the body 1804, the luminous decoration of the decorative body 1804 is performed in a good state, or the light source is visually recognized in a good state through the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high effect and display effect.

  In addition, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the attachment recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a in the first member 1823, the decoration hole 1804 is attached to the attachment recess 1823b so that the separation hole 1823c is difficult to see or hide from the front side. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the separation hole 1823c from being deteriorated by the separation hole 1823c, to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1823c, and to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent activity using the separation hole 1823c. be able to.

  In addition, since the separation hole 1823c is provided at a position close to the periphery of the decoration 1804, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823, and the back surface of the decoration 1804 is pressed. Then, since the part of the decorative body 1804 pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804, the peripheral side is more likely to float from the part with which the rod-shaped member is in contact, and the attached decorative body 1804 can be more easily removed.

  Further, since the separation hole 1823c is provided at a position close to the peripheral edge of the decoration 1804, when the decoration 1804 is pressed by the rod-shaped member from the back side of the first member 1823 through the separation hole 1823c, as described above. In addition, since the edge side of the decorative body 1804 rises from the flat plate portion 1823a from the portion where the rod-shaped member is in contact, the floating portion of the decorative body 1804 is gripped and pulled, so that the decorative body 1804 is lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a. And can be easily removed.

  In addition, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in such a size that a circle having a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm can come into contact with the separation hole 1823c, an upper limit of the size of the separation hole 1823c is set in addition to the same operation and effect as described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the size of the glue surface of the decorative body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary due to the presence of the separation hole 1823c, and it is possible to maintain desired bonding strength to the flat plate portion 1823a.

  Further, as described above, since the mounting concave portion 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a, the decorative body 1804 is bonded using the boundary portion between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting concave portion 1823b as a guide. By attaching the decorative body 1804, it is possible to easily attach the decorative body 1804 to a correct position, and it is possible to reduce failure in attaching the decorative body 1804 and suppress an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, since the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting concave part 1823b recessed from the flat plate portion, a decorative screwdriver 1804 is removed from the front side so that the decorative body 1804 and the bottom surface of the mounting concave part 1823b are removed like a flathead screwdriver. Even if an attempt is made to insert a simple tool, the insertion of the tool is hindered by the peripheral wall portion of the mounting recess 1823b which is recessed. However, the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is inserted into the portion covered by the decorative body 1804. Since it is provided, the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting concave portion 1823b to which the decoration 1804 is attached. As described above, the rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side and the decoration 1804 is formed. The decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b by pressing the Can, it is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

  Further, in the conventional technology (pachinko machine), since the hole for peeling off the seal penetrates to the rear side of the pachinko machine (game board), a linear tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the hole. Thus, it is possible to reach the path of the game ball B, a signal line, or the like, and there is a problem that an illegal act is easily performed. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see the second member 1841, the second member 1842, and the like in FIG. 181) that can close the separation hole 1823c on the back side of the first member 1823. Thereby, in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1, since the back side of the separation hole 1823c is closed from the outside by the second member, a hole that passes to the opposite side of the game board like a conventional pachinko machine. Can be prevented from penetrating into the gaming board 5 through the hole, and a wrongdoing can be prevented.

  When the second member (see the second member 1841, the second member 1842, and the like in FIG. 181) that closes the separation hole 1823c is provided on the back side of the first member 1823 as described above, the unauthorized tool is moved from the front side. Even if it penetrates through the decorative body 1804 and is inserted into the separation hole 1823c, the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the second member, and the insertion (intrusion) of the second member outside (inside the game board 5) is blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the gaming board 5 from the front side through the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing an illegal act from being performed, and also preventing the unauthorized tool from being decorated with the decorative body 1804. , A trace is left on the decorative body 1804, so that the execution of a fraudulent act can be hesitated, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent to fraudulent acts can be provided.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the base unit 710 provided on the board unit 700 below the game board 5 in the main body frame 4, the game is played. When the game ball B released from the board 5 is clogged, the security cover 714 closing the opening 711b of the front base 711 is opened, and the minus 713q of the notch 713q above the opening 711b among the plurality of notches 713q. By inserting a rod-shaped tool such as a driver and striking the clogged game balls B, the game balls B are broken and clogging can be easily eliminated. Thereafter, by closing the solution opening 711b with the security cover 714, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the solution opening 711b and the notch 713q. Can be prevented by the security cover 714. If an unauthorized tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the notch 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the tip of the tool is inserted into the first ball path 701. In order to extend from the entrance of the second ball path 702 (the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, the tip of the unauthorized tool is brought into contact with the inner surface of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. Even if the user tries to move the illegal tool while moving, the abutment rib 713o hinders the movement of the unauthorized tool when the abutment comes into contact with any one of the plurality of inhibition ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. can do. In this way, the security cover 714 and the plurality of inhibition ribs 713o can prevent the game board 5 from being cheated through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and have a high deterrent against fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  Further, since the base unit 710 is formed transparent, when the game ball B is clogged in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the place where the ball is clogged can be seen only from the outside. Can be easily recognized, and the elimination work can be made easy to reduce the maintenance burden on the game hall side.

  Also, in the base unit 710, since the discharge path for discharging the game balls B is constituted by the independent first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, many game balls B are released from the game board 5 in a short time. When it is performed, the game balls B can be distributed to each of the first ball paths 701 and the second ball paths 702 and discharged, so that a large number of balls can be distributed to one first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. Concentration of the game balls B can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ball from being easily clogged due to the concentration of the game balls B, and many game balls released from the game board 5 can be prevented. B can be quickly discharged to the island facility side of the gaming hall (out receiving portion, bucket, etc.).

  Further, since the game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be detected by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the first ball path 701 and the second ball Since the number of game balls B discharged from the path 702 can be counted, by comparing with the number of game balls B counted in the upstream game board 5, the game board 5 and the first ball path 701 and the It is possible to determine the presence or absence of a fraudulent act on the two-ball route 702, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to fraudulent acts.

  Further, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 which are independent in the front-rear direction constitute a discharge path, the game board B (safe) The ball (ball) and the game ball B (out ball) not received in the winning port are released to positions different in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball B received in the winning port and the winning ball are released in the winning port. The unaccepted game ball B can be discharged through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 different from each other. The game board includes the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 that can detect the game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 one by one. Since the number of game balls B (safe balls) accepted in the winning opening and the number of game balls B (out balls) not accepted in the winning opening can be counted outside of 5, the game board By comparing the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted in 5 with the number of game balls B (safe balls), it is possible to determine the presence or absence of fraudulent acts on the winning holes of the game board 5, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against fraud.

  Further, the number of the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 provided on the base unit 710 (ball path member 713). There is no need to provide a sensor, an electronic circuit, or the like for counting the number of game balls B to be released (discharged) to the outside of the board 5, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

  Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination opening 711b is attached to the front base 711 so that the hinge can be rotated, even when the elimination opening 711b is opened by the security cover 714, the security cover 714 can be rotated by the hinge axis of the hinge rotation. It is in a state of being attached to the front base 711. Therefore, in order to eliminate clogging of the game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, even if the security cover 714 is opened, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711. Therefore, the security cover 714 can be hardly lost.

  In addition, after the security cover 714 is provided on the lower surface of the base unit 710, the security cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the hinge axis of the security cover 714 is left and right on the front end side of the security cover 714. Since it is provided to extend to the right (horizontal direction), when the clogging of the game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 is eliminated, the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall. With the main body frame 4 opened forward with respect to 2, the security cover 714 is opened, and a predetermined tool is inserted into the elimination opening 711b to eliminate the ball clogging. Thereafter, after the security cover 714 is closed, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. At this time, if the security cover 714 is open, the tip of the security cover 714 is Since the body frame 4 cannot be closed by contact with the object, it is possible to notice that the user has forgotten to close the security cover 714, and the security cover 714 can be closed to securely close the solution opening 711b. Further, even if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 contacts the outer frame 2 when opening the main body frame 4. As a result, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction, so that the main body frame 4 does not stop opening, the main body frame 4 can be opened favorably, and the security cover 714 and the like are damaged. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of cutouts 713q are provided in the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, dust entering the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be reduced. The dust adhering to the game ball B can be discharged below the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 through the notch 713q, and the dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged. , The occurrence of clogging of the game balls B due to dust can be reduced, and the maintenance burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

  In addition, since a part of the plurality of cutouts 713q is also used as a tool insertion port for inserting a tool for eliminating clogging of the ball, there is no need to separately provide a tool insertion port, and the pachinko machine 1 has a configuration. Can be simplified, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Also, in the base unit 710, dust that has fallen through the notch 713q is prevented from hitting the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704. It is possible to prevent the sensor 704 from malfunctioning, and it is possible to reliably detect the game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first member (the game area 5a, the lower right guide passage 2530, the gate 2003, etc.) forming the passage portion of the game board 5 through which the game balls B circulate ( Front component 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and second member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second member 1841, second member). (Part 1842, etc.) and the flat part of the first member (the front of the front component 1000, the flat part 1821a, the flat part 1822a, the front of the front member 2531, the front part 2810a, etc.) Decorative body in which a predetermined decoration is applied to the portion 1021, the attaching concave portion 2531a, the attaching concave portion 2810b, the mounting concave portion 1821b, the mounting concave portion 1822b, and the like). Since the specification seal 1020, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, the gate seal 2811, the decorative body 1801, the decorative body 1802, the decorative body 1803, etc.) are in contact, the decoration of the decorative body improves the appearance of the first member. be able to. In addition, since the contact portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion, when the decorative body is attached to the contact portion, the contact portion in the flat plate portion of the first member is formed. Since the surrounding part of the decorative body surrounds the decorative body, the decorative body can be complemented by being bordered by the portion, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be easily exhibited, and the pachinko machine can be easily displayed. 1 can improve the appearance.

  In addition, a contact portion (spec seal attaching portion 1021, a spec seal affixing portion 1021, a decorative seal (spec seal 1020, a lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, a gate seal 2811, a decorative body 1801, a decorative body 1802, a decorative body 1803, and the like)) is attached. The attaching concave portion 2531a, the attaching concave portion 2810b, the attaching concave portion 1821b, the attaching concave portion 1822b, etc.) are formed into a flat plate portion (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.). The decorative body can be easily attached to the correct position by contacting the decorative body with the part at the boundary between the flat plate part and the contact part as a guide. Can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In this pachinko machine 1, a flat portion (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat portion 1821a, the front portion of the front member 1000, the front member 2531, the gate main body 2810, the first member 1821, the first member 1822, etc.) in the first member (the front member 1000, the front member 2531, the gate member 2810, the first member 1822, etc.). Decoration on the abutting portions (spec seal affixing portion 1021, affixing concave portion 2531a, affixing concave portion 2810b, mounting concave portion 1821b, mounting concave portion 1822b, etc.) recessed from the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, and the like. Body (spec seal 1020, lower right guideway decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.), so that the decorative body is removed from one side. Even if you try to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative body and the So that the insertion of the tool is blocked by the wall portion of the peripheral edge of that Chakuse' portion. On the other hand, the separation holes of the first member (the separation hole 1023, the separation hole 1821d, the separation hole 1822c, the separation hole 2531b, the separation hole 2810d, and the like) are provided in a portion where one side is closed by the decorative body. Therefore, since a separation hole is provided in a contact portion to which the decorative body is to be attached, the rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole from the other side and the decorative body is pressed to one side, so that the contact is made. The contact with the part can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the concave contact part. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 cannot be correctly attached to the flat plate portion of the first member when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the decorative body is formed by the tip. By pressing from the other side, the contact with the flat plate portion can be easily released, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate portion of the first member, and the decorative body can be reattached. . Further, in a state where the first member and the second member are separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the decorative body is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof, whereby the flat plate of the first member is pressed. Since the contact with the part can be easily released, the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate part, and the replacement work of the decorative body accompanying the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, in a state where the first member and the second member are separated from each other, the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate portion using the separation hole. Sorting work for each material can be performed easily, and the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, a flat portion of the first member (the front member 1000, the front member 2531, the gate body 2810, the first member 1821, the first member 1822, etc.) (the front surface of the front member 1000, the flat portion 1821a, the flat portion 1822a, Separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1821d, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate 2810a, etc. (Spec seal 1020, lower right guideway decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) to make the separation hole invisible or concealable from one side. Can be prevented from deteriorating the appearance due to the separation hole, and it is difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole. Rukoto can, can be difficult to maneuver the fraud through the separation hole.

  Then, in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the first member (the front component 1000, the first member 1000) to which the decorative bodies (spec seal 1020, the decorative body 1801, the decorative body 1802, the decorative body 1803, etc.) are attached is attached. Separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c) from the other side of the flat portion (the front surface of front component 1000, flat portion 1821a, flat portion 1822a, etc.) of one member 1821, first member 1822, etc. , Etc.) to extend to the second member (the game panel 1100, the second member 1841, the second member 1842, etc.) by extending the extension portion (the insertion pin 1022, the boss 1821c, the rib 1822d, etc.) so as to surround the second member. The second member is attached to the other side of the first member, and the other side of the separation hole forms a closed space which is shielded from the outside by the extension and the one surface of the second member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted into the separation hole from the outside of the extension portion or the other side of the second member, and to penetrate a hole that passes to the opposite side like a conventional pachinko machine. However, it is possible to prevent a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, and to prevent an illegal act from being performed.

  Further, the other side of the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) is closed by the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.). Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) into the separation hole, the tip of the illegal tool is cut off from the outside. The first member (the front component 1000, the first member 1821, the first member 1822, etc.) and the extending portion (the insertion pin 1022, the boss 1821c, the rib 1822d, etc.) and the first member The insertion (intrusion) into the passage portion (game area 5a, etc.) or the pachinko machine 1 can be blocked by the two members, so that the pachinko machine 1 is inserted from one side through the separation hole. Intrusion of unauthorized tools can be prevented, illegal actions can be prevented through separation holes and passages, and traces will remain on the decorative body when the unauthorized tool penetrates the decorative body, It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can hesitate to execute a wrongdoing and that has a high deterrent to fraudulent acts.

  In addition, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned with respect to each other. Such effort can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. When the positioning member 1841b is inserted into the separation hole 1821d to position the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 with each other, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning protrusion 1841b. The 1821d itself can be used as the closed space described above, and the pachinko machine 1 having the same operation and effect as described above can be provided.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a passage member (including a game area 5a, a lower right guide passage 2530, a detection hole of the gate sensor 2801, and the like) through which the game ball B circulates ( Front members (front component 1000, front member 2531 of center role 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) provided on the front side of gaming panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc. Decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guideway decorative seal 2532, gate seal) in which a predetermined decoration is applied to the decorative part (spec seal attaching part 1021, attaching concave part 2531a, attaching concave part 2810b, etc.) which is the front surface. 2811, etc.), the appearance of the passage member can be improved by decoration of the decorative body. In addition, since the decorative part to which the decorative body is to be attached is recessed backward from the depth of the decorative body in the front-rear direction, when the decorative body is attached to the decorative part, the decorative part of the front member is Since the surrounding portion projects forward from the front surface of the decorative body, the decorative body can be complemented by being bordered by the portion of the front member that projects forward, and the decorative effect of the decorative body decoration And the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, the decorative portions (spec seal attaching portion 1021, attaching concave portion 2531a, attaching concave portion 2810b, and the like) to which the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, and the like) is attached are attached to the rear. The decorative body is guided by using the periphery of the to-be-decored portion of the front member (the front component 1000, the front member 2531 of the center role 2500, the gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) as a guide. The attachment makes it easy to attach the decorative body to a correct position, thereby reducing the failure in attaching the decorative body and suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

  In this pachinko machine 1, decorative portions (spec seal attaching portion 1021, attaching concave portion 2531 a, attaching concave portion) of front members (the front component member 1000, the front member 2531 of the center role 2500, the gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.). 2810b, etc.) are recessed rearward, so that the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) is in contact with the decorative body in a state of being in contact with the part to be decorated. Since the contact surface with the decorative part is located at the back, even if it is attempted to remove the decorative body that is in contact with the part to be decorated, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side, and it takes time to remove the decorative body. On the other hand, since the decoration holes are provided with the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.), the decorative body is pressed forward from behind the front member through the rod-shaped member into the separation hole. This makes it possible to easily release the contact with the to-be-decored part, and to easily remove the decorative body from the to-be-decored part. Therefore, at the time of manufacture, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorative portion of the front member, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body is pressed from the rear by the tip. By doing so, the contact with the decorated part can be easily released, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part, and the decorative body can be reattached.

  Also, the front member (front component 1000, front member 2531 of center role 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) and passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) In a separated state, a rod-shaped member is passed through a separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) from the rear of the front member, and a decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532) is formed by the tip. , The gate seal 2811, etc.) from behind can be easily released from contact with the to-be-decorated portions (spec seal affixing portion 1021, affixing concave portion 2531 a, affixing concave portion 2810 b, etc.). The decorative body can be easily removed from the decorative part, making it easy to replace the decorative body with a model change. Kill. Further, as described above, in a state where the front member and the passage member are separated from each other, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decoration target portion using the separation hole. It is possible to easily perform the sorting operation for each time, and it is possible to reduce the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since a separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, and the like) is provided in the decoration target portion (spec seal attachment portion 1021, attachment depression 2531a, attachment depression 2810b, and the like), the decoration target portion is provided. By attaching a decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guideway decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the separation hole can be made difficult to see or hide from the front, and the deterioration of appearance due to the separation hole is suppressed. In addition to this, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware of the existence of the separation hole, and to make it difficult for the player to plan an illegal act through the separation hole.

  When assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front members (the front component 1000, the center role) to which the decorative bodies (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) are attached are attached. A separation hole (separation) is formed by a passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) attached to the rear side of the front member 2531 of the object 2500, the gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc. The hole 1023, the separation hole 2531b, the separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear, and the hole passing through to the rear side is not penetrated unlike the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent such a linear unauthorized tool from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 and to perform an illegal act. It is possible to prevent.

  In addition, since the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are closed from behind by passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), unauthorized tools are used. Through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) from the front and into the separation hole, the passage member prevents further insertion (intrusion) from the rear. Since it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the passage portion (the game area 5a, the lower right guide passage 2530, the detection hole (gate 2003) of the gate sensor 2801, etc.) from the front through the separation hole. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts and prevent improper tools from penetrating the decorative body, leaving traces on the decorative body Can deter the execution of fraud, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 high deterrent to fraud.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine is used. The present invention may be applied to a machine, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. Further, the present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which a player does not touch the game ball B, or a game machine called a management game machine.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, 1823c, 1827c, 1828c, etc.) capable of separating the decorative body such as a seal are provided. Although the shape of a penetrating hole is shown as), the shape is not limited to this and may be a slit shape or a notch shape.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board (photographing inhibition means, light emission control unit)
1400 Function display unit 1400A Function display unit 1400B Function display unit 1400C Function display unit 1401 LED (light emitting means)
1402 Function display substrate 1403 After reflector 1405 Before reflector (imaging inhibition means)
1405a Display hole (imaging inhibition means, light emission tube)
1411 Function display board 1411a Left LED (light emitting means)
1411b Right LED (light emitting means)
1412 After reflector 1414 Before reflector (imaging inhibition means)
1414a Display hole (imaging inhibition means, light emission cylinder)
1421 Function display substrate 1421a LED (light emitting means)
1422 after reflector 1423 light guide plate (imaging inhibition means)
1424 Auxiliary substrate 1424a Invisible light LED (imaging inhibition means, invisible light emission means)
1425a Reflector front 1425a Display hole 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate 2004 Second starting port

Claims (1)

A plurality of light emitting means for displaying a special symbol indicating a lottery result of a special lottery selected by the establishment of the start condition,
A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of light-emitting means, wherein the display of the special symbol is made visually recognizable by a player, and photographing inhibiting means for making it difficult to photograph the displayed special symbol. .

Images